Full text of "Johannis Wyclif Tractatus de logica"

Ctltnmi itf

ll^IIrsbw

|lrcstalcii liu wvAlXL ^(KAjibj

xv 5000^

Printed in Austria.

IOHANNIS WYCLIF

TRACTATUS

DE LOGICA.

NOW FIRST EDITED FROM THE VIENNA AND PRAGUE MSS.

(VIENNA 4352; UNIV. PRAG. V. E. 14.)

MICHAEL HENRY DZIEWICKI.

VOL. III.

LONDON.
PUBLISHED FOR THE WYCLIF SOCIETY BY TRUBNER & Co.

rATERNOSTEIi HODSE, CIIAIUNG CR09S ROAD.

1899.

Contents of Introduetion.

I. Preliminary Remarks p. V.

II. General view of thc work P- V.

III. Analysis of Vol. III. a) Chapter IX p. IX.

b) Chapter X p. XXV.

IV. Conclusion: The gist of the Nominalistic controversy . p. XXXVI.

■ v j %

INTRODUCTION.

I. Preliminary Remarks.

With the third volume of Logica, Wyclif s lirst great philosophical
work comes to a close. All that should be said as regards the gcnuineness
of the work and its date has already been said in the Introduction tu
Vol. I, and there is no need to repeat it here. As to the state of the
manuscript, a few words mav perhaps be allowed. Very illegible from
the beginning, as stated in the Introductions to Vols. I and II ; it becomes
worse and worse, sometimes intolerably so, as it approaches the end.
This may account for, and to some extent excuse, the numerous short-
comings of the present edition, which no one can regret more than the
editor himself.

I wish to take this opportunity of again most sincerely thanking
all those who have aided me in the work; especially Dr. Furnivall, the
Founder of the Wyclif Society; and Mr. Matthew, whose notes have
more than once been of great service.

The two chapters of Wyclifs book which make up the present
volume were also copied as separate tractates. The last chapter,
however, dealing with time, is quite distinct from the treatise Dc Indivi-
duacione Tcmporis, not yet published. Before entering into a detailed
examination of the contents of these two chapters, I think it advisable
to notice several matters of importance which may strike the reader on
a perusal of the whole.

II. A General View.

It is useless to deny that in many respects this third volume of
Logica will be found unattractive, especially by such as have not made

• r I INTRODUCTION.

a study of works of the kind. The wild boldness of the conclusions
reached, the impossibility of conceiving what Wyclif himself declares
over and over again to be beyond the scope of mathematical specu-
lation, although it deals with Space and Time; above all, the strange-
ness of Wyclifs standpoint, so foreign to all our modern ideas of
Natural Philosophy — will often, no doubt, confuse the reader, and
lead him to pass over unnoticed the many excellent qualities, both of
subtlety and of depth of thought, with which this volume abounds. I
myself, though long engaged in the preparation of this edition, thought
at first that the two tractates on Space and Time were merely side-
issues that might have been lopped off from Wyclifs philosophy without
disadvantage to the whole. But on further consideration my opinion has
been very much modified. His theory of Time and Space appears to
me now as a logical result, partly of his Realism, partly of his doctrine
concerning maxima and minima; and this same theory is, I think, the
root from which his doctrines on the Eucharist necessarily sprang. It
is thus essentially linked with his fundamental doctrines; but it is at the
same time a link, indissolubly connecting them with the further develop-
ments of his theological ideas.

When Wyclif affirmed the objective reality of all universals, he at
once encountered a considerable difficulty in dealing with the phenomenon
of extension. Nominalists, if consistent, say that not only points, but
lines, surfaces, and even volumes, are all cntia rationis — mere fig-
ments of our mind. For a volume is a Universal — One in Many
— containing an infinite multitude of surfaces ; a surface, again, is the uni-
versal of the line; and the line is in like manner the universal of the
point. And for the same reason that they denied this reality, Wyclif was
obliged to maintain it. As to points, they must be real things too, though
not universal, since the line is nothing more than a series of points ;
and is made up of them: at all events, being something in that which
is real, they must be real too. Now, as we have seen in the tvvo former
volumes, Wyclif abjures the doctrine of the indefinitely great, and roundly
asserts that there is a maximum and a minimum for all things. A maxi-
mum of size: therefore space is not absolutely infmite, but only rela-
tively so — relatively to us. There is also a minimum of size, which of
course is the point. Now, what are those real countless points, which
fill all space, and of which all space consists? They are surely not

INTRODUCTION. VII

spiritual. But, if material, huw can material substance coexist in the
same space as thcy? Wc have tu explain how the world fills space,
which is already fdled by these punctal realities.

The answer, however bold it may seem, is but the outcome of
the difficulty just stated, working in Wyclifs mind, already imbued with
the doctrines I have mentioned above. Matter is made up of atoms, each
atom consisting of a number of points, really distinct from one another,
really without length, breadth, or thickness, and yet really touching each
other. One point cannot make length; two begin to make it; their
cssence is to have position of their own, and so, though they touch,
they do not coincide. This non-comcidence is the beginning of length.
Two points do not make a surface, but three do (inchoatively) if the
third is not in a line with the other two; and this is the beginning of
the plane, and indeecl of all surfaces whatsoever. A fourth point not in
the same plane as the other three would be the beginning of volume.
Such are the primordial atoms, which correspond to every point and in
fact are every point in space, for no vacuum is possible. And, were
there any real difference between the reality of mathematical and that
of material points, they would clash together. In short, mathematical
points are real and material; therefore, there can be no others. Co-
penetration, Wyclif asserts, is an absolute impossibility.

If then a vacuum is inconceivable, and space is the same thing as
matter, it follows that, beyond the circumference by which our universe
is bounded, there is no space at all, and that the conception of a straight
line, indefinitely producible, is but a contradiction in terms. The world
being the greatest amount of matter possible, nothing greater can exist;
nor can its size be diminished, for then it would no longer be the
greatest possible.

Here we come to the point where this development of Wyclifs
Realistic doctrines comes in contact — if not in conflict — with the
dogma of Transubstantiation. If the size of the universe cannot be
diminished, is the annihilation of any part of it admissible? Certainly
not. Besides, to each of those points of which the universe consists, it
is essential to have position somewhere; to annihilate one single point
would be to take away, not only its existence, but its very essence too;
or in less Scholastic terminology, it is as impossible to annihilate any
portion of matter as to think away a part of space, which, when once

VIII INTRODUCTION.

created, is absolutely necessary. A further pruof is in the impossibility
of a vacuum : if a piece of bread be annihilated, vvhat remains in its
place? Nothing thinkable; aixl, therefore, annihilation is unthinkable tou.

Wyclif is thus forced to deny that anything can be annihilated,
even by Almighty Power, even absoiiitety considered; and here we see
the profound difference which separates him from the general opinion
uf Scholastic philosophers and theologians, who distinguish between
what is possible to Omnipotence, irrespectively of God's other attributes,
but are not all of one mind as to whether annihilation is absolutely
impossible. They would willingly grant the truth of Milton's lines in the
second book of Paradise Lost:

.... How He can
Is doubtful; that He never will, is sure.
But Wyclif has no doubt at all on the matter.

Now, in the doctrine of Transubstantiation, it is aftirmed that the
bread ceases to exist. This (though some Doctors of great note, Aquinas
amongst others, explain lt in a different manner) certainly seems to point
to annihilation, as was very probably admitted by Wyclifs Nominalistic
opponents. At any rate, the assertion that the whole substance of the
bread ceases to exist at a given instant — both as to its substantial
qualities and the underlying substratum of those qualities — could, in
Wyclif s system, be understood only as the annihilation of the atoms of
vvhich it consists. This had to be denied. The bread, it was affirmed,
ceased to exist as bread; in its place there remained a body that
Wyclif (no doubt out of respect fur the dogma which he still seemed
to admit) called a corpus mathematicum. I say, c still seemed to admit';
for, as we have seen, this corpus niathematicnm, quite orthodox enough in
the ordinary sense of the words, is nothing else but the atoms, or mathe-
matical points, of which the bread consists, just as they were before.
Any one who will read p. 137 of the present volume will, I think, be
convinced that the successive stages of Wyclifs opinions in this matter,
as given by Wodeford (see De Benedicta Incamacione, ed. Mr. Harris,
Int. IX.) were successive only in the mode of expression, not in the
thing itself. The same esse, he says, which was previously that of bread,
becomes sacramentally the Body of Christ. True, he also says that it
does not remain bread after consecration, and explains himself no
further; but the indestructibility of the bread-atoms has already been

INTRODUCTION. IX

posited. They are the subject uf the accidental qualities vvhich we
perceive ; and though Wyclif calls them a corpus malhcmalicum, they
are real ubjective existences, and nut the atums uf Christ's Body. That
Budy, as I puinted uut in the Intruductiun tu De Apostasia, is present
there as a symbul — and is therefure really present with the reality uf
a symbol — but not otherwise. Is not this in substance the very same
theory that Wyclif expounds in his later works? There is indeed a com-
plete change of language and style, though even so late as in the tractate
De Apostasia, he continues to employ the term transubstantiation; but
here, even from the very outset, he refuses to admit that anything in
the physical substance of the bread has been changed.

Such are the most important points in this third volume ofLogica;
their bearing both upon what preceded them and what followed, justifies
me, I think, in setting them before the reader in connected form. Here
and there, we also find certain other allusions, paragraphs upon necessity
and free-will, a word or two against the abuse of ceremonies and the
excess of riches in the Church, and other signs which show what was
already fermenting in Wyclifs mind; but they are mere side-issues, and
not (so far as I can see now) essentially connected with his system.
They will, therefore, be more advantageously considered in their place,
as we go on to the detailed examination of the two last chapters of
Wyclifs Logica.

III. Analysis of the Work.

a) Chapter IX.

Short Summary of the Contents.

Local propositions (p. 1 — 11). Movement defined and divided (p. 11 — 27).
— Othcr divisions of movcmcnt (27 — 30). — Is tJic Continuous madc
up of points? Arguments pro (30 — 35). — Argumcnts contra, drawn
from Aristotles authority (35 — 38); from geometry (38 — 63) ; from physical
science (63— 70); from theology (70— 74); and from the fact of chemical
combinalion (74 — 85). — What is the measure of the vetocily of motion
Wyclifs opinion (85 — 87). — General arguments contra (87 — 100). —
Aslronomical objections (100 111). — Of Augmcntation (111—116). —
Difficulties (116—118). — Of Altcration (118—121). — Objections
rcfutcd (121—132).

X INTRODUCTION.

Local propositions. Place may be taken to mean merely position (i).
The v/orld consists of atoms, cannot be increased nor diminished in size,
nor moved, nor changed in shape. The whole of space is the whole
world; partial spaces are made up of points. To each point corresponds
a place, which is fixed, whereas the points are all movable, and may
enter it, one after the other (i, 2). It is a mere relation of distance
from the poles and the centre of the world (3). The universe is the
common place of everything; yet each of its parts has its own partial
site (3, 4). Two bodies may thus be in the same place in one sense,
and in another, in quite different and separate places (5). Site and situa-
tion are not identical, except at the poles and at the centre (6). Posi-
tion depends upon the distance of anything from the centre (6, 7).
Animals, like the world, have in themselves these differences ofposition:
above, below, back ; front, right and left (7 — 11).

Movement defined and divided. Movement is the c form', or per-
fection, by which the mobility of a mobile becomes actualized; local
movement is but one of its many divisions (11). Local movement
implies a mover which is other than the thing moved; this leads us to
admit a First Motor, motionless, indivisible, everlasting (12, 13). Local
movement may be straight, circular, &. (14, 15). Can we say that the
same body has two different movements at once (16 — 18)? Not according
to strict logic; but one movement may be considered as the combination
of two others, and rest, as the result of two equal and contrary mo-
tions (18 — 23). Every change which makes a body to differ from what
it was ; deserves to be called movement in a wide sense; and in a sense
still wider, the activity of the intellect and the action of God upon His
creatures, is movement (24). The swiftness of the movement of a body
is represented by the space it would pass through in a given time, if
not prevented. The impediment only counteracts the external effects
which movement tends to cause, and therefore must count for nothing,
even when so great as totally to dcstroy the effect (25). Supposing
the sun to have a rctrograde movement on the celestial sphere as rapicl
as the forward motion of the sphere itself, there would be no apparent
motion of the sun from east to west, though it would move from north
to soutli (26). Wyclif here alludes to the fact that the sun is higher in
the sky in summer than in winter. The effect of which he speaks would
be produeed, in the language of modern astronomy, if the earth, whilst

INTRODUCTION. XI

continuing to revolve round the sun, ceased to rotate on its axis. The
sun would be for ever in the same meridian; but in summer it would
be seen higher in the sky — that is, nearer the North Pole; — in
autumn, it would go lower — that is, nearer the South Pole — until
it disappeared beneath the horizon for six months. This supposition aids
Wyclif to explain the sun's yearly apparent passage through the signs
of the zodiac, by imagining an eastward movement, which in some un-
known manner is delayed to the extent of about one degree every day;
while the sun's position in the sky changes at the same time from North
to South, or vice versa.

Othcr divisions of movement. Wyclif here deals only with local
movement, uniform or varied; and if varied, varied either in itself or in
its subject. If the vvurld revolves with a movement that seems uniform,
each part of the world turns round with a different degree of rapidity,
except at the poles, where the movement is nil. All these various rapi-
dities of movement may at once be predicated of their one subject —
the world. It thus at the same time moves faster and slower than itself:
which of course, with the above explanation, is evidently true. Wyclif
goes farther, and asserts that the motion of a part may be equal to,
though less than, that of the whole; notwithstanding that this admission
lends a liandle to sophistical objections. A movement smaller in velocity '
is equal to the vvhole movement in duration. The circular movement of
a part of the world near the poles is much less rapid than at the
Equator; yet both take place in 24 hours (28). Movement is again either
uniformly or variably varied ; and once more the old mediaeval distinction

1 /« velocity. The assertion that a part of any movement is equal to the
whole is explained in the text by the distinction: quoad molem — quoad duracionem.
I find it difficult to understand. The sense, as I give it above, does not, I confess,
agree well with quoad molem; it ought to be quoad velocitatem. But we might
understand the words thus: Movement in one atom only (a part of the whole
movement quoad molem) is equal to the movement of the whole body moved. But
then, why does Wyclif use the words quoad duracionem? They ought again in
this case to be changed for quoad velocitatem. I think that the explanation, as given
above, answers better to the general drift of the argument. Either way, we see how
may be maintained that a partial movement is equal to its whole. — I may here,
by the wav, repeat what I pointed out in the Introduction to Logica, Vol. II, viz.
that I in this analysis often introduce comparisons or remarks of may own, in order
to clear up what is not clear, or to reconcile seeming discrepancies.

XII INTRODUCTION.

nt movement c varied in thc subject 3 comcs in. Movement variably varied
may be so in infinite manners, and endless new species of movement are
thus conceivable. At this stage of the enquiry, Wyclif proposes three
questiuns; the lirst, dealing with succession, is tu be sulved in the fulluw-
ing chapter; the second concerns the Continuuus, and tlie third, the
measure uf velucity uf motion, and will be answered here (29, 30).

Is the Contiiiuous made itp of points? Argumcnts pro. — If tlie
wurld consists uf atums which in their turn cunsist of indivisible points, '
how can we explain the existence of the Continuuus, which is indefmitely
divisible? Huw can the Extended be made up uf elements which are
in nu wise extended? But Wyclif says that it must be su, and gives
seven arguments tu pruve it. — 1. The intrinsic cause uf anything is
nccessarily a part uf that thing; nuw points causc Hnes, lines surfaces,
and surfaces vulumes; thus puints are parts of space, and it is ulti-
mately cumpused uf them. — 2. Either puints are nut, or they are, parts
of lines; if not, all the points in a line could be taken away without
shortening it: a manifest absurdity. — 3. If two bodies touch in one
point only, we have two points which touch one another, and yet are
distinct (as belonging to different bodies) ; that is, they are nut in the
same place. Su we see that r tu tuuch' dues nut mean 'to coincide 3 ,
and the possibility of space consisting of contiguous points is saved
(30, 31). — 4. An instant is to divisible continuous time what a point
is to a divisible continuous line; but one instant is not identical with the
next immediately following it: consequently, neither is one point identical
witli another that it touches. And if so, the point is, not the negation,
but the element of tlie Continuous (31). — 5. A mobile, passing througli
two surfaces that touch — air, v. g. and water — will pass one after
the other, and touch each of them at two indivisible instants of time,
distinct, though not separated by any interval. Other suppositions lead

1 Bo?kowitch's theory of indivisiblc points — mere mathematical centres of
attraction — which is well-known to the philosophical world, would seem some-
what similar to that of Wyclif. But there is an enormous difference. Boskowitch's
atoms do not touch, they cannot touch; they act upon each other with attractivc
and repellent forces through a perfect vacuum. Thus his theory, though lying open
to other objections, cannot be assailed by those which Wyclif here undertakes
to refute.

[N-TRODUCTION. XIII

to the same conclusion (32). — 6. There are days and nights but one
instant long (as at the poles). These days and nights are part of the
continuity of time, and yet are distinct from the rest of it; therefore they
are real parts, which make up that continuity. And if Time is thus com-
posed, it is easy to show that space is composed likewise (3$). —
7. If God, by His almighty Power, created a series of substances each
the size of a mathematical point, and placed them side by side throughout
the whole of space, we should have continuous extension; and nothing
can be brought to prove that what is possible in this case is not a
really existing fact (34). — Throughout the whole of these arguments, our
author seems at times to take the idea of the absolutely inextended point
— the Nothing of Space — and at others, that of a line divided by
"a quantity that has increased beyond all measure". The latter, accord-
ing to modern mathematicians, is not absolutely without length; only
its lensth is shorter than the shortest line conceivable. Such infinitesimal
magnitudes would indeed be factors of the line; but would they agree
with Wyclifs conception of the point, as an absolute minimum of bulk?

The line A, divided by 00, gives — ; but 2 A, divided in like manner,

j ° 00

2 A
gives ; the second quantity is mathematically double of the first. But

I leave these considerations to such as are versed in a science which,
since five hundred years, has made such progress as Wyclif never
dreamed of.

Arguments contra: AristotWs view. — The difficulties which surround
such a system are of course great and manifold. Aristotle seems against
it; for instance, when he says that the Continuous is infinitely divisible.
But, a) Aristotle speaks of that which is continuous to our senses; and
that, so far as our senses can tell, is indeed made up of innumerable
parts. But though infmite for us, they are not so to God. And, b) Ari-
stotle distinctly says that the point is the cause of the line; if so, it
must be its element, and this dictttm is quite in Wyclifs favour (35).
The doctrine of indivisible points transcends both our senses and our
imagination. Geometry has nothing to do here, these points are beyond
geometry; physics are out of court, they belong to metaphysic. God
alone knows how many points go to form a given square, but their
number is not infinite to Him (36). The word c Infinite' is used to denote

XIV INTRODUCTION.

all that goes beyond our power of conception, even though the thing
be not infinite in itself. A number, therefore, which is infinite to one man
will be finite to another; and none is infinite to Divine Intelligence. This
evidently flows from Wyclifs conception of maxima and minima. There
is a fixed number of all things — even of the points in a line — which,
infinite to us, is finite to God; and no straight line can be infinitely

long (37» 38).

As this conception of the Infinite may give rise to the inquiry
how far our author is in agreement with the majority of Scholastic
philosophers, a short digression is not out of place here, and I shall
proceed briefly to state the points on which there is the least contradic-
tion among Schoolmen in this matter.

The Infinite means c that beyond which nothing greater can be
conceived", whether by human thought, or by any other intelligence,
however perfect. If no substance or being can be conceived greater, it
is the Absolute Infinite — God; if no accident, then it is the relative
Infinite — of quantity (multitude or magnitude) or of quality. The Infi-
nite cannot be made up of finite parts; it is not the mere negation, but
the negation of a negation, and thus has a positive meaning. Infinite
magnitude of matter is impossible; so is an infinite number, an infinite
multitude, and a movement infinitely swift. Infinite imperfection or badness
is also inadmissible; for it vvould totally destroy any substance in which
it inhered; but qualities that denote nothing but perfection, such as force,
life, duration, &c. must be admitted in God; in the human soul too,
but only from a certain point of view, c: secundum quid". This Infinite
' c secundum quid" is in general predicated of that which is finite in every
sense but one; as, e. g., the two halves of an iniinite line, or of infinite
space. In this sense, and from the point of view from wliich it is ftnite,
one infinite may be greater than another. — Clearly the term, as
employed by Wyclif, has quite another meaning, unless when he applies
if to God.

Objections based npon geomctry. — If Wyclifs theory be true, then
the number of points is the same in two lines, one of which is double
of the other. For two mobiles, passing over each of tliem, one double
as fast as the other, correspondingly to the length of the hnes, will go
over them in the same number of instants, and therefore that same
number of points will be passed in that time. The difficulty is solved

INTRODUCTION. XV

by denying" that at each instant of any movement one point is passed
over ; it is the case only for the swiftest movement possible, that of
the e equinoctial point 3 in the sky (38, 39). — It is true that such an
answer does away with all really continuous motion, except for the said
point: during- any slower movement from A to B ; the mobile C would
be at rest in a multitude of points; and thus rest would be identical
with movement. Rut movement may appear to be continuous, though it
is not really so; a succession of very short motions, interspersed with rests,
will give us the feeling of continuity. As a fact, our senses often mislead
us ; as, for instance, in certain phenomena of sight, and in the vibrations
of which sound consists. If the most rapid possible movement is at the
rate of one point per instant, it follows that the world cannot be larger
than it is; for if larger, it would revolve more rapidly, and that is im-
possible: a confirmation of what has been proved elsewhere and other-
wise (39, 42). — ff But if the apices of several pyramids touched, they
would be in the same place, and thus coincide." This is merely begging
the question. If a point has position of its own, it cannot be in the
same place with another. — It is said that in Wyclifs system each point
must touch an infinity of others; which leads to difficulties. But this is denied.
Six points only touch a seventh placed in their midst. Thus in certain
directions one cannot go immediately from one point to the next; their
position follows certain fixed rules, somewhat like the grain in wood,
or the lines of cleavage in crystals. A line drawn from one point to
another which it cannot touch directly, only by means of a third, is
nevertheless not bent; for it is as straight as a line can possibly be.
To say, the point A touches B, and B, C; therefore, A touches C, is
a sophism. All this is indeed unimaginable; but we must go beyond
imagination when we have to deal with the Inextended. And at any rate,
Nominalists have no right to argue at all in the matter (42 — 46).

Here Wyclif enters into a series of explanations on the different
senses given to the words point, line, surface and angle, and he expounds
what he conceives to be Euclid's meaning. An angle may mean either
its apex, or the space which it encloses; two very different things
(46 — 49). But the adversaries point out that either an angle is indefini-
tely great; which Wyclif denies, affirming that any angle is complete in
its apex (49, 50); or that any number of angles, small and great,
may cotbdst at the same point; which is granted as a harmless

XVI INTRODUCTION.

conclusion (50, 51); and that our author's system would imply the denial,
not only of Euclid's definition of angles, but of the whole of his treatise
on the subject. (Here, by the way, we may note how quietly the tri-
section of an angle is taken for granted "secundum doctrinam prime
Vitulonis", i. e. Vitellio, the famous Mediaeval mathematician and optician
"que docet angulum rectum datum in tres partes dividere", whereas all
mathematicians are at present agreed that such trisection is impossible.
As, however, I have not been able to get a sight of Vitellio's works,
though living in the very city in which he wrote them, 1 I am not quite sure
that what he teaches is anything more than a mere practical way of divid-
ing an angle into three parts, without any claim to absolute exactitude.)

Wyclif replies that, as regards Euclid's definition of the angle —
the meeting of two lines — this is merely a genetic, not an essential
definition. Euclid indeed says what causes an angle ; but that is not the
angle itself. As to the rest, the answer is ready: Euclid's theory con-
cerns only sensible angles, not such as are found amongst points which
touch; such, for instance, as form triangles which have sides only two
points long, and of which the apex is an angle which cannot be
bisected, &c. — All this cannot be imagined, and should, therefore, be
denied from a merely geometrical point of view (52, 53).

We come now to what is perhaps the strongest mathematical ob-
jection to Wyclifs system. According to him, points are placed as fol-
lows, in a small square of say, 25 points only; I have added the con-
necting hyphens in the subjoined figure to show which points touch, and
.. which do not touch. As is seen, the points on the diagonals
I do not touch directly, and there are no more points on
the diagonal than on the side of a square. This, true
for the given square, all but infinitesimally small, will also
be true for all greater ones; and thus the diagonal of
any square (containing an equal number of points) will be equal to its
side, the greater to the less: which is absurd (53, 54). — Wyclifs
reply admits as an evident fact that the diagonal of a square is longer
than its side. But when he comes to the statement that parallel lines,

I I

• — • ■

I l

• — • ■

I I

1 I asked for a copy of Vitellio's works at the Jagellonian Library, Cracow,
but was informcd that they had been lent to a gentleman who lived a good
distance awav.

INTRODUGTION. XVII

drawn from the sides and perpendicularly to them, touch the diagonal
at only one point, he denies it. If it were so, the diagonal would be
only as long as the side. Each parallel intersects the diagonal at several
points; and this accounts for the greater length of the latter line. It is
absurd to suppose that tvvo lines which intersect at a very acute angle
do not touch by more points than when they are perpendicular; or
that these parallels would ' no longer be straight after intersection:
the touching in several points does not change their direction. This
somewhat risky answer is supported by the assertion that the ultimate
squares (consisting of two points each) are beyond the scope of geometry;
also by some remarks concerning the position of points relatively to the
poles of the world (55, 56), which I, not clearly seeing their relevancy
to the subject, prefer to pass over. But I think it is at this part of the
book that we get nearest to the weak point in Wyclifs system: viz.
that two points which touch, i. e. which are at no distance from each
other, are yet not in the same place. I at least can find, even in thought,
no distinction between distance and difference of place.

Wyclif comes to the conclusion that God alone knows what the
real proportion of the diagonal of a square to its side is; for it depends
on the number of points touched by all the intersecting lines parallel
to that side. Geometry may perhaps be true only hypothetically ; it can
prove that the proportion 1/ 2 exists in the whole diagonal, but not
that it exists in every part of that line (57). The admission that in every
line there is a certain number of points, of course implies the denial
of all incommensurable quantities; that is, absolutely incommensurable,
though for us and to our way of thinking, they are so: for in every
such case the numbers are infinite to us, and we cannot tell whether
they are odd or even (58 — 60).

Another perplexing question concerns the shape of the smallest
figures possible, which consist of a few points only. Are they circles,
triangles, spheres, pyramids, or what? They may be maintained to be
either any or none of these, and it does not matter, since they are
unimaginable realities in their extreme smallness. We cannot even con-
ceive them distinctly by the intellect, at least in its present state of
union with matter (60 — 63).

Objections based npon physical science. — Rarefaction (and con-
densation too) would be impossible in such a system, For if the whole

XVIII INTRODUCTION.

of space were tillecl with indivisible impenetrable atoms, should anything

increase in size, the whole universe would become larger than it can

possibly be. Yet rarefaction must be admitted; and a like argument has

the same weight as regards condensation. Wyclif, in his reply, at once

declares that he does not admit the possibility of a body occupying

more or less space without gain or loss of matter. Rarefaction, there-

fore, and condensation also, are denied in this sense, but admitted in

another. On account of the accession or the removal of another body,

a substance may seem to increase or diminish in size; as, v. g., smoke

seems to spread itself out and fill a room, whereas it is in reality mixed

with the air. This is the only sense in which rarefaction is possible,

and it ansvvers all the objections. We need not follow our author through

the mazes of Mediaeval physics which he threads, nor inquire whether

this view would destroy all difference betvveen the elements of fire, air,

water and earth (63 — 70). Wyclif ends by stating, as his opinion, thal

the compenetration of tvvo bodies is an utter impossibility. This conclu-

sion evidently flovvs from his doctrine. Tvvo points, having no dimensional

qualities nothing but position — vvould, if they coi'ncided ; lose even

that essential qualitv, and be nothing at all. Hut it raises grave theolo-

gical difficulties ; for the School generally admits tliat God's Omnipotence

can make two bodies occupy the same space.

Objections drawn from theology. Since spiritual forms, having more
perfect entity than matter, can occupy the same space with it, then a
forliori matter can be coextended with matter. Besides, the glorified
bodies of the Saints possess the gift of subtlety, i. e. of passing through
matter; which seems to imply compenetration. — The answer is a
repeated denial of its possibility (71). The gift of subtlety, bestowed on
glorified bodies, is somewhat perplexing; but there are various ways of ex-
plaining it without admitting compenetration (72, 73).

Objections drawn from chemical combinalion. If every punctal

atom is and remains eternallv the same, then the elements would remain
in their compounds; size would be made up of tliat vvhich has no size,
and movement of what is not properly movement, as one point passes
instantaneously into the place of another. — The first of these con-
clusions is granted by Wyclif, though the <[uestion itself was, during the
whole of the Middle Age.s, a battle-field for the rival sections of the
School,- The Thomists maintained that in all chemical eombinations,

INTRODUCTION. XIX

as distinguished from mere mechanical mixtures,, the elements do not
exist any longer actually, but only potentially; that is, they may, under
certain circumstances, again be extracted from the compound. Their
position, as given in their text-books of Philosophy at the present day,
is that in a mere mixture — of hydrogen and oxygen, for example —
both elements, though mingled together, do really and actually exist;
but that as soon as the mixture is exploded they no longer exist in the
compound — water — except in this sense, that the water may be
analyzed into its constituents. Of course, so long as it is not possible
to show them the atoms cot-xisting side by side, they are free to main-
tain that their existence is only potential. But, even during the Middle
Ages, the Scotists protested Ioudly against such an assumption, of which
nothing could prove the truth.

Wyclif takes the side of the Scotists, as he was bound by his
system to do. He gives us a disquisition on the conditions necessary
to chemical combination, which seem to be almost the same as those
now posited by modern science (74); and then he observes that
Aristotle's assertion of the non-existence of the elements in a compound
ought not to be taken literally. Even Averrhoes' position, viz. that
they exist, but with less intensity of being, would be contrary to the
system of inextended points; compenetration being impossible, nothing
can interfere with their intensity of existence (75). With yet greater decision
he opposes the hypothesis of merely potential existence. If the reason that
there is a form which unites the elements in one compound (making the
elemental forms to exist no longer) were valid, then in a human body,
of which the soul is the form, nothing would remain of the body but
its primal matter; and that body, so complicated in all its parts, would
be simpler than an element (76). It may be worthy of remark that this
conclusion, strange as it may seem, is even now admitted and taught
by that branch of Neo-Scholasticism which adheres strictly to the teaching
of St. Thomas. When the human form, or soul, departs, what (they
are asked) takes place in the body? Do not all the elements exist in it
again? And if they exist there at once with all their differences, can it
be that they were only potentially there before? The answer given is
that after the soul's departure, a new, but transient form comes to give
being to the body; it is called the cadaveric form ; forma cadaverica,
and precedes the various forms of decomposing matter, which succeed

XX INTRODUCTION.

each other until the iinal evolution of the elements. All this time the
elements were in potentia — remotissima, remota, proxima ; then
in actu primo remoto, in actu primo proximo, and at last in actn
secundo.

Wyclif continues to urge the point against his adversaries. If we
get the elements out of the compound, they must have been there before;
and many instances go to prove that they actually exist there; for
instance, the phosphorescence of fishes' scales in the dark is attributable
to the actual existence of fire (77). And as a fact, we find in combina-
tions the same qualities as vvere before in the elements; or if not, a
mean between them ; or their reaction in the compound may even pro-
duce a quality. There is no need to suppose that the former qualities
are destroyed because they do not appear (78, 79). I liave added the
last clause as the answer of such philosophers as dispute with the
modern Thomists, who point out that carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen
are harmless, and that prussic acid is a violent poison. The poisonous
quality is merely the reaction upon each other of various qualities of
the three component elements.

To this the adversaries reply that such a compound would be but
a mere aggregate of atoms Svhich a man that had the lynx's eyes might
see separate'. Wyclifs answer is that of the modern chemical school;
they are not mere aggregates: ivhat differenliales the compound is the
reialive position of one alom /o another (80), But, it is urged, if the
elemental forms are everywhere in the compound, the superadded form
of the compound must be nowhere. Wyclif replies that this form is every-
where in the whole, and to a certain extent, indivisibly so, being less
material than the clementary forms. There is something of the universal
in these higher forms, which exist partially in each atom, considered as
part of the compound (80 — 81). — One last difficulty. In this system,
the whole world is one being; and one only, since all points touch,
from the centre to the extreme point vvhere space ceases to be possible.
— It is quite true, answers Wyclif, that the world is one being; but it
does not follow that everything in the world is one. One being may be
separated from another by a third. Continuity does not mean sameness
of nature. Every part of the world joins in and aids the harmonious
action of the whole; all things are made for man, and it is ior that
reason that all the elements concur to form his organs of scnse, and

INTRODUCTION. XXI

that some ot them predominate in certain of the elements, and others
in certain others (82 — 85).

What is t/ie mcasure of velocity of motion? — Not, says Wyclif,
the space gone over by the mobile in a given time. This seems para-
doxical; but an example, given directly afterwards, shows that our author
is thinking, not of the distance in Iength, but of the whole surface gone
over. A large body and a small one, though moving with equal speed,
will go through very unequal spaces in the same time. What measures
the motion of any body is the point of maximum svviftness, which in
every case must exist, and must exist somewhere at the surface of the
moving body; there is also a point where the movement is reduced to
a minimum, but VVyclif, somewhat unaccountably, restricts this proposition
to living beings that move (86). Now the measure of velocity of a body
is the line described by the point which moves fastest (87, 94).

Geucral argumcnts against Wyclifs posilion. — The First
Mobile, being the outermost sphere, and having no space beyond it,
can describe no line at all; planets have many movements, and no point
can be said to describe them all at the same time. Again, if we suppose
a given length passed over in a given time, this may be done by
mobiles of infinitely varying velocities, which would all have this length
and time for the measure of their respective velocities. And we can con-
ceive the case of a body continuallv losing its swiftest point by the
very fact of its movement: which would refute the assertion that every
mobile must have such a point (87, 88). This last objection is urged,
from p. 89 to p. 92, in a long argument which I have been utterly
unable to follow. Wyclif then points out that the reason for which some
deny the general idea of movement (abstracting from its rapidity, and
allowing a general measure of velocity for the whole mobile) is in reality
the doctrine of Nominalism. Nominalists do not waut to admit a universal
idea of movement which exists even in bodies at rest, when acted upon
by contrary forces (94). The movement of a body is as swift as that
of its swittest part; this swiftness is the measure ot the whole (ib.). As
to the objections, that of the First Mobile has no value whatever. What
that sphere describes may not be formally called a line, but it is equi-
valent to a line. Planets have not many movements, but one which is
tantamount to many (unus motus, habens racionem diversorum motuum) (95).
It, in the last case, the point of greatest velocity is continually lost, a new

XXII INTRODUCTION.

one is continually brought into being; take the velocity common to each
of these at each instant, and you get the speed of the whole (96).

Here comes a curious passage, in which Wyclif is led to state the
exact rapidity of the swiftest movement possible, viz. one point per
instant. It seems to us that, in continuous movement, whether slow or
quick, one point — an infinitely small distance — is always passed over
in the infinitely small interval of one instant. This is denied. In all move-
ments which are slower than that of the Equator of the First Mobile,
we have two, three, four .... instants during which the point is
motionless, and then passes instantaneously on to the next place, which
is infmitely near (97 — 99). In all these remarks, and elsewhere, as the
reader will doubtless perceive, there is a dim perception of the non-
equality of infinitesimal quantities; but the state of Mathematics was not
then sufficiently advanced to foster the idea, and Wyclif himself, though
far in advance of his time, was more of a metaphysician than of a
mathematician. His conception, if carried into the field of pure Mathe-
matics, might possibly have had good results; understood in the Realistic
sense, they came to nothing.

A logical quibble about the possibility of instantaneous change
(whether, between the instant of changing aud that of having changed,
there is any interval) brings our author to a short digression upon death,
which takes place in two instants. In the first, the man dies; in the
second, he is dead; for we cannot say, he is dead at the instant when
he dies, nor he dies at the instant when he is dead. Other writers
would say that the instant of death is the same in both cases; but
viewed from different standpoints : as the end of life, and the beginning
of non-life. This, Wyclif says, is impossible (100).

Astronomical objections. The assertion that the Equator alone

moves one point per instant is beset with many difficulties. The First
Mobile is a perfect sphere; its movements therefore ought at all points,
and not only at the Equator, to be uniform. But every point in the First
Mobile does not touch every other: so the smaller circles, making a
shorter journey in the same time, will not require to move so fast. The
circle tangent to the Equator has but one point fewer than the Equator;
performing its journey in the same time, it will remain immobile for one
instant, to make up for the missing point: which of the points is missing
we need not enquire. — The Poles belong to the great circles,

INTRODUCTION. XXIIJ

perpendicular to the Equator, i. e. those of which the curvature is the
smallest; at the same time each of them forms the smallest possible of
circles — a point — parallel to the Equator, and of which the curva-
ture is the largest. Whicli of these curvatures belongs to that punctal
atom which is a pole of the world? Wyclif, noticing that the difficulty
would tell against his adversaries no less than against himself, solves it
by denying that any one circle is more curved than another; in each
circle every point of the circumference is equally distant from the
centre. — If the Equator consist of tripunctal atoms, it cannot be a
circle. Eor these atoms do not form a curve; they are either in line
or make up a triangle; in either case, there is curvity. Wyclif answers
that, being points which touch each other without any distance betvveen
them, they form neither a triangle nor a straight line. Geometry is only
seemingly against this, because such things are conceivable by the mind
alone, not by imagination. That science cannot give us absolute exacti-
tude (ioo — 1 1 1).

Of Augmentation. — Leaving the questions concerning local move-
ment, and coming to the movement by which, without changing its place,
a body increases in volume, Wyclif points out that augmentation, strictly
taken, means only the increase of an animated being, caused by nutrition
and by the assimilation of food (iii), gives us a description of the
digestive process such as might be expected, interesting merely as a
curiosity (112, 113), and enters into a disquisition about the cause of
natural death from mere decrease of vitality (114, 115). The movement
of augmentation is not continuous any more than undulations are con-
tinuous; it is a collective entity, consisting of many movements (115, 1 1 6).
The difficulties which follow are of slight moment, and only serve to
bring in a description of the various kinds of tissue in the human body.
The rapidity of augmentation depends on the size acquired and the
time taken to acquire it (116 — 118).

Of Alteration. As alteration is a change in quality, grounded upon
the substantial components of each body — ■ matter and form, — it is
mainly Wyclifs theory with respect to the latter that is discussed here.
Having expounded his idea of the universe — one material being, made
up of punctal atoms, filling all possible space, and unchangeable except
in so far as one of its parts can be separated from another by local
movement — he states that the world can be thought, firstly, as mere

XXIV INTRODUCTION.

being; secondly, as substance, or the subject of various attributes; and
thirdly, as matter, being extended, and possessing form (119). Thus
matter, form, and the compound are the same being, the same essence,
and not separate realities (120). This, in fact though not in words, is
the denial of matter and form in the usual Scholastic sense of cc two
distinct realities ; whereof the latter determines the former and the former is
determinable by the latter which at the same time is sustained in existence
by the former: both incomplete in themselves and apart, but together
making up the complete material substance". In Wyclifs system, there
is no need to admit such dualism. The simple inextended point may be
either fire, air, water, or earth; this possibility is matter. It is actually
one or other of the four; the igneity, aeriality, &c, which it possesses
is its form. And the point itself, as being thus whilst able to be other-
wise, is the compound. Denying the existence of extended atoms, the
writer, whose system here does not differ much from that of other
Atomists (t. e. so far as his way of explaining matter and form goes),
escapes from many difficulties which beset the path of those who admit
that the primordial atom is extended. But there are others.

Objections. — It is asserted that matter and form, since they are
parts of the whole compound; cannot be identical with the whole. But
Wyclif notes that they are not quantitative parts — as, for example,
the head and the heart in man — but qualitative merely, like rationality
and animality, for instance. The whole man is reasonable and is animal;
the whole man is not at once head and heart (121). We have thus a
sort of trinity in which matter, form and compound, identical in one
sense ; are different in another: but Wyclif takes great care to point
out the difference between this trinity and that of the soul, or of God
(l2I, 122). — If matter, as Wyclif asserts (121) is eternal, form is so
too, being identical with it; and thus the world is eternal. But here he
denies that the radical identity of matter, form, and compound with Being,
renders these three identical with each other. Man is reasonable, man
is animal; yet rationality and animality differ. All that is true, is good;
yet truth is not the same thing as goodness. And Wyclif points to the
Incarnation, as affording us another instance of a similar fallacv (123). —
On the supposition that every essence is in reality everywhere the same,
we have all sorts of contradictions. The answer to this is that contra-
dictions may coexist in the same subject, either at different times, or

INTRODUCTION. XXV

in different parts. No quality is essentially inherent to primordial matter;
therefore, nothing can contradict it. A body composed of parts which
come and go successively may receive different and contrary qualities,
and yet remain the same; as, v. g., the Mediterranean may ebb and
flow, and yet be the same sea (124 — 127). Thus, when we say, This
is Jwt, we speak. of the compound alone; it is that which is hot. Here
comes a digression. How can heat, the proper quality of fire, be found
in water, which is naturally cold? Particles of fire may be mingled with
the water, though they are in a violent state; the water, if left to itself,
will soon again become cold. Hovvever mingled the different elements
may be, they still obey the laws which govern their nature (128 — 130).
The chapter closes with a short survey of creation, beginning with the
elements which, uniting, form vapours; these produce metals and earths;
the earths, if mingled with fire and water, bring forth plants and also
animals in an ascending scale of forms, the lower hardly distinguishable
from inanimate beings, the highest, quasi-immaterial. The soul of man
is completely so ; and each higher form includes in its perfection that
of the lower ones (130 — 132).

b) Chapter X.

Summary of the Contents.

Temporal Propositions do not affirm that the known is wherever the
knower exists (133, 134). — Objections refuted (134 — 155). — Are all
things together in time and place? Arguments contra (155—157). —
Wyclifs solution (157 — 161). — Corollaries (161—165). — Three views
on the essence of Time; l rst that it is identical with God or the world
(165 — 166); 2" d that nothing temporal is in the present (166 — 170);
3 rd that Time might be indefinitely lengthened by God (170—173). —
Wyclifs view: Is extends to all past and future time (173 — 177). —
Objections refuted (177 — 191). — An cternal antecedent does not neces-
sarily produce its consequent in titne (191 — 192). — A cause produces its
effect before that effect exisls (192—199). — Time is the same everywherc.
Arguments contra refuted (199 — 211). — Movement implies time ; refutation
of objections (211 — 224). — The non-entity oj the world did not precede
its entity (224-227).

XXVI INTRODUCTION.

/5 the knuwn wherever its knower is? — No; for then everything
would be, as God is, everywhere (133, 134). It is objected that every-
thing is truth, and that truth, like God, is everywhere. We may, how-
ever, admit this, restricting the sense of being in space to fttting that space
quantitativeiy. Thus, granting the force of the argument, we nevertheless
deny it in the signification usually given to words. Christ's Body has size in
the Sacrament, yet it does not properly fill space; it is present without
either position or shape. The bread is not annihilated ; what remains is a
purely mathematical body, but not nothing ; the sacramental sign is the
reality of Christ's Body (134 — 137). It may be urged that the fact of
movement is not extended in space, and that movement is consequently
everywhere. But local movement is the movement of a body, and must
be extended with that to which it belongs. Virtues, again, exist throughout
the whole man, body and soul; but they are nowhere else but where
their subject is. When a part moves, the whole may be said to move,
it is true; only in a different way (139, 140). Movement thus takes its
determination (individuacionem suam) either from its subject alone, qita
subject, or from the subject with all its integral parts, or from this with
the velocity also taken into account. The third point of view implies the
first and the second; but not vice versa. Wherever there is a more in-
dividual movement, there is also a more universal one; and in this
sense, movement as a universal, is everywhere, according to Aristotle
(140, 141). God indeed is all truth everywhere; yet truth, as created, is
not identical witb God, and it were a fallacy to draw such an inference.
The sense of words in these questions depends mucli on their position
in the sentence. cc It is noiv possible for a given future iustant to exist",
and, cc It is possible for a given future instant to exist now", are two
widely different propositions. God's knowledge of everything is absolutely
boundless. No time exists for Him. He is means He is yesterday, or He
ivas to-morrow; existing at once in all eternity — an instant to Him,
— He comprises all duration in His being (141 — 143); and therefore His
existence is an eternal Now. — Again, we have a similar sophism: "That
may necessarily be which cannot be necessarily." This is false, but
only when understood of absolute, not of hypothetical necessity. A
future instant is necessarily "about to be", at a time when it cannot
possibly bc "about to be". All this is mere foolish subtlety; we go no
farther than to say that, if at any moment it is true that a given being

INTRODUCTION. XXVII

will exist, the being is in the future (143 — 145). At different times that
which is white is black, a man differs from himself, &c. ; but this implies
no absurdity. Becoming is a change, not of the subject, but of its
'suchness.' An instantaneous change does not imply an intinitely swift
movement, for the idea of swiftness implies that of time, not of one
instant only (145 — 147).

A great many fallacies are brought forward against this position,
such as that, v. g., if future whiteness be always predicable of an indi-
vidual, that individual will always be white; so that if at any time he
were black, he would have and not have two essential contradictory
qualities; or that a king cannot have been baptized, if, when baptized,
he was not yet a king; and so on ad infnitum. They all belong to the
class of fallaciae accidentis. "What you liave bought, you have eaten;
but you have bought raw meat; therefore you have eaten raw meat."
The change from black to white is one, not of nature, but of quality.
The individual differs from himself modally, not essentially. The 'being a
king' is in a man a mere accidental quality; the king has been baptized,
not as a king, but as a man. "He who is now a king, was baptized
when not a king", is perfectly true. Much depends on the compound
or the divided sense in which terms may be taken. "He who is begotten
is David the king; David the king and who is begotten belong, as pre-
dicates, to the verb is, in the divided, not in the compound sense.
Besides, the act of begetting is not instantaneous; it has many pre-
paratory acts (147—154). — There are also several theological argu-
ments on p. 150, concerning the possibility of God's assuming the per-
sonality of all creatures, which Wyclil briefly meets by denying (154,
155) in direct opposition to Aquinas (Sum. Th. p. 3 a qu. III. art. 5, 6).

Are all things together, both in time and place? — Wyclif first
of all gives the arguments contra. If it were so, there would no longer
be any distance between things. The future and the past would exist
eternally; a man would both exist and not exist in the same (eternal)
time. Again, whatever takes place in any part of space and time, must
take place there only and only then; its existence cannot possibly be
extended any farther (155). On the other hand, the world is everywhere;
yet the wholc world is not in any part of space; and in like manner,
if anything exists at any time, its then existence is true in all time; and
so also of space (156). — Wyclif thinks that this question arises mainly

XXVIII INTRODUCTION.

from the varying senses of the word together. Two things may be saicl
to be together, i. e. both occupying exactly the same space (an abso-
lute impossibility) or contiguous, each being in different places, or both,
though separate, being contained in the same larger space. As to time,
absolute simultaneity is possible (157). This answers most of the objec-
tions. Always may be understood as meaning eternity, or during all
etemily, or in some part of all elemity. The last sense is of course
widely different from the others, and in this sense alone, whatever is
future or past is aiways (158). We may see a thing, though we do not
see the whole thing; just so, a man may exist in the X th century, though
non-existent during a part of the X ,h century (158, 159). To maintain
this, however, we must say that time consists of instantaneous elements.
For, if instants are not parts of time, then instantaneous events (such
as cognition, division, &c.) could not be said to exist at any time, having
no duration. And if not at any time, their contradictories would be true
in all time, notwithstanding that they also would be true. It cannot be
said that, from non-cognition to cognition, there is a change which im-
pliestime; for from one contradictory to another, there is no real change.
That which is not white now, if at any time it is to become white, cannot
receive the predicate of mere non-whiteness: so non-existence in a part
of time is not non-existence in that time. After death, a man is neither
simply non-existent nor existent: he is non-existent then (160, 161).

Corollaries. — Time, the duration of the world, began with the
world, and with it must last eternally; necessary to the creation of
the world, it does not depend on anything but the general fact of move-
ment. It consists of indivisible instants as its elements; these are abso-
lutely without magnitude, and time itself is everywhere, indivisibly the
same throughout the universe (162). As the world is everywhere, so is
time, and so is God (163). What begins and ends in time (as cor-
ruptible entities) ; what makes up the ve.ry essence of time (as an instant) ;
what has modes of being measured by time (as the heavens), may be
called temporal, but in different senses (163, 164). Time is in itself a
cause of dissolution, for it causes things to grow older; but occasionally
it is a cause of production, since it renders their production possible. Its
very essence is change, and no two of its parts can coexist (164, 165).

Three views on the essence of Time. — a) It is identical with God
or the world's existence. This view is absurdly erroneous; it would

INTRODUCTION. XXIX

make all things eternal, and destroy all certitude as to the duration of
things (165, 166).

b) Nothing is, but everything either was or will be. This cuts
short disputes as to the existence of things during an infinitely brief
interval. But then, what never is, never was or will be. To God's
knowledge nothing is in the future, so He would know, for instance,
movement to exist, and it would not be true. One hour must be the
double of half an hour; if so, there must come an instant at which this
is true in the present: i. e. when half is past, half future, and the
whole hour partly one and partly the other. Present may indeed be
taken in a wider sense than one single instant. Here Wyclif shows
clearly that, in the same way as he assumes the existence of separate
individual points as realities, so he also assumes the real existence of
instants, joined together to form time, shorter or longer, but also really
existing in another time which includes both past and future. Instead,
therefore, of a century being a present which is fictitious, consisting only
of indivisible instants before and after each of which there is the non-
existing past and the not yet existent future, the whole century forms a
real present, though real in another sense than that of the instant which
is now. And Wyclif adds that, if this be not admitted, he does not see
how the sacramental words, for instance, ct Hoc esl corpus meum", can
be true. Only an inhnitesimal part of the proposition would exist; the
whole, never; and consequently it never would be true. To say, "Nothing
that is past or future exists", is in reality to destroy time. God's immut-
able knowledge of things, and His free-will, are both contrary to such
a supposition. Christ, in the Divine Essence of the Word, saw men long
before their temporal existence; but He saw them as existing, and they
did truly exist in the reality of long centuries of the future. And thus
He is rightly called, Son of David, Son of Abraham, in this real exten-
sion of time, by which David and Abraham come to be coexistent with
Him. Has a posthumous child no father at all? None, unless we grant
the real simultaneity of its existence now with the past in which its
father lived (166— 1 70).

c) Time, though a successive quantity, can be lengthened out inde-
finitely by Almighty Power, so that one instant would be equal to ages.
This is possibly the doctrine of the aevnm or instans angelicum, familiar
to Mediaeval Schoolmen, which some of them may have supposed

XXX INTRODUCTION.

extensible to corporeal beings. According to that doctrine, the duration
of Angels, from one thought to another, may last for centuries without
change — centuries that are for them but one indivisible instant. This
is generally allowed, and I have not anywhere been able to find any
trace of the actual extension of the doctrine to bodily substances. But
it may be explained as follows: Supposing that, at the present moment,
God suspended every movement in the whole universe for a hundred
years — like the tale of the Sleeping Beauty on a gigantic scale —
and then allowed it to continue as before, there would be no movement,
and therefore no succession of time; and one instant would be a hun-
dred years in length. This is in flat contradiction to Wyclifs doctrine
of eternal time, consisting of instants, each of which requires another
imniediately following it; so he is at some pains to refute the possibility
of such a hypothesis. The instant is an individual quantity, which can
neither be lessened nor increased. If it could, it would contain many
instants, and thus be no longer one only. A short time would equal a
long one; the essence of time would no longer consist in duration alone,
for nothing could differentiate the ioo-century instant from an ordinary
one. In conclusion, Wyclif dismisses this theory with contempt (170 — 173).

Wyclifs view> Is extends itself really to all time, past and future.
Whatever is, is always, as has been shown. If not, we deny the very
essence of time. Its parts do not cocxist, but vanish as fast as they
appear; yet they are; now in the past, now in the future: and again,
in a wider present they may be said to coexist. This is clearly signified
by the sense of the verb /5, which by itself does not connote any given
instant of time, and therefore signifies eternity (173 — 177)-

Objections refuted. — To say that all instants, because they are
together in eternal time, are together with absolute simultaneity, is but
a sophism. Simultaneity requires that two things be together at the same
instant or instants, and at no others. Now one instant cannot exist exactly
when another does, but either before or after (177 — 1 79)- — The often
urged c necessity of all things' may be admitted, if understood as merely
conditional upon God's will; for whatever is determinately true, is neces-
sarily true, and there is no such thing as indeterminate truth. Hypo-
thetical necessity, as this is, does not deny contingency, nor the free-will
of man, nor chance. The hypothetical fact that God foreknows anything,
niakes it necessarily exist at some time or other. Given that I exist, it

INTRODUCTION. XXXI

is not in GocTs power that I do not exist. But when must anything
exist? At a moment known to God (179 — 183). The simultaneity of life
and death would, as already stated, require them both to take place at
the very same instant. Time exists, but its parts do not all exist noiv,
only one at a time. Now is but one mode of an existence which not
now does nut destroy. An instant then, now, and to come exists dif-
ferently, but cannot at any time be called simply non-existent. Antichrist
must come: therefore he has come . . . in the future. That is a modal,
but a real existence. It was never true that / am not. To exist and not
to exist are contradictories; they may be true of the same being, but
not in the same Notv. God knows past, present and future things with
the very same knowledge, yet this does not argue sameness in the
object known. Light is not affected by the presence or the absence
of the object illuminated. God may know present and future things as
past, if they exist in time; things eternal are eternally present; such, for
example, as the archetypes of what was, is, or is to be (183 — 188).
Here Wyclif again returns to his adversaries' favourite argument, viz.
that black is white, and all contraries identical. But one remark of his
is worth noticing. A proposition may be true, and yet false at any finite
part of time; as, for instance: 'All the instants of time exist'. This is
true only for and in endless time (188 — 191).

An eternal antecedent does not necessarily canse its consequent in
time. ■ — If it did, all things would be eternal. God eternally knows and
causes all that which exists temporally. The extrinsic act of God, termin-
ated in the creature, is, as tluis terminatcd, neither eternal nor neces-
sary; the intrinsic act of His being is eternal and changeless (191, 192).
A cause produces its effect before that effect exists. That is, before
its existence it is producing it, but not now; in the future. The ideal
being of the effect depends upon its cause, and is produced by it
before the moment when its real existence has to be actuated. On the
other hand, cause, qua cause, and effect, are simultaneous. Many things
are neither instantaneous nor temporal; v. g., certain eternal truths, and
beings of which the existence is intermittent. Wyclif here wonders how
the writers of his time can oppose his system, which is confirmed by
the very expressions they employ; and he blesses God, who has enlightened
him that he may escape the difficulties in which they are entangled
(icj2 — 195)- — The necessity of sin depends on our own free-will; the

XXXII INTRODUCTION.

fact of its happening, on the will of God. — The use of the present
for the past and the future cannot be blamed as an abuse of terms,
nor as the denial of expositorial syllogisms. No logician should use it
thus when he is likely to be misunderstood through ignorance; but it is
al'owed to speak otherwise to philosophers than to the common people.
Neither the expositorial syllogism, nor any other, is denied by Wyclifs
theory, which on the contrary admits many forms of syllogism that others
deny. — A curious difficulty is raised here by the adversaries (195).
Wyclif is certain that he has had no son. Yet perhaps his son is wiser
than he; for he possibly may have a son yet. If this son c will be% then c he
is 3 according to the theory which extends the future to the present.
Wyclif denies this conclusion, unless it is certain that he will have a
son. At first sight it does not clearly appear how this can be denied
in the form given. "Filius meus ex mihi dubio esset sapiencior me."
A supposition that depends upon another supposition is quite thinkable.
But we must here remember Wyclifs doctrine — that the distinction
between extrinsic and intrinsic possibility has no real foundation; that a
seemingly possible creature is in reality impossible, if God has chosen
never to create it (See Logica vol. II., Intr. XXIV). We have the right
to deny the possibility of Wyclifs ever having a son in the future,
unless we are certain that he will have one. Perhaps the individual in
question is possible; God knows; but we know nothing at all about
him (195—199).

Time is the same everywhere. — Our author begins by enumerating
the arguments contrary to his own opinion (199 — 202), and then refutes
them one by one. Even if the world were not everywhere, it would not
follow that time is not everywhere. But as a fact, the world being
(partially) in each and all of its parts, that argument must fall to the
ground (202). — It is denied that the world has any unity whatever,
being a mere aggregate; and time, an accident belonging to the world,
cannot have more unity than its subject. But Wyclif points out that the
laws of nature give unity to this aggregate, just as political laws give
unity to an aggregate or assembly of men. Besides, the world, not-
withstanding changes ; remains the same in its efficient cause — God
— and also in its material cause — the atoms of which it consists.
If we grant that the world is animated, its unity becomes much more
evident; now, we have many proofs that it really is an animated

INTRODUCTION. XXXIII

being (202, 204). — If a part of the world could become the-
whole, then indeed the duration of each part would have separate
existence. But this supposition would be true only in case a part
of the world were annihilated; a possibility which Wyclif absolutely
denies (204, 205). — What is extended is not everywhere the same.
True. But is time extended, merely because it is the duration of a
body? No. A man's duration does not change, if he happen to lose
some part of his budy. Movement indeed, though inextended in itself,
is extended in the body which moves. But take away any part of a
body in motion, and the whole quantity of the movement is lessened;
the same cannot be said of its duration. Thus we may define Time as
the universal, indivisible and ubiquitous duration of all temporal
things (205, 206).

Another objection, on which (to judge from the length at which
it is dealt with) Wyclifs opponents seemed to rely a great deal, may
be summed up as follows: Were time everywhere the same, day would
be night, summer, winter; fair and foul weather would be identical: for
they are parts of time. If Wyclif answers that the same time may be
night in one place and day in another, he is met by the reply: How
then can time be the same in every place? Where there is night,
there is no day. If time, which is everywhere, be night, then night
is everywhere; or if not, the universals Day and Night have a semi-
spherical shape, and pursue each cther round the earth ! A body
moving swiftly westvvard would enjoy a longer day, and night, being
everywhere where day is not, would exist in the interior of every opaque
body. All which is manifestly absurd (200, 201). — The answer is
obviously that day and night are not time, but times. Time happens to
be called day or night according to the circumstance of the presence
or the absence of light (206, 207). Time, i. e. that which is here as
day, may be (and is) elsewhere as night. To say that light pursues
darkness is a mere metaphor which may be admitted or denied as we
choose. That night is semi-spherical, because it occupies a semi-spherical
space, is not more true than that God is round, because He fills the
rotundity of the universe. We ought also to draw a distinction between
natural and artificial night and day. Day exists eternally throughout the
whole world, except in the interior of the earth, or in its shadow. Night
is nearer and nearer to a fixed point on the earth's surface; it does

XXXIV INTRODUCTION.

not follow that night moves, but that the movement of something else
(i. e. of the sun) causes night to be nearer. Many quibbles arise from
too lax a use of words. We have day after sunset; an eclipse may cause
night at noon, it being caused by the moon's shadow, not the earth's;
and the moon, if self-luminous, would be the cause of day. Every
kind of obscurity may be called night. All these difficulties spring
from different meanings given to the same words. Properly, day
exists on earth only when the sun is above a given horizon. But this
is merely incidental, and quite irrelevant to what time is in itself
(207 — 21 1).

Timc implies movement : objections refuted. — Time requires the
idea of a Before and an Afterwards, which are to be found only in
movement. If all movement were to cease, time would cease too. It is
objected that the mere act of imagining time, without any movement,
would suffice to cause time. Imagination would certainly create time by
the very fact of its activity; but this is itself a movement, and the hypo-
thesis of a bodily faculty working without motion is utterly absurd
(211 — 215). At this juncture, Wyclif enters into a digression respecting
the happiness of the Blessed in Heaven (215, 216) and the misery of
the damned (217), which is relevant to the question in so far as, po-
siting eternal time, Wyclif must posit eternal movement of some kind. He
asserts that all movement cannot cease in the world ; successive know-
ledge, and (I may add) the feelings of pleasure and of pain, require it
(217). Whether the world will continue to move after the Day of Judg-
ment is not so certain. The changelessness which follows upon the
attainment of the end of any being, may be called rest, and such rest
is not opposed to successive motion. But the rest of a being that can
and does not move must be denied for many reasons, one of which is that,
applied to the world, such rest would neither be successive nor instan-
taneous; neither in time nor in any part of time. Lines, &c„ may
begin and end instantaneously; but this cannot prove that a substance may
do so too.

If it be true that the hand of a clock, turning round in exactly
24 hours, would measure time as well as the First Mobile, we have a
very slow movement equal to one excedingly swift, as regards time;
therefore movement and time are not interdependent. — This objection,
Wyclif admits, contains a point which the imagination is unable to

INTRODUCTION. XXXV

represent. What is necessary is that the movement by which time is
measured should be regular. Our author here gives some rather intricate
explanations as to the possibility of a first instant of time, in answer to
the objection that, at the first instant, there is either movement or rest; if
rest, then no time exists ; if movement, that implies a Before, and there
is no first instant. The objection might easily be answered by saying
that the first instant is not properly a part of time, but merely a
terminns a quo, a starting-point: only such an answer would contradict
the whole of Wyclifs theory. — A last difficulty, viz. that the world,
immediately after its creation, might have remained at rest for some time,
is met by a flat denial. Rest is a perfection, but not such as can belong
to the world. That it will exist eternally is no contradiction to the asser-
tion that it began to exist; but here there is a very considerable diffi-
culty (non occurrit michi promptus modus explanandi me in ista materia
. . . ideo transeo pro presenti, p. 224). Evidently Wyclifs system,
positing the necessity of the workfs everlasting existence, because each
instant of time requires one that follows, is endangered by the question
whether each instant does not require one to precede it: the old objection
of Aristotle, who for that reason asserted the eternity of matter, an
assertion contrary to faith.

Whether thc non-being of the world preceded its being. — This
last question arises out of the foregoing one, and seems (though that
would contradict other parts of the system) to lead our author to
a conclusion like that of Aristotle. For if it be answered negatively
by the assertion (225) that the world's non-being never was, and that
its being was always, this looks a great deal like the doctrine of the
eternity of matter. But in the answers to the objections, we find that
Wyclif distinguishes between to be and to be existing. As / am long
ages before / exist (according to him) so the ideal (though real) being
of the world was eternally before its material existence; being before,
it was withoul its existence, but not with its non-existence. Of course it
is very hard to get out of the difficulty, which is on a par with the
rest of the system; but the answer satisfies Wyclifs doubts. Ideal being,
that which is the existing world, really was in eternity before the world
existed. It was identical with God's knowledge, so long as God did not
know the world to exist now, i. e. in the first moment of time.

XXXVI INTRODUCTION.

IV. Conclusion: The gist of the Nominalistic

controversy.

With these arguments the third volume of Logica closes somewhat
abruptly. Like the rest of the work, it abounds with arguments of
striking force, as directed against Nominalistic exaggerations ; but, on
the other hand, Wyclifs theory of Space and Time lies open to a great
number of objections which even his ingenuity is not always able to
refute as satisfactorily as might be desired. In many parts, for modern
readers at least, it has only the interest of an intricate puzzle.

The problem of the Universals, however, though seemingly as dead
as any other phitosophical question of the past, deserves a few con-
cluding words. I shall endeavour to show that, under other terms, and
until some fuller explanation is found than has yet been given, it is and
will remain for ever the great stumbling-block in the path of all meta-
physical inquirers.

When we have the idea of a man, an animal, a substance, we
conceive something that is universally the same in all men, animals, and
substances. Is there anything in the objects of our thoughts that corre-
sponds to it — anything really universal, universale in re — or is there
nothing? If we answer in the negative, we hold the Nominalistic position;
if in the affirmative, we are Realists in the old sense of the word.

But to answer affirmatively, we must, either implicitly or explicitly,
lay down the following formula: What is in our mind exists in ifseJf
in the sanie way as it is in our mind. Lay this down, and you have
Berkeley's denial of matter, German transcendentalism, and modern
Idealism in general. Esse est percipi; to be is to be perceived. Matter
exists as we know it, and as much as we know it; outside of the
knower, it has no being at all. The Non-Ego is posited by the Ego,
and is identical with it. We can have cognizance of the external world
only as a modification of ourselves; and if it exist as we know it, it is
nothing but this modification.

On the other hand, Locke\s conceptualism, the materialism of cer-
tain XVIII th century philosophers, and the empiricism and positivism of our
own times, proceed from the negation of this axiom. Locke, in order to
affirm the limits of the human understanding, was obliged to deny to
certain ideas any value but such as is merely subjective; which amounts

INTRODUCTION. XXXVII

to saying that, however infallible the deductive process, however evident
the first principles from which we start, we are still liable to be mistaken,
because things may be otherwise than as we know them to be. To assert
that all is matter, and that even the acts of our mind are material,
notwithstanding our conscious certitude that there is an abyss between
the two, is to set dovvn that whatever we know, no matter how indu-
bitably, may be false if it goes beyond material facts, and laws relative
to matter. Again, the statement (which would ruin Metaphysic, if Meta-
physic could be rnined by man) that at the bottom of all our inquiries
into first principles, we find self-contradictions and absurdities in every
possible assertion on either side; and that consequently though we can
know neither space nor time, we must confine our investigations to
that which is conditioned by time and space: — this well-known
doctrine is based upon the denial that things are as we know them.

The quarrel between Realists and Nominalists is thus an important
phase, but only a phase, of the everlasting struggle between two op-
posite currents of thought. I call it everlasting, for though the forms may
vary, it is likely to spring up for ever, or at least so long as human
curiosity as regards such high and abstruse matters continues to exist.

Not that there is no answer to the problem, no middle way
between the absolute affirmative of one class of philosophical thinkers,
and the uncompromising negative of the other class. But in this very
answer we find the reason why it is not universally accepted as settling
the point in dispute.

Do all things exist as they are known by us? As is a very short
word, and (it would seem on a superlicial view) not equivocal in the
least. But let us consider it more closely. Things seen in a looking-
glass both are and are not as they are in reality. There is a certain
resemblance, more or Iess perfect; but the difference between them is
that between the image and the original. In the same way, so far as
any comparison is possible, the human intellect is the mirror of
Nature. Our thoughts are the images of things; but we can no more
eonclude that things are of the nature of our thoughts than we can
infer that a nosegay out of a looking-glass is of quicksilver amalgam,
because in the looking-glass it is imprinted upon quicksilver. Thus,
things exist as they are known by us: that is, we have the right,
they being the causes of our thoughts, to make certain inferences

XXXVIII INTRODUCTION.

from the effects to their causes; inferences necessarily vague and
indeterminate to a great extent, but none the less true, on account of
the necessary resemblance between the image and that which it images.
Even a shadow, however distorted and indeterminate, bears some
resemblance to the person who casts the shadow. But on the other
hand, things do not exist as they are know by us, if as means a
complete identity of nature between the known and the knowledge
thereof. For iliat which is the known, is such only from one point of
view, or at best only from a few points: it — i. e. the same that which
(as Wyclif would say) — is the Unknown from millions of other points
of view. All the sophisms in the world cannot get the better of this
distinction. by which all similitude of nature between knowledge and the
known is excluded, whilst similitude of representation is carefully maintained.
But it is precisely this answer, though given by many great minds.
both amongst the ancients and the moderns, that fails to satisfy by its
very muderation. We long to get behind the 'Thing-in-itselP, and if we
find we cannot, we cry out that there is nothing at all outside the
mirror; or, after many a squabble, weary of disputes, we deny that we
can know anything of that which the images represent, and that all
science ought to be concerned with the images alone and their relations
with each other. And thus the disappointment caused by the perfectly
natural and simple answer given above leads to two contrary excesses
of thought. Some, yearning towards the Absolute, conceive endless systems
by which to go beyond the limitations of the mirror: systems beforehand
doomed to failure as hopeless as the search after perpetual movement.
Others think that the contrary extreme is the only tenable position, and
reject even such limited inferences as may justly be drawn, nay, that our
very nature compels us to draw. Those aspire to be as Gods; these
are content to thr ow away part of the inalienable birthright of men.
Wyclif, I think, belongs to the former category. His system was, partly
at least, a mistake; but it was the mistake of a bold, powerful, and com-
prehensive mind. He and all those of his class were philosophers, gifted
with a mighty grasp of thought, and immense mental acumen; whilst the
others, however ingenious their subsequent endeavours to reconcile their
principles with facts, must, by the laying down of those very principles,
strike at the root of all philosophy, and even of human reason itself.

TRACTATUS TERCIUS

Continuatur.

CAPITULUM NONUM.

B 99 b Sequitur de localibus pertractandum. Supponendo Local

primo omnem ypotheticam adverbio loci copulatam cum P>'opositions

r _ _ J r r _ compnse

proporcionali actu esselocalem; ut est talis: Sor currit all propositions
, . „■ . . *, _ . ■.. < , • • that are joined

5 ubi Plato curnt. Kst autem lste species ypothetice (sicut to another by

causalis, comparativa, et temporalis), affinis cathegoricis, an ad ^ b ot

cum signa coniungendi talia convertuntur cum cathe- This species

• • tj . j- o • ,■ m , resembles

goricis. Idem emm est dicere: Sor cumt ubi Plato categoricals,

currit ; et: Sor currit in loco in guo Plato currit. Et . *? * wll f re ca ?
' " be resolved mto

iohinc, 2 m auctores, adverbia loci et temporis sumuntur m the piace in
quandoque nominaliter pro denominacionibus cathego- thus reridering

ricis a loco et tempore: ut patet de istis: ubi, quando, lts P'"oposition

r i . . ■ . ™ categoncal.

nunc, et similibus. Sunt ergo tales proposiciones quante They are

... ... quantitiable

et quales, ut cathegonce: et per consequens sunt ludi- aiK j qualitiable,
i5cande vere vel false, contradictorie, equipollentes, vel and h tn v e e Ihe
aliter passionate, sicut cathegorice. Unde hec: Sor non properties ot

, • n , . , , « c . , . , • categoricals.

est ubi Plato est, habet 3 S causas veritatis. Vel quia a is not where

alter illorum non est, seu uterque, vel quia idem locus B , **> ma y Pe

' " ' ~ true either

non continet utrumque. Illud tamen non est compos- because one or
20 sibile cum esse istorum; quia, sicut necessario omnia not exist or S
que sunt, simul sunt tempore, sic necessario omnia „.: ause l _ tlleir

~ ' " ' whereabouts

que sunt simul sunt loco communi. (Jnde, quamvis is dirterent:

, ■ . but this last is

nomen loci sit equivocum, satts tamen est pro nunc not possible

cognoscere locum qui est situs. u t? tn exist -

" , Place is

2 5 Pro quo noscendo, notandum mundum componi ex equivocal;
certis athomis, et nec posse maiorari nec minorari nec dea*] with it.
moveri recte localiter vel aliter fieurari, ita quod tan- taken !° mean

.' " position.

tam multitudinem athomorum consequitur tanta quan- The world is
.... . ,. c ■ , •, made up of

titas continua et talis hgura, propter causas lmmutabiles atoms, can be

neither

increased nor

r j . l, , s ■ ••■ , o ~' 1.. • d diminished,

1. Cap. deest; blank space Jor tnttial S. 29. iuna leb in marg. B. nor m0 ved in

2 JOHANNIS WYCLIF GAP. IX.

a straight line, naturales. Aliter enim non esset mundus capacis-

in^shat^fan simus et convenientissimus in figura. Et ex illis sequi-

this is tur s ituacio mundi et eius duracio. Unde Aristoteles,

lmmutahlv . . . . . ,.

dependent on nominans quantitates continuas, nominat species per ordi-

^ofatoms" nem se habentes, ut lineam, superficiem et corpus; et 5

preter hoc locum et tempus, quorum omnium princi-

pium est punctus; et unitas est principium puncti. Et

tam necessario consequitur locus materiam quod ubi-

Site foilows cunque fuerit ista maxima materia mundi, ibi est istc

m t here exists™ locus. Sic quod, si moveretur recte (per impossibile) 10

the mass of thc ; n vacuo infinito, foret continue idem situs, cum ad

world, there ls . .; . . . .

the same place. mdividuacionem lllius situs sufhcit extensio lllius materie.

Manet autem necessario ista materia, etsi infinite eius

partes corrumpantur: quia oportet illas continuari ali-

unde cum residuo huius materie. i5

The point is Et sic, quamvis species situs punctalis sit principium

th of r \vi)ich ,C integrandi omnem situm divisibilem, tanquam minimum

partial spaces me trum illius generis, tamen totalis situs mundi est
are made up; ° . ■ . .

but that by nobis mensura cognoscendi ahos situs particulares, et

^these^ar&tT prior in perfeccione et intencione nature, cum gracia 20

spaces is the in_i us s i tus quem principaliter intendit, ordinat natura
whole extent of . . /* r . r . '.

the world. situm lndivisibilem tociens multiphcari 2 m eius tndtvi-

If h a h s e su V bti e d dua. Si ergo mundus habet ad omnem eius punctum
motioniess pa rtes inmobiles, subtiles, comitanter ad speciem in

parts, to which r . . ,\ . .

is united the animali, cum quibus copulatur virtus mundt regitiva, 20
rutesTheworld, <l ue ^ acit informaciones vivencium et alia opera laten-

it becomes easy c i a . t unc facile est distingwere situs parciales, cum qui-
to disttuguish ,. ' . . ,. . ° , . . _ 1 . _,

place. hbet situs parciahs foret tcilein partem situari. Et | m \\ 100
thcre^can enter talem partem ac eius situm possunt quotlibet corpora

diifercnt bodies, v icissim ineredi, sicut theoloci ymaginantur omnem 3o
one after . ° ' D J ° .....

another. ultimum inmobile se habere. Et lllius opinionis vide-

rillTmatter, tur ruisse Plato, vocans locum materiam, ylen, vacuum,

emptiness, &c. ve \ f ra udem fictam crassis tenebris involutam. Et quo
There is no .

ditticulty as to ad penetracionem corporum, non plus procederent contra

^since^theoioey' eum quam contra theologos nostros ponentes quod cor- 35

teaciies that it p 0ra possent transire in celum sine eius alteracione vel
is not ...

impossible. corporis sic coextensi corrupcione. Unde Lincolntensis

ponit omnia astra esse corpora mixta ex puritatibus

tj. locus B. 24. com 1 ' completur B. 2?. copulatur in marg. B.

33. cir, B. 36. lata'coe B. 38. put'tatib(j B.

24. Immobiles, subtiles. I suspect that Wyclif here means the
space by which the world is measured. See a few lines below: in
talem partem . . . possunt . . . corpora . . . ingredi. "ii.ylen.
It ought to be hylen — vlrjv.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 3

elementorum. Et dicit esse probabiliter opiniabile quod-

libet astrum per se moveri, toto orbe residuo quiescente.

Relictis ergo istis ambiguis, loquendum est de situ Every

. ' r» . superlunary

qualiter oportet omnes rectiloquos loqui, quomodocun- part of the

5 que fuerint probabiliter opiniati. Nam, ponendo quod the°pofes X is P in

quelibet pars superlunaris preter polum continue move- pontinual

atur (et sic de qualibet parte sublunari preter terram Its matter

vel sibi adherencia, ita quod non sit talis pars mundi ^unftyof "its S

supernalis quieta): tunc potest dici quod sicut ad in- site; for that
... n . ' r . ~ of its partial

iodivisionem situs mundi sumcit tsta matena, sic ad m- sites, we have

divisionem situs cuiuslibet partis sue sufficit quod iste relations^with

mundus habeat aliquam partem sic positam in com- l , he poles a , nd
, . the motionless

paracione ad polos et centrum; que tria quasi omnes centre.
philosophantes dicunt oportere semper quiescere.

i5 Ex quo ulterius concedendum est quod manet con- Place is,

tinue idem situs in numero, propter idemptitatem mundi always '

et conformitatem distancie ad duplex quiescens, situato numencally

/ ^ ' the same;

quantumlibet in substancia variato. Si enim datum if any body is

, , i- j i i • • alwavs equally

corpus vel quodcunque ahud se habuent conttnue per f ar -f v0 ^ t h e

2ototum eque distanter ad polos mundi et quamlibet par- P° ,es and fr ° m
~- " ." , v the centre, lt is

tem terre quiescentem : tunc est continuo in eodem always in the

•» •. , • ,- • • • • • same place.

sttu; lta quod mdivisio situs accipitur a gravitate cor- Admitting the

poris ex hiis tribus principiis, non autem a centro st abihty of the

r r . , centre and the

mundi mdivisibili per se quiescente. Unde, si centrum poles, any body
j- , ,. . . . moved in a

2.i mundi et duo poh quiescerent, toto residuo moto, tunc concentric

quilibet motum 2 m circulum concentricum et eque dis- thenfwouWb

tantem a polo mundi foret continue eque distans ad . equally
l"_ «. -u • i-i i- j- n t- • distant from

nns tribus, et m casu a quohbet alio distante. Sed tam them; but the

necessario multa terrena quiescunt, sicut et multe par- distance trom

" ' r ihe motionless

3o tes celi, respectu quorum sic motum varie se haberet parts of the
^,,^ „ i r * • o- -• u carth and thc

quo au distanciam parcium. Sicut ergo contmue manet s ky would yarjr.

iste mundus propter unitatem istius materie, quamvis vfficuliies.

. * r . ! " i. lt the space

lllius mundi continue corrumpatur pars, sic propter filled by the

unitatem mundi habentis quamcunquc partem sic posi- common placc

3b tam, maneret iste situs parcialis, quamvis continue sit rianVDteces

nova et nova ubicacio. can be together,

Grave tamen esset videre quid subiectaret illum situm, would be no
et quod foret ultimum singulare situs. Cum situs datus mo e in f a ce°to
sit commune, et cum omnis situs sit aliquid situari, another.
4-ovidetur quod quotlibet situs possunt esse simul, et
unus moveri ad intrinsecum. Et sic locus per accidens

9. fpualis B. o — io. indini "5 B. 9—10. indini , B. 22. ague

generabile (?) B. 25. 2° pro duo B. 28. 3» pro tribus B.

4 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP - IX -

2. One piace locaretur, et sic in infinitum procederetur in locacionibus,
placed hi sicud et in aliis quantitatibus, sed non per se essent

another: which quante. Ista ereo situacio est hoc situari, et non habere
is absurd. ,. , , . • • ... , .

mundi vel relacio, cum sit quantitas pnncipians ubi-

cacionem alterius generis, sicut tempus principiat ip- 5

3. No two sum quando. | Et per consequens nil distans a relico B ioo b

th fVom each" 1 potest esse adequate ubi ipsum relicum est, nec ali-

other could quid potest esse alibi quam adequate est, nec aquirere

be in the same n r • j 1 .1 -u- j 1-.

place, nor locum vel moveri de loco ad locum sibi adequatum. Et

mov^from s ' c non specificaretur motus localis per terminum ad 10

one place to quem, vel eius materiam, cum nichil potest moveri de
another. , , ,

loco ad locum.

This comes Ista et multa similia dependent super isto, quod

thTt^siumticHt omnis situacio vel locus pertinenter signandus corrum-

is lost with the pitur ad quamcunque modicam variacionem subiecti: et 1 3

slightest f, ^. n . ,

variation of the ldem sequitur, ponendo locum concavitatem corpons
or that'p[ace is locantis, et longe magis absurda ponendo nullum locum

a hollow in the preter corpus locans, quia pari evidencia negaretur
surrounding r . r . , '' , fl . , , . ,

body, quodhbet accidens. Et dehcerent verba ad expnmendum

^here^is^any magnitudinem, adquisicionem vel immobilitatem loci, 20

other place but cum aliis philosophice de loco locutis. Nam tam homo
that body; , : , , ... . ,

and such quam bestia habet mnatam sibi potenciam ad cogno-

contradict^hc scendum mobile mutare locum suum. sicut patet de

very naturali noticia situs, posicionis, distancie, et opposi-

expressions , . . .,.,..,

used in cioms. Ideo stcut in natura omne motum vel mobile mni- 23

Spe place 8 °' titur alicui fixo ; sic non est possibile nos locum cog-
Men and noscere, nisi in comparacione ad aliquod fixum. Sicut

animals know .

that a moving ergo mundus ad eius motum situalem presupponit polos
b °fts place SCS et centrum quieta, sic presupponit ad eius situacionem
As the eadem, saltem 2 nl speciem, quieta. Et sic vere dicit 3o

movement ot , ,. ...

the world, so commentator quod centrum mundi est causaliter etus
Dresupposes locus; et per idem uterque polus, non quod situs in-

certain fixed divisibilis sit formaliter situs mundi, sed quod hii 3 S
points. .... . . .

Thus these situs principiant, tam quo ad esse quam quo au noti-
^DolTs and \he c i am > situm mundi et cuiuslibet sue partis. Cum ergo 35
centre) cause rnens prius cogitat singulare fixum quam situm, non
situation ot the mirum si a tali individuat locum, et si locatum quan-
world. tumlibet varietur.
Answers. Ad primum argumentum, dicitur quod situs parcialis

'belonas 011 est P" mo subiecttve in communi ad quamcunque par- 4°
primarily to t ern mundi sic positam, et ab illo communi non potest

every part ot

the world
out of which ^ , t

nothing can go; /,. mdi B. 8. aqre B. 9. Iocum deest B. i3. dependentes B.

23. mo l8 mur' B.

CAI\ IX. LOGICA.

mierare. Universalia enim sunt alicubi, et generabilia, but it belon

accidentallv to

., .,. . , ,• • acuiueiiiany 10

et corruptibuia per accidens, ut patet ex dictis supenus. every par ticular
Sed per accidens subiectatur in quacunque singulari P art -

parte mundi sic posita, licet non dependet a tali.
5 Pro 2° notandum quod aliqua forma individuatur - Some torms
a subiecto proximo: ut ista sessio, ab isto homine se- individuated by
dente ; aliqua a subiecto remoto : ut ista caliditas aeris, su bjecT, others
a materia prima. Ideo manet eadem caliditas in numero, bv a sub jf et

*■ % .... tllilt is rcrnoiCj

aere converso in igne, licet non eadem mdividuatur quo others by

ioad subiectum proximum. Et 3 individuatur forma a suo extrinsk^yet

principio extrinseco, licet sit communis subiecto: ut, iste als0 ibelonging

situs, qui est ultimum singulans loci, hcet sibi possunt as in this last
accidere quotlibet ubicaciones. Nam ubicacio individuatur
a subiecto et a loco, qui non est communis predica-

i5cione, sed causacione, ad quotlibet tales situs. Ad 3™ 3. Cod Himselt

dicitur quod deus non potest facere duos situs coex- two^differenl

B 101" tendi, nec duo puncta, | vel sua subiecta esse simul in piaces to

w # L ' ' 1 1 i C 1 O C ,

eodem situ indivisibili. Verumptamen contingit duo cor- but two bodies

pora esse simul in unum ad omnem punctum alterius a^Yh^-d^and yet

2ocum hoc quod quilibet punctus alterius illorum habeat have all their

situm sibi proprium. Ex hoc patet quod non oportet,

si ubicunque extenditur A extenditur B, et econtra,

quod ipsa coextenduntur, sic quod quilibet punctus unius

sit in omni situ formaliter in quo est punctus alterius.

•o Est ergo situs per se quantus et inmobilis: per se Site is thus a

,. c ,. „ quantity by

quantus, quia quantus sine aho formahter lpsum quan- ftself and

tificante, copulatus ad eundem terminum communem m °! i< jf , ^ n | :e by

ad quem pars corporis; ut docet Aristoteles. Est tamen nothing else

alterius racionis quam profunditas. Ideo non obest q^antity;

Soillam coextendi cum profunditate sine composicione ali-

cuius 3"; nec possit moveri, nisi eadem distancia in and motionless;
numero possit maiorari et minorari. Differo autem a argument
solucione argumenti quo probatur quod, mundi moto S[°"°^, d :h ^ e ^
recte versus oriens, moveretur quilibet situs eius, quo- moyed in a

35 usque probatus fuerit casus assumptus. Sicut ergo res ils^ite woufd

universalis est immobilis, sic et locus. assun^sMhat

Unde descriptive locus est quantitas contimia, immo- is impossible.

bilis, permanens, qua corpits formaliter est locatum ; licet piace." °

auctor sex principiorum extendat locum ad omnem lo- Gi p b f e r rt .4 e la

40 cacionem substancie sive punctalis sive corporee; Ari- definition
stoteles autem, 4 Physicorum, vocat locum ultimum %^ w

but Aristotle

12. singularis (!) B. 3o. 9poe B. 3i. V nec in marg. B.

39. a°' B.

implicitly says
tlie same.

6 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

corporis continentis immobile primum; quod intelligitur

de agregato ex superficie concava locantis et respectu

ad predicta principia loci. Illud enim immobile, et non

ultimum convexum corporis locantis, sed ultimum con-

cavum quod est primum et inmediatum continens. 5

Partial site is jr x i s tis patet quod quelibet pars situs mundi est

rounded on , r . * .

universal site. situs fundatus m communi ad quamcunque partcm

Site diflers n iundi sic positam. Et per consequens tam quelibet
irom situation r . . .... ..

particularis sttuacto quam untversalis situacio mundt

partis, est alterius racionis quam situs qui est locus. 10

not only in Et notandum quod propter istam differenciam habendam

^sense^site" credo quod hec nomina situs et situacio inventa. Omnis

causessituation. enim situacio partis mundi causatur a situ; quia quot-

However, in thelibet tale ubi causatur a loco; quod idem est. In mundo

poies e anci thc tamcn et primo subiecto situs idem est situs, posicio, i5

centre, site and et s ituacio.
situation arc . ,. /r . .... ... ,.

identical. Et sic sunt sex difterencie loci vcl posicionts mundi:

S of po^fflonf 8 scilicet, sursum et deorsum, que sunt termini longitu-

up and down, L \[ n \ s ■ dextrum et sinistrum, que sunt termini latitudinis;

for lengih: . . ,...., ,

right and left ante et retro, que sunt termini prorunditatis. In mundo 20

^blfore ^and ' autem et quolibet animali perfecto sunt iste sex diffe-
behind, for renc ie quorsumcunque ubicantur absolute fixe. Et in

depth. . r ^ . TT .

These are aliis dtcuntur comparative. Unde, ymaginato homine
unchTnaeatjle cuius capud sit in polo antarctico et pedes in polo
in the world arc tico, manus dextra in oriente et sinistra in occi- zb

and 111 pertect ....... .

animals. dente; tunc posicio lluus hominis corresponderct posi-

cioni mundi.

There arc also Sed preter istas posiciones est dare alias posiciones

""reiarivc^to" 8 parcium mundi respectu sui centri: ut res est eo supe-

different parts r j or j n m undo quo 2 m se vel aliquid sui est distancior 3o

ot the world. . . . m 1 i- - 1 • 1

As anything is a centro, et eo mferior quo 2 m se vel ahquid sui | est Bioi 1 '

from^fhecentre, distancior a circumferencia mundi Ex quo patet quod
it is higher, non est possibile centrum esse supra aliquid vel infe-

and lowcr as it . ' . . r ^. . .

is farther from rius quam est, nec circumierenciam mundi esse mieri-
circumference orem vel infra aliquid, aut superius quam est. Unde false 35
of tiie universe. nil£ r Un t quidam ponentes deum posse rarefacere mun-

Nothing can he ° . 7 . r r

abovc the dum m lnnnitum vel condensare versus centrum, aut

nor^belowlhc' movere ipsum motu recto, nisi forte equivocando intel-

centre. lexerint quod ipse habet potenciam ad hoc, si posset

fieri; sicut ego possum videre bestiam mortuam, ipsa 40

12. ftt 2 B. 22. v'ca v B. 34. circumferencia B ib. inferior B.

21. Animali perfecto. Becausc it is able to perceive what is
before and what behind, &c.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 7

obiecta michi. Res autem multiplicatas non repugnat As for bcings
esse supra se vel sub se; et sic de ceteris differenciis, space^they can

cum tunc sit res mulfiplicata localiter, quando complete bc b ? ,h ab ° v "

,. , . , ?,...,.,. r and below

est per diversa loca, sicut deus est mdivisibiliter ad themselvcs;

? omnem punctum mundi, et anima ad omnem punctum thesoul

sui subiecti. Proprie autem multiplicatur commune in and universals,

. . v. g. the

suis singularibus, cum sit eorum singulum; ut punctus universal idca

communis multiplicatur per totum mundum; et sic, But their'

quantum possibile est aliquid extensive multiplicari. individuals

, , . . ' . cannot be thus

iohed de puncto, loco, vel quantitate pcrmanente singu- really

lari, non est possibilis talis realis multiplicacio, quam- thoulhan

vis substancia singularis corporea bene possit multi- individual
,. . . ...... ... ,.. . . substance can

plicari: sic quod ahcubi sit matenahter et ahbi tnten- be multiplied

cionaliter vel sacramentaliter. sacramentaiiy.

i5 Ex istis patet quod mundus non simpliciter sed 2 m Thus the
suas partes est suprema res et infirria possibilis. Sed one V p„ce 1S the

videtur michi quod superficies extima mundi sit alcior highest and in

........ . . another the

tpso et extra ipsum 2 m sttum lndivisibuem, ntsi pars lowest possible
mundi superficialis subiectet illam, et per idem centrum f thinkVhat the

somundi esset inferius quam aliquod permanens continue circumference
_ . , . ... . . ., is by one

magnum. Et sic de cuiuslibet corpons termino. Non indivisible

enim foret substancia superior vel inferior propter eius an^bevond the
accidens terminans, si ipsum non subiectetur in aliqua world" itself:

1 . ,. so also ot all

eius parte pocius quam propter bonitatem, vel aha surfaccs.

■ib eius accidencia, quantumlibet distancia, aut propter

talem terminum per se existentem in eodem situ quo

infimo non continuatum cum terminato.

Sed pro aliis 4 01 ' differenciis notandum quod omne Every animal

animal absolute habens istas differencias habet 3 S lineas lha ™ s ?uVns CSC

5o dimensionales orthogonaliter se secantes in medio; et has three

L . ,. . , ,. dimensions

sex medietates concomitantes divtse per tales tres lineas that intersect

obiciuntur sex differenciis posicionum, sic quod quilibet ^Vthc^ccnnc 8

extra medium talis animalis inter tales lineas, quantum- of its body,
... . : . and six

hbet protractas, est comparative dextrum vcl sinistrum, corresponding

35 et cetera, huiusmodi animali. Et sic conclusio patet ' lower^Stc^'

quod stat idem non multiplicatum esse sextupliciter Tbus tlie samc
, ,.„ . . ,. . , , thing can havc

positum quo ad dinerenctas animahs: ut ldem est dex- six differcnt

trum michi, ante me, et supra me etc. ; sicut patet de ''^anwtime
toto residuo mundi extra me. Nam circulare est maxime relativejy to

tnat animal ;

24. bo m B. 27. quomfmo B. ?4._ptctas B. 37. ds al B.

27. Infimo. The word might read in summo, without the
sense of this sentence being cleaver or the reverse. When I
copied the MS. I found the word was most like insivevo.

8 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

proporcionatum esse multipliciter positum respectu ani-

as tor instance, malis, sicut et deus est maxime denominatus taliter re-
thc universc , ■ ,. ■, - T ,.

and God. spectu diversorum quo ahqmd potest esse. Nam si ah-

quod causatum habuerit dextrum, sinistrum etc.; tunc

deus est sibi dexter, sinister etc. 5

To the right Ex quibus colligi potest quod tripliciter dicitur ad

mav signity , . • , ,

either dextrum; primo modo summe dextrum ; stcut est qui-
absolutely so, hbet punctus linee dextralis, et omne quod 2 m se totum I

as a line r * i \

produced to est ad talem punctum. Voco autem lineam dextralem B 102

my right hand ,. , . c ..

" untii the °, ue protendttur versus dextrum usque ad finem mundi 10
ofth^wori" orthogonaliter correctam super lineam longitudinalem.
or simply so; 2 modo dicitur ad dextrum simpliciter quod sic est

as a thihg ot' , , ,, , .

which no part dextrum quod nulla eius pars est non dextra, sicut est
is to my lett; m edietas mundi et quelibet 2 m se totum in illa respectu
of the universe; mei. Et 3° modo dicitur dextrum 2 m partem; ut omne i5
as r a P body that corpus circumdans me, et sic de aliis differenciis etc.

ThTright hah" Ex °i uiDUS P atet °i uod stat simpliciter dextrum esse
of the universe quintupliciter positum respectu animalis; quadrupliciter
ahovc 7 ,' below, 2 m partes, et 5° modo simpliciter. Nam medietas mundi
behtndme: est s i m P lic i ter dextra michi, et est supra me, sub me, 20

whilc it is ante me, et retro me; licet partialiter. Sed solum 2 r
simply to my , • • ,. ., . .

nght. dicitur ahquid alteri summe positum; ut tdem est

T two e ab r olute y micm ' summe dextrum et summe sinistrum ; ut patet
positions of a de puncto terminante lineam dextralem.

Sophists Scio tamen quod multe sunt altercaciones sophistice: 25

thingVamiot be ut unus dicit nicml esse supra me, nisi 2 m se totum
called above me fuerit supra me; et sic mundus nec est supra me nec sub-

unless it be ..... . r

above in all ter ahquid; quia sequitur penes eos: A est supra B ; ergo,
According to A est su P erius q u am B; quia aliter capud hominis esset
them, to be supra ipsum; et sic esset corpus supra se, sub se, et ita m>

above means 1 ,•• ,-rr •• r> • • , • -,

10 be higher ue aliis dinerenciis. Pro lstis alteracionibus suppono quod

But*h*anv omne supra aliud est esse 2 m se vel aliquid sui in situ,
partofAis qui est situ adequato inferioris superior: et sic homo

above the ^ .. * '.

whole of B, n on est supra se, nec ahqua pars quantitativa rei est
'aboveB su P ra vel sub suo toto ; et sic de ceteris differenciis, 35

according to ut patet ex diffinicione quid nominis supra dicta. Sed
that part. . , , 2 , . r ,

Thus a man is uor i video quomodo posset dari quam alta vel quam

himself? b though P romnda foret res , nisi racione sue partis altissime aut

his head is profundissime. Unde res 2 m aliquid sui alcior quam
above his body. ■* *

1. atis = animalis? B. 11. errcam B. i»i. 2 c y 3 pro ditferenciis B.

18. alTs B. 22. alr' B.

36. Quid nominis. A verbol definition, that merely explains
what is meant by a given word.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 9

reliqua 2 m aliquid sui dicitur esse supra reliquam, et
ipsa superior. Et correspondenter de aliis differen-
ciarum denominacionibus. Sed non oportet, si aliqua
pars date significat aliqua parte alterius dande supe-
5 rior, eciam quod exinde sit prima res superior. Sed , Bllt l l £ l s

' * ... . above B lt does

oportet capere denominaciones huiusmodi 2 m supremum not follow

vel ultimum talis denominacionis. Ex quo patet non below A.

sequitur, si A sit supra B, quod B sit sub A, ut patet

de homine et corde suo; et proporcionaliter de aliis

10 consequenciis.

Sed relinquendo ista sophistis et redeundo ad con- Tne uppcr

clusiones priores, patet quod omne absolute habens lialt . ot anv
r . .' r ~ . . ammal

istas denominaciones habet sex medietates communi- contains

... m . ,• . . fpartially) tlie

cantes, quarum quehbet continet 4 01 medietates com- r *g nt t ne Ieft

i5 municantes 4 01 " parcium aliis denominacionibus subiec- tl,e . tore and thc
^ r _ . . Innd halves;

torum; ut illud quod est primo sursum in animah con-

tinet medietatem partis dextre, et sic de parte siuistra,

de parte anteriori et parte posteriori ; et sic de aliis

medietatibus. Nam ad omnem punctum sic positum for at eyery

, • • , , ■ point of its

20 continentur quinque denomtnaciones; et ad medium extension we

punctum exclusive concurrunt sex posiciones predicte. tind these nvc
" . ... . . positions,

Sed medius punctus sic positi non refertur aliqua tsta- while the

c 1 . "ii" •»• ■ » centre, being

rum 6 denominacionum respectu lllius positi, stcut nec tne i r starting

centrum respectu mundi. Nam medietas inferior mundi point, has none
... . ,. ot them.

Bio2 b est ab equinocciali usque ad polum articum, et aha Thc lower haif
, • . -ii . ■ of the universe

medietas mcommunicans cum tlla est pars supenor extC nds from

eius; et medietas mundi a Colubro usque ad polum orien- the equinoctial

' . 7 . . circle to the

talem est pars dextra mundi, et alia medietas mcom- arctic pole and
municans est pars sinistra. Medietas vero ab oriente ^pper half;

Sousque ad cenit habentibus speram rectam est pars and so on for
^ . r r the other

anterior; et relica est pars postenor. divisions.

Ex istis patet quod sub et supra in mundo sunt equi- Above and

voca. Nam aliquando dicunt altitudinem et bassitudinem, j n /j° a temere

ut supra dictum est, et aliquando dicunt absolute posi- n , ei s]£ and
r . ~ . . . . depth, or

35 cionem mundi. Et sic polus articus dicitur summe sub- absolute

ditus in mundo; bassissimum tamen et infimum possi- posl W o"ld.
bile ad sensum expositum est centrum mundi. Unde, , tnmost and

r . bottommost are

solum in mundo vel concentnco cum mundo, est ldem identical only,

5. ze' pro eciam B. i3. me tea B. 14. me' es B. 17. me'$ B.

19. media" 9 B. 20. et ad B. 27. coluro B. 33. al^ B. 38. fo m B.

25. Equinocciali. This may be a mistake for the Equator.
27. Colubro. The constellation of the Serpent. 3o. Cenit.

The zenith.

IO JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

for spheres esse infimum et intimum. Nam generaliter centrum rei

is that of"the est ems intimum, quia maxime intra illam. Sed non

world. j n eccentrico est centrum maxime infra, quia tunc ni-

chil esset eo inferius. Non ergo est infimum.

All these p£ x j st j s p a tet quod iste differencie posicionis susti- b

positions . r , J

admit of nent magts et minus, et quod est dare summum vcl

'amonest' maximum possibile in tali denominacione: ut summe
themselves, dextrum, summe sinistrum, etc. Patet eciam quod omnis

;md also a .

maximum of locus est equalis suo maximo locato et adequato; et
Every place is P er consequens mensurat ultimum gradum magnitudinis 10

equal to the locati. Sed hic est duhium quomodo locus quantificat

greatest . ' . . c

quantity that locatum et est m lllo, cum ldem locatum quantrncat

Can in ^) aced locum. Sed dicitur quod multum equivoce dicitur ali-

Placc gives quid quantificare aliud, et esse in illo. Aliquid enim
dimension to n ,.,.„. . . . ,, -

the thing quantihcat ahud ethcientcr, sicut deus quantihcat omnei- 1

^ejveste quantum, et corpus continens quantificat suum conten-

dimensions tum, sicut et locus. Sed quantitas, que cst dimensio, for-
from it; .. . ., . . cn •

it receives mahter quantihcat subiectum suum et efhcienter requan-

dimension t ificatur ab eodem. Unde situs non est formaliter sub-
tormallv 11 om
the quantitv iectivc in aliqua parte mundi, nec formahter lllam 20

and it gives quantihcans, nec ab illa quantihcatus. Sed locus ponitur
dimension as accidens efficienter quantificare suum subiectum

an efncient r • . . . .

cause, though locatum, sicut est i;enerati principium, quamvis non stt

not as an activc . .. . . . ,

one; it merely de genere activorum. Ahud enim est racere et aliud
^/'•h 1 Us ag ei ' e - Oportet ergo omnem locum corporeum coequare 2 3
subject has sibi suum locum; et de tanto habet locus racionem

dimension. . . , . ...... ,

forme quod ponit locatum m suts hmitibus quo ad

quantitatem et figuram.

Position, De loco vero mundi, videtur quod sit valde propin-

dimension and dimensioni et tieure. Differunt tamen ab in- 3o

shape are t o ... ,. ...

almost identical yicem, cum quelibet pars quantitativa loci mundi dir-

concerns the fert a parti quantitativa dimensionis vel figure sue. Nec

world, but they t j nconven j e ns. sed necessarium, quod aliqua reci-
diller as regards _^ ... . ,.

themselves, and proce se quantificant in drversis genenbus causandt; et

are othe C r taliter sunt reciproce in seipsis. Unde licet in 5 phi 35

sicorum dicatur aliquid esse octupliciter in alio, tamen

in three tripliciter 2 m genus unum potest dici in alio. Primo

as the^effect iii modo, sicut causatum in sua causa; et taliter omnis

its cause, forma est in suo subiecto tanquam in causa suscipiente
as the cause m ^ . . *

its effect, denominacionem. 2° modo omnrs causa est in suo 40

causato, et omne subiectum forme est in illa forma:

1 inlinitum B. 3. ineccfco B. 23. qnati B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. I I

ut homo est in substancialitate active vel passive, et
ignisin igneitate, homo in humanitate; et sic de aliis
similibus. Et 3° modo dicitur in alio sicut in suo or as the

coiitcnts 111

extrinseco contincnte, ut liquor in vase. Et hec dicta that which
, , cr ■ ._ i contains thcm.

? pro presenti de loco surhciant. | From thc

Bio3* Habita noticia de loco, incidit pertinenter tractare de consideration

_' r . ot placc, we

motu locali, cuius materia est locus; ct contingenter de pass to that of
ariis. Sed incipiendo a priori, supponatur quod motus mov ement.

in communi sit actus vel forma quo mobile formaliter Definition ot

. . ■* , . movement m

10 movetur. Et est duplex, scilicet subitus et successivus. general.

Successivus, ut motus localis, alteracio, augmentacio, vel l 'Vito

diminucio: et subitus, ut generacio vel corrupcio sub- instantaneous

p . r (generation and

stancie. Et patent descripciones istorum. di&solution) and

,, . .. , . • i,» „ successive (tocal

Motus autem localis, quo ad eius pnncipium subiee- move ment,

i5tivum, dividitur in motum per se et motum per acci- vanatton,

. . . . . increase, and

dens. Quamvis autem impossibile sit aliquid moven, diminulion).

nisi moveatur per accidens, tamen ad propositum re- movcmcnt is

strineitur motus per accidens ad motum localem, sine eithci-

o t , . . substantuil (as

eius per se existencia vel sufricieneia ad replendum that of a
2olocum: ut forme dilate cum subiectis motis, et que- or^accfdental
cunque partes quarttitative. Sed per se movetur loca- ( as ^"^ 811
liter quecunque per se substancia corporea que ex in-
clinacione eius intrinseca movctur, ut corpora.

Et hoc dupliciter; vel concomitante violencia ab Substantial

, • • t movemcnt is

2.1 extrinseco, sicut est m pulsione, traccione, veccione, et v i ient or

vertigine; vel sine violencia, ut est in motu celi et ut natural

creditur in elementis motis ad sua loca naturalia cum

iuvamine removentis medium prohibens et influencia < and B }\

r ... movement here

celi que generavit elementum et dedit sibi talem appe- below is
„ r, , , ., , • i " i" probabK more

3otitum. Probabue tamen est quod omnts motus locahs \ \ ess violent).

istorum inferiorum est cum violencia; ut aliquod cor-

pus movetur sine quadam naturali inclinacione.

Sed per se motorum aliquid movetur per se et ex vroc e J{din^

se. ut animata que possunt principiari motus suos sine (either selt-

. . . .,,. t , t detcrmincd or

3.1 motivo extnnseco simul existente cum nlis; et hoc vei not )

sine aliquo motivo extrinseco, ut homines et celum

(si sit animatum\ vel cum movente obiective extrinseco

apprehenso; sicut animalia. Inanimata autem mota or proceeding

.. . 11] from an

naturahter per se, cum quieverunt, non habent de se extrinsic cause.

40 sufficienciam ad inchoandum motum ; ut lapis non

1. I10B; ib. fai te B. 5. After sufficiant a blank space for 4 words B.
19. exn a B. 23. cor" B. 28. intiuencie B. ;>8. molia B.

12 JOHANNIS WYCI.IF CAP. IX.

surgit post quietem, sicut facit bestia memorans obliti

sempiternaliter immutantis. Semper tamen ab inrluencia

celi vel alio sempiternaliter movente moventur mutabilia

nota; ut patet de motis ad generandum sibi simile in

certo tempore anni, vel prosequentibus delectabile aut 5

fugientibus tristabile. Homo autem, cum anima sua non

subiacet necessitata motibus astrorum, potest movere

Some bodies se localiter contra inclinacionem extrinseci. Ideo celum

whoresTsome et homo perfecte possunt moveri ex se. Et movencium

as subjects ot se quedam moventur 2 m se tota, quedam sunt subiecta 10

movement, . , _

some as parts prima motus, et quedam 2 m partem, ut mota quorum
ofwholes. partes quiescunt .

Nothing can be Ex istis divisionibus bene notatis patet quod impos-
moved locallv, ., .. . • , , • • • , ,•

unless it be sibile est quicquam moveri locahter, nisi ab alio move-

sonieuifng^se atur - Si ernm sit cor P us c l uod movetur, tunc vel mo-i5

It is either a vetur ab extrinseco et sic ab alio; vel a parte eius
bodv or an ...... , .,

indivisible mota, cum lmpossibile est signare totum mobile motum,

if the in ffrst it nisl P ars eius P er suum m °tum faciat totum moveri,
is either eo quod talis pars sufriceret per se denominare totum

moved trom n . .,, ., i_j _• ..

without, or moveri, et non stat lllum parcialem motum subduci, 20
pa™™f S ?tself ms i ve * totum non m °veatur vel alio motu moveatur.
which itself u eo certum est quod motus talis partis I est causa Bio'3 l

requires to be

moved by quare totum movetur, et per consequens totum movetur
^th^second' ab alio - Si autem indivisibile moveatur, vel violente aut
it is moved p er accidens movebitur (et sic ab alio), vel ex naturali =5

"bcside inclinacione, et per consequens gracia alicuius finis, et sic
or according , ,•
to lts nature. du diiu *

This proves £t ex istis, cum paucis addendis, concludt potest

that there is a , , . . , •, .....

First Mover quod est dare pnmum motorem lmmobilem, mdivisi-
motionle"! 8 ' uliem > et eternum. Supponendum enim est ex sensu 3o
indivisible' corpora celestia moveri localiter, ut patet de astris.

eternal. * ,,

The sky 2° supponatur [quod] totum agregatum corporum mo-

Tt^finitel torum, sicut et totus mundus sit causatum tinitum;

both are quia, si esset infinitum, nichil potest ascendere vel des-

certain truths. * / ,. •• a - • 1 • ?c

The superior cendere, cum non esset ahqua ditterencia loci supra- zb
sky^move thosc dicta. Omnes enim ille differencie supponunt medium.
below, and Istud patet de spera corruptibilium mota a celo, et
de parte celi inferiori mota ab eius parte superiori,
et non econtra; quia tunc moveretur celum valde dif-
formiter quo ad tempus propter diversitatem motorum,4o
et esset mutua dependencia in eodem genere causandi,

2. fpua' ? rnut^" B. 3. fpna r B. 3o. cx B. 32. quod deest B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 13

et per consequens idem prius se ipso. Istis suppositis, Ttiere must,
, ^ . r , . r rr therefore, be

patet quod est dare corpus ultimum motum ex 2 a sup- a first mobile;

positione; et illud movetur ab alio ex conclusione, sed mobili fs" 8t

non a corpore inferiori ex proxima supposicione; ergo moved by

5 a motore eque primo vel priori dato mobili. Et illum

oportet esse primum motum, sicut suum mobile est

primum mobile.

Hic potest fingi quod primus motor est forma ex- it may be said

tensa primi mobilis; vel 2° quod spera superior movet ^Mover^isP 1

ioinferiorem, et econtra propter concathenacionem eorum the form of the
m • • 1 • • 1 o~ 1 hrst mobile

2 m concentncitatem vel excentncitatem; vel 3° quod coextended

eiusdem orbis quelibet pars moveat aliam, sicut est de wl {hVinferior at
trocho circumducto, qui eternaliter moveretur, si non bodies react

,. , . ,,. , upon tlie

lmpediretur a corrumpente, nec ab extrinseco colhdente superiors, or
i5nec ab appetitu quem forma habet ad quiescendum. ^the^wld

Cum ergo ista non possunt fingi in celo, videtur quod turns another

. r ,. ° ? , like a top that

ad perpetuitatem motus ceh non oportet ponere mtel- would move
ligenciam moventem, et per consequens non alium deum foi j t e not'for eie

a corpore celesti. friction.

A . . ,. , , , , . So God is not

20 Umnia lsta tolluntur per hoc quod celum regulanter necessary.

difformiter movetur, ac si esset unum proporcionaliter AiTthese

motum; quod nulla trium viarum potest solvere. Nec subterfuges are

.. f , . . \ , . . . met by the

est pnilosophicum ponere talem violenciam rn celo. fact that the

Sed 3° tollentur dicte ficticie per [dicta] alibi. Probatur r ^JforiJTSd
25 quod oportet totum eenus cause materialis esse propter y et not with

... . ,. ' a uniform

causam iormalem, et totum genus cause lormahs esse movement; for
propter compositum quod est per se efficiens; et totum can ^|,£ a ^ount.

genus talium oportet esse propter causam finalem ; et The first cause

. . r r r _ , cannot be

sic primam causam oportet esse causam finalem et non extended; it

3ocorpoream, quia tunc dependeret a partibus et haberet ^"each^oflti

causam ipsa priorem. Omne ereo corpus habet finem parts, and be
... . . . . caused by

ipsum limitantem, gracia cutus est sic activum, cum them.

non potest esse tam ordinatus motus nisi ab ordinante M ^^t Itseff 1
preter corporeo, quem oportet perfeccius cognoscere to its own end;
35 suum ordinatum quam homo suum ordinatum, sicut therefore one
operacio nature est perfeccior operacione artis. Corpus and^who^not

ergo primum, cum non 2 m se totum ordinat, habet matter, nor
..... , ,. .. . . torm, nor

aliqutd m eo quod ordinat aha, quod non potest pont having

corporeum propter eius operacionem et perfeccionem. quantity.

40 Est enim perfeccius primo corpore, cum sit finis ordi-

nans ipsum et omnia alia ordinata; et per consequens

i3. troco B. 24. dicta deest. 28. tliin B. 34. cor eo B.

I 4 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

Immovable and nec est eius materia, nec forma, nec pars quantitativa.
ete^aTtruths Est ergo indivisibile. Et cum non possit | moveri abBioq."

God is also ai i 0j p a tet quod sit immobile, et cum sit prima causa
ctcrrit.il • . . r j t

et necessano sint ventates eterne, patet [quodj est

eternum, sive mundus incepit esse, sive non. -">

Aristotle's yiew Sermo autem Aristotelis in ista materia est multum

"is disWstefuf insipidus propter extraneitatem terminorum et suppo-

because of his s } c i nes multas incognitas. Certissimum tamen est phi-

stran^e ° .

terminology losopho quou, extra totum mundum et totam multitu-

hypothefes! dinem causatorum, oportet dare causam illius tocius 10

., Th , e multitudinis, quia aliter esset causatum sine propor-

plnlosopher can . \ „

have no doubt cionali causa. Nec possunt esse multe tales cause nna-

the necessfty ofles^illius multitudinis eque primo causantes, quia tunc

admitting one m ultiplicarentur eracia speciei prioris et causantis eadem,

First cause of . v D r . r .. '

all. sicut patet ponentibus universaha. i5

Movement is Secundo autem dividitur motus localis in compara-

o? ^cotrtpound ; cione ad eius puncta et materiam in ipso aquiribilem;

simple when it ut ai i us es t motus simplex, et alius est motus compositus.
is one natural . r . ,•

movement of Simplex autem in proposito vocatur motus naturans,
any tlling S1Cal homogenius, corporis naturalis; et motus compositus 20
compound, cst motus competens animato a forma superaddita; ut

wheil lt r . ...

proceeds from progressio, repcio et volatus competunt animali. ht lstos

principle: motus comitantur multi motus diversarum specierum et

as walking, &c. m ulte quietes. Ideo totum agregatum vocatur motus

compositus. 2 5

Simple Motus autem simplex quidam est rectus, ut ascensus

movement is ,. . . . .

straightox et descensus, 2 m divisionem gravium et levium; et

The"latter aione quidam circularis, ut motus corporis. Neutri perpetui:

is believed to so i um e nim talis motus creditur esse perpetuus. Ideo
be perpetual, ..... . . . ' .

and is the most pnncipahssime competit corpori circumrern perpetuo, .-.o

movemen Ct that propter proporcionalem perfeccionem. Quod si aliqua pars
is possible to orD i s celestis ascenderit vel descenderit, hoc erit 2 m pro-

matter. . .... .

porcioncm circuh, et propter lnchnacioncm altenus cui

inexistit, et non propter situm alciorem vel bassiorem

in quo appetit quiescere, sicut gravia et levia. 35

To circular Unde, 2 m philosonhos, motus circularis non habet

movement there ' . . r . r . ...

is no contrary; motum sibi contranum, quia motus circulans potest

1ih a 'ip C v;H X d S or P er totum inesse corpori moto per totum ascensum vel
downward descensum. Ideo non contrariatur illis, cum eidem

movement,

4. quod deestB. 17. pu ca B ; ib. aq'ri lem B. 20. ul after corpons B.
3o. pu' mo B. 32. cor is ; orb above B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 15

subiecto primo possunt isti simul inesse. Et 2 m astro- and circular

, • , . . ■ , movement from

nomoSj motus circulans ab oriente in occidens com- east to west

patitur secum per totum subiectum sic motum, alium and t,om west
* m l ... to east ma y

circularem motum ab occidente in oriens; et multo also coexist.

5 magis alios motus circulares suner diversos poles. As- But ascent and

census autem et descensus contrarii sunt; quia sunt due contrary.

species motus quas impossibile est idem singulariter

per se motum simul et semel subiectare primo. Nam Not that the

» * i»" i' • 1 .. j j j same body

stat multiphciter simul tempore ascendere et descendere, cannot ascend
Kisicut et corpus non multipliciter 2 m partes, sed non th^samTtime-

simul per totum. Unde, 2 m philosophos, non solum 2 m but the same

. . . r. . bodv as a

terminos contranos sed penes intencionem nnis penes r\<hole\ cannot.
motum medii et motus quibus adquiruntur illi termini,
attenditur, motuum contrarietas. Nec sequitur ex istis Yet though

. , , . without a

otunc motum circularem esse perpetuum, sed pocius coutrary,
probabiliter infert oppositum, cum motus celi non sit mo c ^ c ^ r t .
solum propter finem habitum placendum, sed propter probabjy not

c , , , r ■ ... , eternal ; it is

nnem nabendum, ut perreccionem universi ln produc- f r an end, and
cionibus animarum; et cum hoc non possit procedere atta th e(3 e " t d w in
20 in infinitum, philosophis est ponere quod aliquando cease.
cessabit motus celi.

Sed pro specificacione motuum sunt 3 a notanda. Primo m U tt P be ntS
quod aliquis est ver se terminus ad quem motus, et noticed here.

,. n V, . M , . . i rst That the

ahus non per se. Per se termmus motus est denominacio terminus of

25 accidentalis quam oportet mobile ut sic motum ad j!"^™^"!^

B io4 b quirere I et in fine motus habere ut ubicacio localiter itseifovnot;
t-; , , i. e. a terminus

moti. 1 erminus autem ad quem, sed non per se ter- to attairi which

minus motus, est quecunque forma que in fine primo tlle i s m li 3 1 % 1 e J m f nt

habetur a moto, quam non oportet ipsum formaliter or one wnich is

, . ^ . . r ... attained, but

.->o adquirere tanquam pnncipium sui motus, sive tnsit which was
extrinsece et non formaliter ut locus, sive intrinsece pr j n ™pi e th ( e t tne
et formaliter: ut sanguis post laborem ; et quodlibet movemcnt.
contingit esse tales terminos accidentales motui. 2° no- 2 nd There may

, , , . , ,.. . . be essential

tandum quod de motu, sicut de alns natuns, contingit an(4 accidental

35 aliquas esse per se species, et alias species per accidens; movement

que quidem species sunt capte ab accidentibus separa- according as
, .... . ..... , . ,. . they are

biiibus ac mseparabilibus; ut multe sunt species rehgto- distinguished

sorum et tamen omnes sunt eiusdem speciei substanci- b L c s ?, met , h '" g

alis. 3° videtur michi quod species rnotus naturalis vel accidental.
°. '.. . M ,. y . What

40 essencialis maxime attenditur penes matenam motus; principally
et per consequens penes per se terminum ad quem, cum a ^y^^ n is

its proper and
essential
terminus.

10. mlti'' B. 20. phie B; ib. al^ B. 32. fa ui3 B.

l6 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

omnis talis sit eiusdem racionis cum materia primo
Movements adquisita. Ex quo patet quod adquisicio materie, ascen-
may thus be dendo vel descendendo, circulariter vel recte, naturaliter

essentiallv ot ... ...

the samc vel violente, licet pnncipient motus dispanum specierum

S ^hey S &ffer P er accidens, non tamen species naturales. Et patet 5

accidentally. quomodo contingit motus esse eiusdem speciei naturalis

et disparium specierum peraccidens; et contingit motus

convenire ac differre 2 m plus vel minus de talibus spe-

ciebus.

ubjectwns. Sed obicitur, probando quod non sit possibile eam- to

i. The same r . ^ , . ,

sphere cannot dem speram moven per totum ab onente m occidens,

TnTVeltfw^rd et econtra. Iam primo videtur, data possibilitate quod

in its entirety; omnis orbis celestis movetur; quia si pars supra orizontem

tor while v. g. , . , .^ r l .

the part above movetur ab occidente m oriens, sequens est quod pars

tui-ns 'east\v"rd SUL1 orizonte movetur econtra ab oriente in occidens: i5

the part below e j econtra. Ereo totus orbis eque movetur 2 m partes
must turn . r .

westward. versus onens sicut versus occidens; et econtra.

horizons 6111 2 °« Sicut qualibet pars orbis celesiis oritur et

every part ot occidit continue respectu diversorum orizoncium : ergo

the sky is f . .

rising or non rerert ponere tpsum moven versus onentem aut 20
mattcfrs not' 1 versus occidentem. Ymmo quilibet punctus est tantum
whether we p er instans oriens vel occidens; et cum nullus punctus

say lt moves to ' . ,. . ,

the east or the attinget alium, sequitur quod onens non movetur versus
and^thus' any occidens, quamvis oriens infinicies erit occidens. Qui-
point is east bbet ereo punctus in equinocciali, si movebitur versus25

and west at thc ,. ° K , . ... ..

same time. alium, continue movebitur versus quemltbet alium; et

^East^moves s ' c continue movebitur versus occidens, versus meridiem,

towards thc et quemlibet punctum equinoccialcm cuiuscunque diffe-
West • which is . .« . «

inadmissible. rencie. Et illud sequitur ponendo istas differencias fixas.

confus^ng to 3°- Quilibet punctus in celo preter 4 or est orientalis, 3o

say that occidentalis, borealis et australis: ergo, non est nisi
anything moves , , ., .

towards a point confusio dicere quod mobile movetur versus talem

sfnce^the^whofe differenciam, cum non sit talis difTerencia fixa. Maior

sky, except 4 probatur per hoc quod in relativis tenet consequencia

points is at . , ■* . ,. . , .... , .

once east, wcst, a comparativo ad simphciter; sed quilibet punctus celi 3d
n °south nd prefer polum antarticum est in comparacione ad ipsum

For instance, borealis; ergo quilibet punctus preter ipsum est borealis.
evcry point _, . , ?„, ,.. .... .. „ ,. ,

in the sky, Et sic de y lls ahis punctis miciantibus 3 S ahas plagas.

antarc&Vpole Non er 8° opponuntur terra borealis et australis, sed

is more or less pocius relative convertibilia [suntl. 40

to thc nortli. ' L '

4. pu' ent B. 2S— 29 cpq dne B. 35. 9° B. 36. ergo

vro est B. 40. sunt deest B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 17

4 plus accedendo ad mentes loquencium, videtur Nothing
, ,, • c ■ ■ moving

quod nulla spera lnrenor movetur versus oriens, quia towards a fixed

est imnossibile moveri aliquid continue versus ter- point moves

1 " away rrom it;

B io5 a minum fixum et re | cedere continue ab eodem. Sic thus none of

, «. 1 the inferior

5 enim contmgeret muscam ascendere repente ab uno spueres m oves
extremo lancee in aliud per hora, illa lancea 2 m se tota eastward.

1 ..... Otherwise

descendente per eandem horam velocius m quahbet if a fly
proporcione signabili; et sic motus ascensus et motus fance that*

descensus contrarii inessent eidem subiecto- primo. descended at

■. . ... the same time

10 5 t0 , sic. Si planeta motu proprio precise tam velociter the same heing

moveretur, sicut rapitur per orbem superiorem, tunc wou C ontrary W

non moveretur; ereo multo magis nunc non movetur. movernents.
. D . 5 th . A planet

Antecedens patet ; quta tunc continue foret m eodem does not move

loco; ergo non moveretur localiter. Si enim mobile sphenfdoes^fn

i5 moveatur propter nisum suum, non adquisita materia a contrary

r r . . . . sense; bnt lt lt

motus, tunc omnis lapis vel grave mixtum continue did, it would

moveretur versus inferius. Sed quid incredibilius de then J' °/ / / noj,e

columpnis et aliis quiescentibus quam quod descendant There can be

1 ^ * x no movement

continue? withont change

20 6 to sic: si motus remissior inpedit aliqualiter reliquum, 6th ° A P sk>wer

motus intensior plus impediret, et motus equalis sim- movement of

1 L . . .. one part

pliciter impediret. Sed motus orbis planetarum lmpediret hindcrs the

motum raptus, cum longe velocior foret, illo subducto, mov^ment

quam est modo. Ereo motus simpliciter pares sim- equally fast in
n . . . ° . a contrarv

2.5 pliciter se lmpedirent. Ergo multo magis motus raptus, sense would

adeo velocior motu proprio inferioris orbis ; simpliciter Buftfen 1 the

impedit illum. Quilibet enim planeta tanto cicius de- movement ot
r . . J , _ llie planetarv

scnberet circulum suum circa terram quam modo racit, sphcre, being
quantum est talis ortus porcionis circuli quem describit m u r st S destroy

^o in die motu proprio sui deferentis: ut sol in anno so- jt entirely.
. r x . It so, the sun

lan trequencius quam modo circumrotaretur per unum ought 10

diem. Et alii planete per plus vel minus 2 m propor- the earth°one d
cionem velocitatis sui deferentis. Et hoc videtur mirabile d . a Y oftener than

lt does ; so ot

multum, quod mobile multum velociter movetur versus the other

35terminum fixum, et tamen, subducto illo motu, et quo- moVetnent 'is"

cunque supplente vicem eius, cicius veniente ad ter- ,J, e . st '"°. ved -

. n rr '. . Which seems

minum suum quam modo faciet: ut sol in occidente astounding.

existens cicius veniret ad terminum suum quam modo

faciet; ut sol in occidente existens cicius \eniret ad ori-

40 zontem subducto proprio motu, cum per motum raptus

i5. adq'i» B. 16. lp B. 2[). ts B. 3o. d'tnH= B 33! d'tnt-f B.
34. multum in marg. B.

i8 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

Thus the quam modo facict. Non ergo habet illud racionem motus
SP tfowcr^ot" quod impedit eius subiectum adquirere eius materiam.

hindering any ^j ec va i e t dicere quod descripcio concavitatis orbis
planet trom . ..... r .

actually superions et non adquisicio situs sit motus localis orbis

To^saTthat planete; quia talis descripcio non est motus ; sed acciden- 5
local movement taliter concomitatur motum: ut, si quis applicaret cul-

is merely . . 1 • j 1 •

change of site tellum quiescentem ad lapidem molarem circumductum,
0n sphere UP not 101 q uo usque tota superficies extima lapidis sit descripta,
real change of ta ij s descripcio non est motus. Ereo per idem nec retro-

place, is talse. ....... ... . .

gradacio orbis lnrerions nec descnpcio sue concavitatis. 10

Generalanswer. p ro i sto videtur michi quod loeice negandum est
Logically . , ^ * , ■

speaking, this tales motus esse. Lquivalent tamen quo ad conclusiones
Ca 'rao«me C nt. kd astronomi et finem quem intendit de uno loco et opera-

But it is cione astri in ista inferiora: sive ponatur talis nisus esse
equivalent, as . . . . .. , .... . .

regards motus, sivenon; quia vensimile est quod quihbet orbis i d

a there C iTa' planete habet nisum ut sit sub orbe signorum continue

tendency in disnariter suppositus, saltem 2 m I planetam suum ; ex B io5'
each planct ' . ' r . . ' r . ' .

pass on to quo nisu defeccio supponitur, modo quo convenit celesti
sign ; d it E matters horologio. Aliter enim planete non possent diversimode
little whether esse j n s jp n i s diversis celestibus, sicut experti sunt esse. 20

this be called . ° ....

movement Unde, sic amphando motum, contingit tdem corpus
If we extend habere quotlibet motus distinctos specifice; ut luna
the meaning dicitur habere quinque motus, preter duos motus com-

of movement, * x . '

we shal! munes omnibus planetis, et quothbet alios motus con-

actual^change tingit ymaginari lunam habere in ymaginacione per 2 5
of place, diversos orbes motos super diversos polos. Istud tamen

tendencv, , , , . '.,.._

change ot non haberet colorem, si omnis motus sit mobile. 1 unc
P ° S su 10 face, n " enim videndo mobile moveri, non videretur nisi precise

deiay, &c. iHud quod videbatur, mobili quiescente-. quod contra-

dicit cuicunque sano iudicio. Extendendo ergo nomen 3o

motus equivoce ad motum proprie dictum, ad materiam

motus, et ad quemcunque modum habendi corporis

propter quem ipsum aliter movetur, ut sunt nisus,

descripciones, tardaciones, vel quomodocunque aliter

vocentur: respondetur ad argumenta. 35

'■ T .hc . Ad nrimum dicitur quod conclusio est probabilis,
conclusion ot ... , ,- ,. , •

this argument cum quahbet pars latitudinahs spere celestis mote se-
eve P ry°part e of quitur ad aliam ; et movetur versus oriens, occidens, et

the celestial versus meridiem : et sic de infinitibus sitibus. Verumptamen,
sphere nioves ,,'•/>

towards all the vmaginato quod est dare situs hxos, sive per totum 40

p0 J^^Jj hc mundum, sive in ultima spera, ut maior pars sapientum

compass.

i5'. quia pro quod B. 20 t ib ' B. 25. in ymaginacione in marg. B.
27. ca i0 ' or ca r6 ' li.

o •

CAP. IX. LOGICA. U)

concesserat, et patet sequi ex dictis quomodo de loco But let us

1 • e -1 1 tvt 1 _m assume that

vel situ est facile respondere. Nam celum 2 m emispinum there are

supra orizontem nostrum movetur ab oriente in occidens . certam
r . directions that

et 2 111 emisperium sub onzonte nostromovetur ab occidente do not change.
5 in oriens e converso: et sicut idem ascendit et descendit ur ^part^of the
2 m partes, sic in proposito de motu ab oriente in sk y turas

r ■> v v _ towards the

occidens; et econtra. Sed notandum quod oriens quan- West, and the

doque sumitur pro illo situ inmobili in quo dextra pars ° t " e g^

celi creata est, et quandoque participialiter pro quo- But0 " e "', ma . v
' ... . . mean either

iocunque quod respectu ilhus oritur; et sic occniens nunc east or rising;

• • 1 -i« • • • » _ _j; Occident, either

sumitur pro situ lnmobih m quo sinistra pars munui west 0l . se[ti)l

creata est, et quandoque participialiter, pro quocunque

quod occidit. Et ista equivocacione plurimum laboratur.

Nam notum est ymacinanti polos mundi et axem super If tne , wor ' d
J a . r . J turned round

i5quem rotatur, quod alium modum movendi habet que- the other way,
libet pars orbis mota super orizontem nostrum, quam partswould rise

haberet movendo super eadem principia e converso; quia , and set

1 . . . . differently.

quelibet talis pars onretur nobis m situ quem vocamus

occidens, et paulative moveretur versus meridiem, quo-

20 usque advenerit ad situm quem vocamus oriens fixum.

Et proporcionaliter de partibus orbis motis sub orizonte.

Ideo philosophi, specificantes modum movendi celi 2 m Wc say that

tlie sky turns
partes sensui suo notas, ut sunt partes supra onzontem towards the

nostrum, vere dicunt quod celum movetur ab oriente x . NX ' st; 'J 1 ^

' " Antipodcs

25 in occidens, et antipodes nostri vere dicerent quod celum would say the

• , 1 contrarv; but

movetur econtra a situ quem nos vocamus occidens ad wnat V vc call

situm quem nos vocamus oriens; sed situs qui est nobis ''lS V: 81 . 1 ! 8 ,hc
~ ... . ... liast to them.

occidens diceretur illis oriens: et sic de situ orientali. Thus in both

T , , . , • , cascs the earth

Ideo utrobiquemovetur celum versus occidensrespectivum. moves

B 106" Unde non obest illud | quod ultimo concluditur. Aliter [' ow 3 a e r c d n s v ^ ) :5 e

tamen locuntur illi qui ponunt tales situs fixos, et West.
onerosius ac brigosius illis qui negant tales situs.

Ad 2 111 dicitur quod argumentum est verum, cum 2. it is true

quelibet pars orbis celestis corporee magna oritur et f tne skyis

35 occidit 2 m partes respectu diversorum. Et sic est tam "^ljlf a f nd

oriens quam occidens (intelligendo participialiter); et different

.,.. . . ... horizons;

sic quihbet punctus onens continue ent oriens vei t, ut nere oricnt
occidens, quia continue novo ortu et occassu instantaneo . and Occident

' " _ . . have the sense

respectu diversorum orizoncium. Et sic ortus successivus of participles.
40 componetur ex instantaneis. Nec sequitur ex argumento

i). _ptici r B. 14. notuj B. ; ib. ymagi 1 ' B. 17. p'n a B.

20 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

\\c have consesso conclusio deducta; quia, ut dictum est, in-

postalated^that telligitur quod pars celi supra orizontem nostrum mo-

whatever is V etur versus occidens ; quod est verum. Unde credo

above our , , . . , . , ..

horizon moves quod est dare oriens et occidens mmobile, m quorum
And^admft a primo astra habent ampliorem efficaciam, tanquam partes 5

fixed Eastern dextere, et in 2° habent efficaciam quasi partes sinistre:
and a Western . . ..,. .. TT ,

sphere, in each sicut et signa et astra appropnata llhs partibus. Unde

sta V rs 1C have e Aries, quorsumcunque volvatur, est in dextera parte celi,

peculiar et [Jbra in parte sinistra. Et sic conceditur quod qui-
efhcacv. . r . .... .

Aries wilfthus hbet punctus m equinocciah movetur contmue versus 10

theEast y and quemlibet alium. Nec frustra, etsi nunquam attingat

Libra in the iHum ; quia non hoc intenditur. Sicut ergo unus in-

Tims every sequens alium movetur versus eum, sed non contra

Zoduicmoves eum, sic est de punctis equinoccialis, qui moventur ut

towards cvery pon itur. Nec sequitur, si quilibet illorum punctorum i5
other, but never * . * * .

to meet; movetur reciproce versus quemcunque relicum, quod

i0 'move in°a n0t moventur contra se; quia solum mota motibus con-
contrary trariis versus eumdem situm moventur contra se: ut A

direction, , ,. „ .

as two bodies et B, mota super eamdem lineam rectam versus C situm,
^straifhnine 6 vel super lineas rectas angulariter concurrentes ad C 20

towards each s itum. Tales enim motus sunt incomplete contrarii. Nec
other. , . ,.

It is on video quomodo aliud msequens rehquum et nunquam

movement that sibi appropinquans movetur versus ipsum, nisi sit dare
we must s j tus nxos locantes mota quibus sit sic appropinquacio.

admit hxed \ /-> 1

directions. Non tamen dicitur quod ldem C movetur versus C vei 20

situm in quo est, quamvis inmediate ante hoc movebatur

versus illum situm, et inmediate post hoc sic movebitur:

quia nichil movetur versus aliud localiter, nisi a quo

. .,-, distat. Unde probabile est dicere quod aliquid movetur

.1. I he l x . . .,

consequence is versus aliud per hneam obhquam, attamen recedit ab 50
la ' Se hx e ed dmit eodem dum per tempus fiet continue distancius etc.
directions; to ^j ,m dicitur quod consequencia non valet. Unde
impossible, but concedo tales esse differencias fixas. Nec dubium quin
^equWalTnt^is" negantes tales esse differencias, sed [admittentes] quod
absurd. equivalet ac si tales essent, intricabunt seipsos, cum 35

I hus ^ , .

almost the nichil potest equivalere impossibili. Et sic conceditur

beTongs to^all q uoJ quilibet punctus in celo, preter aliquem 4°'' nomi-

the foiir points nat0 rum est australis, borealis, orientalis, et occidentalis;

ot the compass

at once. ut tangitur m argumento.

sa'me h modon Ad 4 m negatur argumentum; quia non solum per4°
may approach diversos motus, sed per eundem, contingit aliquid movere

1. ded c ta 15. 3^. aJmitlentes Jccs/.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 2 1

versus terminum fixum et recedere ab eodem, ut dictum to and recede

-. • , • ■ , tmm a aoal at

est proximo. Nec video quin, extendendo nomen motus tne S ame time.

(ut dictum est), concederetur quod musca moveretur And > '" 't e
\ " ^ _ case put, the

contra lanceam; non tamen ascendit. Ideo illi motus rty does not
., .. .- • indeed ascend

o sunt compossibiles, et non contrarn; sicut sunt ascensus, t _ ie | ance , s i, lce

et descensus. Ascensus enim dicit adquisicionem supe- that mean «

, . ... increase ot

B 106 11 rioritatis, et descensus adquisicionem inferioritatis, que distance from

, . • , , • • . the centre;

repugnat simul messe eidem subiecto pnmo et per se. Dut ; t ma y be

Nota tamen quod motum repcionis consequuntur multi said to move

10 motus, et multe quietes organorum. Ideo motus contra The"movement
, . • r .-\ of crawling is

navem eque velociter contrane motam non [estj continue made lip D ot -

precise in eodem situ. Unde differt motus musce contra man y motions

and rests.

lanceam a motu orbis inferioris contra superiorem m The movement
hoc quod alter primorum est violentus, sed neuter 2 orum violent, 1. e.
ijmotuum est violentus. Ymmo uterque illorum motuum a e ainst 8 r ?^ ty;
est per totum subiectum suum eiusdem racionis, et sic inferior sphere
non est de motu animalis repentis vel quomodolibet Again the
moventis se contra suum deferens; quia partes eiusdem m ° vern . ent ot "

' * r hoth spheres is

diversimode movebantur. Unde, ad cognoscendum ge- of like nature;

,. • • i»4. that of the fly

2oneraliter motus contranos, satis est quod sicut motus an d lance is
eiusdem generis propinqui, quorum species possunt suc- canu°' y ,
cessive inesse eidem subiecto primo et per se; sed movements are

, . , t^ •■ . • such as cannot

repugnat quod simul sic msint. De motibus autem in- coex i st , n tne

dividuis non est cura. Unde, 2 m Aristotelem, illi motus same subject.

' . Thev takc

25 causantur penes terminos ad quos vel terminos versus place where

, „ i their termini

quod contranos. Q_uamvis enim hor motus versus borream, are contr;uv

et Plato, sibi obvians, movendo contrarie versus austrum, l0 eac " otner -

moveantur ad eundem terminum, moventur sibi sub

differencias fixas contrarias. Ideo dicuntur motus con-

3otrarii; sicut Aristoteles vocat ventos contrarios qui

moventur differenter super eandem dyametrum ad diffe-

rencias oppositas. Nec obest quantumcunque locum Every place

, . ,. ., . • •» distant from

distantem a rehquo esse sibi contranum, quamvis sit ;inotrie r piace

quantitas; quia eeneralis racio formarum est quod sint is contrary, in
^_ . . . . . , so tar as tne

35 eiusdem generis propinqui qui non possunt simul et ' same body
, , . , . . • , , • cannot be m

semel, sed successive, adquiri eidem subiecto primo. Dotll at tne

Et sic omnia privative opposita vocat Aristoteles con- same time -

traria, quia sunt forme eiusdem generis, una per se et They are
,. , • ii * „* ,:^ privalive torms,

alia per reduccionem, qui mutuo se expeliunt; et sic ^ n j c b. mutually

40 contrariantur quecunque loca distancia. Aliquando autem exclude one.

^ 11 _ t _ ancther.

r<:stringitur contrarietas formarum ad racionem contrarie

9. r'pcois B. 11. no or ao^B: ib. est deest B. 3i. duce 1 = du-

pliciter.'' pro ditierenter B.

2 2 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

activitatis. Et talis non inest quantitatibus, cum non

sint de genere activorum. Loca autem, quamvis non

denominent formaliter corpora individua locari, sed

communia, tamen denominant efficienter corpora in-

dividua locari, causando ubicaciones formaliter denomi- 5

There is an nantes. Multiplicatum ergo potest simul esse in locis

^muftipiiabie contrariis,sicut etcorporeum non multiplicatum 2 m partes.

beings and Sed nichil potest simul et semel per se et primo esse

also tor matter, r . r .

that can be in locis contrarns. Et ex tstis patet quod sagitta mota

ditterempiaces; recte et vertigine movetur 2 ci motu in specie simul, 10
but not wholly qu j a m otus rectus contrariatur ei qui est econtra ad

and at the n . .... ...

same time. differenciam oppositam, et non llla circumduccio, sicut
patet ex descripcione motuum contrariorum superius
posita.
5 - Tn ? Ad s m neeatur areumentum. Nec sequitur mobile i5

argument is not ".?,.. . -

good. Because non moveri locahter, etsi maneat continue m eodem

movement "i? e. sUu '■> q iua preter motum localem quem consequitur

changeof place, adquisicio et deperdicio situs, est dare alium qui est

it does not *1 • , - , ,• j-rr •

loliow that hmitacio passiva ad mtendum versus aliam dinerenciam,

movement "i? e. s i ye mobile quiescat localiter, sive non ; et tali motu 20

tendency to m0 vetur lapis et quodlibet grave violentatum a situ
move, whether . . :

there is or is quem appetit continue versus deorsum. Nec est tahs

5 place 86 motus univoce velox cum motibus ponentibus mobile

This sort of appropinquare fixo, sicut sunt ascensus et descensus ;

movement has rr r 1 _ ....

not the same sicut forte non sunt univoce motus cum llhs. Et cum 20

a^"ascent°° tot modis dicitur unum oppositorum quot modis et
perhaps none x-eliquum, patet quod est dare quietes tot modis dictas

have the same; i » x- -1 t _ _ _

and there are istis motibus oppositas j Unde, sicut stat ldem alteran B 107"
manVsorts^as et quiescere localiter et econtra, sic stat idem per to-

there are tum m0 \eri localiter et quiescere localiter multis motibus 3o

movements. . ^

et multis qutetibus, sed non oppositis.
Rest does not Unde falsum est quod auiescere includit negacionem

imply no n 7 o

movement at omnis motus a quiescente, cum sufhcit ad quietem

denies one sort mobilis quod ipsum natum sit moveri tali specie motus

of movement at pro tempore pro quo non movetur illa specie: ut, si 35
a certain time; r r l ~i _ , ,•

if the earth terra naturahter pure descendit m vacuo vel medio

^d^escemf, ^t ° quocunque quantumlibet velociter, tunc ipsa perfecte

would rest quiescit a motu circulari vel motu violento contrario.
trom all other ^ . .

movements. Et sic, si corpus movetur, tunc quiescit, et non proprie
It anv body
moves, it rests,
but not vice
vcvsa.

u. mlti'" l'>. 17. q, II. 23. v'»« B. 2?. v' te B.

3o. Titnc quiescit. Because it has not all possible movements.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 23

e converso, cum deus potest . servare semper corpus a

motu proprio, sicut potest movere celum motu despari,

et facere ipsum per totum quiescere. Ex quo patet

quod quies est naturaliter prior motu tali, cum sit eius

5 perfeccio, gracia cuius habendi est actus ille incompletus,

quo usque veniatur ad motum perfectum. Nec oportet We must
, ..... . . . neither admit

credere opimoni wulgan, neganti tales motus ; quia

wulgus non concipit motum et quietem nisi localem,

propter famositatem. Unde laicus negaret tale alteratum

lovel augmentatum, et quietem localiter moveri; nec per-

cipit quod alteracio et alteracio sunt species motus

Sentencia ergo wulgi est vera, cum sit naturaliter inna- nor denv as

■ 1 j • 1 , • i- i-i , • talse the

tum tllis sic cognoscere; sed aliter amphant philosophi com.mon

terminos motus quam plebei. Nec omnes philosophi ex- °P inion > tnat
t r r f admits onlv

i.stendunt nomen motus ad tantum ut iam extenditur, change of place
sed solum illi qui innituntur salvare motus proprios movement;
planetarum. th * icamed and

r , the unlearned

Unde Alpetragius, negans tales motus, putando sal- use the word

, . in a different

vare omnes expenenctas per unum motum ab oriente sense.
20 in occidens, sed quod orbes inferiores tardantur, racione inere is an

. . . . . opimon that

cuius retardacionis fiunt coniuncciones et opposiciones, denies that the

incidit in hoc inconveniens quod omnes planete de- any movement

scriberent orbes parallelos polis mundi; et sic planete oftheir own,
f ' ' . l hut are merelv

non moverentur in circulo obliquo, causando estatem siower than the
, ,. .... superior sphere.

2d et hyemem, echpses et generaciones tah modo quo But this will
experiencia docet fieri ab illis; quia motu primi mobilis, f n .° theti rti

quantum in se est, non reciperetur 2' 11 circulum non planets would

1,1 ,• ,• , ... describe orbits

paralielum poiis mundi, sed motus partis orbis super parallel with

polos declinantes a polo mundi, facit illam partem the equator, not

r l ' r obiique, as they

"0 declinare ab austro in boream, et econtra. Ut, ymagi- do.

, , , .... , For instance,

nato quou sol nunc sit sub equinocciali, et solum ,] ie sun> heing

moveatur raptu primi mobilis, non est racio assienanda ul V bra ' ,Y" ulJ
1 ' . ... leave the

quo unquam declinabit ab equinocciali; sed quandoque ecliptic and noi
foret sol extra quodlibet 12 signorum; ut per tempus until the next
35 totum quo exierit a Libra quo usque redeat ad Libram. ve;ir at tnc

^ t n same time.

Et hoc certum est recte ymaginanti.

18. alpetgio B. 35. _pte m prn per tempus totum B.

18. I can hnd no name at all answering to Alpetragius.
There is, however, a certain Albricus, who died in 1220, accord-
ing to Franklin's Dictionarv. Some words are probably

wanting in this sentence; but as the sense is clear enough, it
may be merely an ellipse.

24 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

We should, Melius ergo est extendere nomen motus ad omnem

therefore, cnil .... . , .. . ....

movement hmitacionem passivam ab aho; racione cuius hmita-
every change c i on j s disnariter se habet quo ad situm, qualitative

produced ln f _ n ...

one body by vel quantitative. Et isto modo dicunt philosophi intel-

another, which ... _ ....

makes it in any hgencias moveri a Deo, tanquam amato et desiderato, .
f V om l \vhaf _t ae ^ rnovendum active suos orbes: quod si non facerent,

was. cum veris paribus que iam ponuntur, dependerent de

Thus it is said , ., ...... , _ .

that bonitate accidentali, displicendo Deo. Et breviter omnis

are^moved^bv creatura rnovetur sic a Deo, saltem per tempus, in-
God to give veterascendo, perficiendo in bonitate accidentali, vel 10

motion to their , r- • , , • , • , -, , •

spheres. dehciendo; et tah motu dicunt philosophi omne movens

So are all phisicum communicans in materia cum suo motu
creatures c

moved by God, quod tangit in movendo, moveri; quia non dubium
in every change • , , . , . ... . , . _ ,,

thafthey quin omne tale | continue debihtatur m agendo, et SICB107 6

undergo. continue deperdit qualitatem. Non tamen oportet i5
In this sense . . . . . .

it is said that quod intelligencia. ut sic, adquirat continue successive
every molor is ,. -.- , ... . r . .

moved by the quahtatem. Nec oportet quod cahdum caleraciendo

to^ches^i^e fr^8 e ^ at 2 ™ aliquam eius partem ; nec oportet motum

friction changes ab obiecto adquirere continue successive aliam quali-
it, diminishing . . , c ~ ■ , ,. , -,, , • ,

its power. tatem; sed suthcit quod limitetur ab 1II0 ad accident- 20

aliter eliciendum actum vel servandum, racione cuius

est melius vel peius, vel aliter denominatum quo ad

acquirendum 3™ gradum materie motus quam foret

subducto limitante ad taliter apprehendendum.

Yetthereisno Unde vane ponunt aliqui actus anime esse qualitates, -'^

necessity for 1 ~ . .

the ageht to propter hoc quod ad illas est motus. Ad illos enim

acquirc ,

anynew non est motus tanquam ad per se terminos, quamvis

qual ii y iul+% necessario omne elicitivum actus sit mobile, sicut nec

enough that lt _ '

is determined est motus ad movere intellective; nec moverentur talia
to produce proprie, sed extensive, loquendo de motu. Quod patet 3o

or redintegrate ex j 10C q UOt j cosnitivum movetur continue ab obiecto,
an act. .

There is a dum non continue noviter recipit speciem vel actum ab

movcment in . .

the mind that co. Ideo motvts quo movetur est j^ermanens, et non
e b C .th-v are*' cons i s tit in successione, quamvis, pro illo instanti quo

not on that intendit elicere actum, vel generabit speciem vel servabit 35
account . . , . . , ,

qualities. speciem aut habitum pnus receptum. Ideo tunc mce-

The perunt tam motus instantaneus quam permanens. Unde,

movemcnt — r _ r •

either of
generation or

redintegration 7- v "'" ''• -' 2 - rnoverit in ma>g. B. 35. cpit in marg. K; ib.

35. Servabit. 1 have used the word redintegrate, because
Wyclif seems to allude to an idea that, by a given act, is not
generated but merely recalled, or as the moderns would say,
redintegrated, though the sense is perhaps somewhat different.

ot
s

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 25

cum non sit possibile talem actum elicitum esse nisi — exists only

, ,. ... • at llie

vel generetur vel servetur quahtas lilo actu, non mirum i ns tant when

si auctores dicunt omne elicitivum actus esse mobile i s l e?i ci ted .
(subaudi motu communiter dicto, et non motu proprie
5 dicto).

Et si queratur de velocitate talium motuum, dicitur it may be

,. . , asked: What is

quod aliqui sunt non veloces cum sunt permanentes, t he rapidity of

et alii successivi sunt veloces; quod mensuratur com- t^enlnThis
muniter penes iineas vel materias quas adquirent sua sense?

,.,.„.,, . .,,• • Some have no

iomobilia. 2 m lllos motus, si moverentur, lliis non impe- swittness,
ditis. Sed videtur michi quod pari evidencia omne ot am | m fg e;
mobile violentatum continue existendo in eodem situ swiftness is

, , . , . , measured by

multum velociter moveretur et breviter; quod omne tne space they
mobile eque velociter moveretur sicut posset moveri in th ™™]£ P* s n s t
iSvacuo vel in pleno, cum omnibus aliis sequentibus ex hindered.

• • • * n • nlo l J ■ • A bodv that *

istis. Nam si A motum contra B m 2" 10 tardius tpso kept in the
B, intendatur motum suum quousque moveatur in 2P 10 ^"afns^its

velocius ipso B uniformiter moto, pro instanti medio natural

, . , . „ • , tendencv is thus

movebitur eque velociter cum B; et tunc, contmuando ; n m0 vement,
20 illum gradum motus, non mutaret situm suum. Cum f m r ^ Yaster
ergo omne mobile naturale impeditur ne tam velociter and faster

. ■ 1 j ■ 1 • were there no

moveat se sicut potest, videtur quod sic velociter mo- im pe diment.
vetur cum impeditum non impedit a velocitate motus,
ut dicit responsio. Ideo videtur michi probabile quod
25 tales motus locales versus aliquos terminos tixos per
quos non acceditur appropinquando illis, non sunt
veloces, quamvis per accidens taliter sint spacia illis
descripta.

Ad 6 m dicitur quod stat motus impedire se mutuo 6. Ditferent

, „ * ' . ... , coexistent

3o quo ad eftectus extnnsecos, causatos a motibus, sed movem ents
non quo ad velocitatem vel tarditatem illorum mo- ^^"rn^i
B io8 B tuum; I quia, quocunque motu signato, si foret velocior effects caused

, ' . ' x r . , • by them, not

vel tardior, tunc non foret ldem motus m numero, eo me i r respective

quod vel variaretur materia motus, vel tempus, vel jf^y^d

35 utrumque. Et per consequens non impediret vel im- they would no

pediretur; quia non esset. Motus tamen communes "same

possunt se mutus impedire. Unde, pro materia argu- mn d e m rove'd bUt

menti videtur michi quod non propter equales motus If the sun

,. , ., ... . went backwards

contra se tmpeditur mobile moven. Ut, ymaginato as f ast as j ts
40 quod sol innitatur moveri tantum motu proprio,
quantum orbis rapiens nititur movere ipsum contra

i3. b<" R.

26 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

sphere went occidens, ita quod per A tempus sit in meridiano

would^remain nostro ; ego non video quin uterque illorum foret mo-

seemingly tus; sed non uterque velox vel tardus. quamvis valde

motionles;-. . ... .... . .

Both sphere celenter descnberetur circulus m orbe supenon utroque
move Un but°we d istorum. Motus tamen proprio moveretur sol velociter 5
could not caii a 5 austro in boream, vel econtra. Ideo dicunt aliqui

that movement , ........

properly swift. quod non est possibile orbem mieriorem moveri contra
B ould rnove superiorem super eosdem polos, ita quod continue

lVom north to m aneat idem punctus in eodem situ, et motus continue
south with an , . ... ,

apparent Jocahter. Illud tamen non placet michi, eo quod tunc 10

movement diceretur sol habere motum ab austro in boream, vel

Some ctenv

that movement econtra, et non ab occidente in oriens. Videtur ergo
is possihle in a . ... ....

contrary quod motus, qui est passio, sit prior quocunque mobili,

direction^o thc q uarn mo tus formaliter successivus, qui est velox vel

But then the tardus; quia si aliquid movetur illo motu, ipsum limi- i5
sun vvould have . ,. , . . ,

a real tatur et patitur se tahter denominari quo ad quantitatem

movement from j qua li tatem . et non econtra.
south to noith, t '

not from vvest Ideo non est concedendurn quod iste motus, qui tam
We cannot est velox, erit non velox per eius intensionem; vel
admit me a nt a econtra tnotus non velox erit velox; quia isti motus 20

having a sunt diversorum racionem, cum totum genus unius
certain rapidity . , . „ . . , • , •

would, if more presupponit totum genus altenus. Et lta videtur michi

intense, have quotl s icut motus qui est nisus ab oriente in occidens

none. " > "

Thus 1 think contrariatur nisui ab occidente in oriens, sic motus

that eastvvard . , . . , . ...

and westvvard successivus ab oriente m occidens contranatur motui 2?

tendencies successivo possibili qui dicit formaliter adquisicionem.
contradict each r t _ t

other. Ymaginabile tamen est motus circulares esse, qui si

And vve can . , c „ j

tancv circular possent successive messe celo, essent contrarn. bed
motions that nu ni sex m otuum localium rectorum est motus circu-

vvould he ....

contrary if they laris contrarius; ut non ascensui vel descensioni, cuius- 3o

existed in the ,. ,

sky; but nonc modi sunt motus a borea m austrum, et econtra; nec

oi the si\ motui recto a dextro in sinistrum vel econtra, ut sunt
movements — .

ascension, motus ab oriente in occidens, et econtra; ut motui
are contrary recto ab ante ad retro et econtra, ut motus a principio

to thc circular fj ancr i versus Capricornum, vel econtra; eo quod 35

movcment. r _ t

quilibet istorum motuum compatitur secum per totum

motum circularem ; et sic de motibus circularibus

compacientibus se in eodem subiecto, dum non directe

fuerit versus differencias oppositas.

One thing is Suflicit ergo philosopho quod celum per totum sit 40

certain; in the exemptum ab omni violencia; ex quo verisimile est
sky there is ' .... . .

nothing violent. quod tam orbis inferior quam orbis superior descnberet

tam celeriter circulum sicut modo, subducto alterutro

illorum motuum Ideo non est de illis, sicut cst in casu

CAP. IX. LOGTCA. 2"]

Zenonis, in quo ponitur spacium recte moveri contra
mobile motum.

Ulterius concediturquod solfmotusl motu proprio versus We may admit

• • • • tlint tlic snn

oriens, tardatur attingere oriens; et sic de alns mirabi- moving

B 108'' libus conclusionibus sequentibus. | Si tamen motuproprie ^ 18 ^™^ by

dicto precise moveretur versus oriens, tunc non sic tar- movement,

daretur; quia moveretur 2 m aliam porcionem circuli reaching the

versus oriens. eaSt; on " d S °

Ulterius conceditur quod descripcio talis non est Also that the

...... tvt orbit dcscribed

iomotus, sed unum accidentaliter habens motum. Mec on the ce lestiai

quelibet adquisicio situs est motus, cum stat aliquod ^.^^Xt

subito adquirere vel deperdere situm per continuacionem a thing that

.... . • i moves.

vel discontinuacionem partis quantitative; ut patet de
augmentato vel diminuto, de multiplicato, vel de de-
i5 multiplicato. Motus ergo qui est limitacio passiva etc. Movement, so
est passio: sed motus formaliter successivus et velox tar . as >*. ls
videtur michi non esse passio ; sed motus accidentis passion; not

... ... ,. . movement witli

passioms, ut motus localis proprie dictus dictt suum actual change

mobile. vel aliam partem primo moveri localiter, et R in ' p ^ e s e that

20 per consequens ipsum, vel aliquam eius partem prius the subject or

fuisse in situ in quo post non est per successivam et ' 0C p C u P j es a

parcialem situs adquisicionem, ad quam sequitur ad- P la< * ^ >t

quisicio ubicacionis. Ideo dicit commentator quod com- occupy betoro.
n , . rr . ., , - • • Averrhoos savs

ponitur ex multts afhrmacionibus et multis negacioni- that it is ma a e
25bus; quia tales presupponuntur adesse tanquam prin- up fil ° m "^
cipiantes, sed non quantitative componentes, cum sit and negations.
forma simplex.

Sed diligenter notandum quod motus quandoque 'Movement' is

. , . .. • sometimes

sumitur agregative pro multis motibus agregatis, eciam co n cct i ve , and

3o discontinuis, vel quo ad tempus vel quo ad subiectum ; ^ e ™ m 5

sive sint uriius speciei, sive sint disparium specierum:

et illo modo dictum est progressionem esse motum

compositum. Ouandoque autem sumitur simpliciter pro sometimes it
r . ,., ........ . means a

motu cuius quehbet pars divisibihs vere continuatur m0V ement of

35 cum reliqua et est eiusdem racionis, ut motus puncti wh ; ^h each

in equinocciali. Primo modo est augmentacio motus, sequel to the

. . other.

et torte omnis motus citra velocissimum.

Tercio principaliter dividitur motus2 m suas passiones, Movement

. . i. -c ■ is either

racione tempons mensurantis; ut ahquis est unirormis un j t01 - m or

40 et aliquis difFormis; et uterque subdividitur quo ad mij , x ( ;' l l m d i j 1 its

subiectum et quo ad temnus. Quo ad subiectum est snbject ii each
^ part of the

3. motus deest B. 3q. coniormis B.

28 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

thing moved motus uniformis, quando quelibet pars eius quantitativa

vclocity;' q uo ad molem est eque velox sicut aliqua talis, sicut est

de motu lineari per equinoccialem circulum subiectato.

varied in its Et dicitur difformis quo ad subiectum, quando una

subject, lf one e j us p ars quantitativa 2 m molem est reliqua tali velocior, 5

part moves 11 ... " . -

faster; ut est de motu colubri. Dicitur autem motus uniformis

time ifthe q uo a d tempus, quando quelibet pars quantitativa quo

velocity is the a j successionem, que non est pars quo ad molem, est

same at everv ' n * " '

partoftime; eque velox ut aliqua talis; sicut est de toto motu primi
velocity is celi. Sed difformis dicitur quo ad tempus, quando una 10
greater or less temporis pars successiva est reliqua parte successiva

111 tlie ditlerent ... . n r

parts of time. subiecti primo moti velocior; ut motus naturales gravium
These temporal et levium, qui velocitantur in fine. Omne autem suc-

and quantitative ce ssivum extensum habet 2 ces partes quantitativas, sicut
parts are equal . . . "

to the whole 2 cem quantitatem ; scilicet quo ad molem et quo adir

but the first are tempus. Et conveniunt iste partes in hoc quod utraque

equal in subiective, qua pars, est minor suo toto; ut medietas
quantitv, and _ ' n r » _ »

the second in successiva motus est par toti motui et toti subiecto

duration. m , ... m

2 m molem, et quantumlibet parva pars motus*2 m mo-
lem est equalis toti motui quo ad duracionem; et sic 20
iste equalitates et inequalitates dicunter equivoce.
A humble Humilis tamen logicus, non | querens apparenciam B 109"

grin?^ha™tne sophisticam, concederet quod infinitum parva pars
part is equai to quantitativa motus et suum totum sunt equalia, et tamen

and yet less n . . l

than the whole. totum illud est quantumhbet maius sua llla parte. Unde, 2?
tocall temporal propter istas equivocas magnitudines distingwendas,
parts duranon, vocatur una pars quo ad successionem vel diuturni-

and . . . .

quantitative, tatem : et eius magnitudo vocatur dmturnitas. Et alia

vocatur pars quo ad molem ; et eius magnitudo propter

Magnitude, famositatem vocatur simpliciter magnitudo motus. Magni- 3o

1 to°quantity, L " tudo enim competit methaphoiice magnitudini corporee,

might.be , sicut multitudo convenit numero. Aliter enim dicit
lnconvementlv ...

appiied to tinie. habens hoc pro mconvenienti palam sequi quod quehbet
movement^may pars celi ; eciam indivisibilis, esset quantumlibet magna,

be uniform and qu j a durative equalis suo toti : quod equivocans sine??

vaned trom f * \ l

different points inconvenienti concederet. Patet eciam quod motus um-

the^movemem formis est quantumlibet difformis, et e converso. Nam

oftheskyand m otus celi est uniformis, quo ad tempus, et difformis
a falling stone. . ' ....

Another quo ad subiectum, et motus gravis est dmormis quo

varied a ^ tempus et uniformis quo ad subiectum. 40

movements: Sed motuum difformium est ulterior divisio. Nam

a) utii/oim/y . , ,. ..~.

aliquis est uniformiter dtftormis, et ahus diftormiter

6. coluri IJ. 17. 9" B. 29. / pro est B.

CAP. IX. I.OGICA. 29

difformis. Et hoc dupliciter: vel quo ad subiectum, vel and b) vuriabiy

ad tempus. Dicitur autem motus uniformiter difformis xhis too" is

quo ad subiectum, quando cuiuslibet partis sue quan- ^J^^f^thc

titative quo ad molem gradus intensissimus tante excedit subjeci or
, . .. ,. . ,. ,. ,- (2) thc time.

n gradum eius medium, quante ahcuius tahs partis equalis l7) ,, It ,„

sxadus intensissimus excedit gradum eius medium. Et "?'^ m, . y u-

talis motus simpliciter uniformiter difformes non mo- subject;

ventur nisi lineariter. Nam mota spera, centro eius either

,., . . . . absolutely, as

quiescente, quehbet eius semidyameter sic moveretur: Ihe diameter of

iosed de qualibet linea secante dyametros difformiter ^ 1 ^™/
mota foret falsum quod uniformiter difformiter move- sphere;'
retur. Et cum motus corporum secuntur in velocitate
motus suarum linearum et superficierum, patet quod
partes quantitative talium sperarum obliquate valde

i5 diversificantur in difformitatibus suorum motuum. Est
ergo corpus dare uniformiter difformiter motum 2 m quid,
quando cuiuslibet sue partis quantitative gradus inten-
sissimus tantum excedit gradum eius medium quante
alicuius sue partis equalis et simillime in figura et or partially, as

20 posicione gradus intensissimus excedit gradum eius w hich certain
medium: cuiusmodi sunt corpora quorum partes lineares ,1Ilc tnL movc
uniformiter difformiter moventur. Sed uniformiter diftor- (2) Unjformly

. . .... . varied in time,

mis motus quo ad tempus est cuius cuiushbet partis wnfin tne

quantitative quo ad successionem gradus eius intensissi- ^jfj",^

23 mus tante excederet ^radum eius medium, quante mean vejocity
... ,. . "" ,. , . ■ r.as much in one

ahcuius tahs partis equahs gradus mtensissimus excedit qua ntirative

eradum eius medium. Est autem motus difformiter P art a j; m an )'

difformis quo ad subiectum vel tempus motus difformis

cuius difformitas est difformis. Potest autem dici quod b) a) Variably

,.„, . ,. -r . , 1 ■ varied in the

3o motus difiormiter difiormis, tam quo ad subiectum su bject ; (2) in

quam quo ad tempus, est dupliciter; vel sic quod timc -

quelibet eius pars quantitativa continue magna sit dif- Herc there can

B ioo b formis, vel sic quod quotlibet eius partes sint | difformes; modes of

et hoc contingit infinitis modis variari. Et sicut ex v a a nd :1t n °J v ;

^parte motus quo ad molem, et parte motus quo ad species 01

„ . • movement can

tempus potest fieri pars motus ex utnsque composita, be found

ita ex motu difformi quo ad tempus et motu difformi indefinitely.
quo ad subiectum et quo ad tempus; et ita mixtim in
aliis divisionibus.

40 Sed ista dicta consecuntur tria dubia hic breviter Three

pertractanda. Primum, Si possibile est motum vel tale qiK

iy. fihme U.

30 JOHANNIS WYCI.IK CAP. IX.

I. will bc dealt successivum esse. 2 m : Si continuum componitur ex non

next chapter. quantis, et 3 111 : Penes quid ab effectu possunt regulariter

attendi velocitates motuum. Primum tangetur proximo

capitulo,, supponendo talia successiva esse et ampliando

verba de presenti. quantum oportet, loquendo de suc- 3

cessivis.

Question II: Pro 2° argumentatur de punctis que requiruntur

continuous aa " esse Hnee, tanquam priores naturaliter toto genere

quantity is h nee . Ergo sunt cause linee, et non extrinsece; ereo
made up of . D .

points. ' intrinsece et per consequens partes. Ahter enim omnes 10
naturaHy S prior partes illius continui forent divisibiles; et tamen non
rohnes; so haberent partes nec partem, ut prius deductum est. Et

tnev cause . r .

them, and sic concludendum esset quod iste partes componunt
intrinsically ; so ■ . • .

ihey are parts et causant se tpsas, et sunt priores et postenores

ot tlie lincs. 2 ra infinitos gradus quam ipsemet sunt. Nec valet dicere i5
As the instant quod non omnia sunt danda, ut alibi dictum est; nec
^oVtime^and & est rnaior racio quare instans est principiurn temporis

unity of j pso p r ius, et requisitum ad suum esse, sicut et unitas
number, so is r ' ^

the point the se habet ad numefum, quin per tdem punctus sic se

PI the Ci Cn C e° f habet ad lineam. 20

2. If not, all Similiter: aliter contingeret auferri punctum a linea
a iine P could 'be continuata cum alia, non plus auferendo; et per idem

successivety quemlibet punctum linee contineit auferri, et sic omnes,
taken trom lt, n r & ' . ....

without cum hoc quod maneat eadem linea; et sic quthbet

s ^ 01 ]^" 1 ^ 8 lts punctus linee per accidens continuat unam eius partem 25

Thns every cum a ha. Sed cum punctus sitaccidens, oportet [utl aliquod
point would be . ' , . ,

an accident as eius subiectum adequatum per se subiectat tales de-

substance ^in nominaciones quales punctus accidentaliter recipit; ut
which it exists. m0 veri, quiescere etc. Substancia ergo per se subiectans

liut this is ' l . ...

impossible. punctum contmuantem partes hnee per se pnnctpiat 3o
illam lineam ; et cum illa non possunt esse sine tali
puncto, patet quod nullus punctus potest auferri a
linea, eadem manente ; quia sic contingeret corrumpere
omnem punctum corporeitatis dande, servando illam.
Continuatis ergo duabus pyramidibus, erunt puncta35
conalia immediata.

3. There musi Similiter de inmediacione ubicacionum vel situum
C 'poinis' 1 ^ indivisibilium, patet quod est dare tales inmediatas.

immediate, i. e. N am est dare duo puncta inmediata, ut patet de cor-

ha\ mg no ' r

space between ponbus tangentibus se 2™ puncta. Sicut ergo talia 4')

'uvobodks puncta sunt inmediata, sic ubicaciones vcl situaciones

1 - ut Jecst !'».

CAP. IX. LOGIGA. 3 l

eorum sunt inmediate. Et, cum illi situs manent ex- toucn eacn

nunctantes alia puncta, patet quod quandocunque alter otner in ° ne

i . r r . ... pomt only,

eorum" erit occupatus aliquo punctali intra corpus, we have t\\o
,. •• . . ,• •, • • ,• . . distinct points

rehquus ent occupatus punctali sibi inmediato; et per tnat toucn eacll

5 idem sequitur quod corpus pyramidis tangens medium t i° tne o ' i

punctum B superficici plane eque distantis superficiei a pyramid is

orizontes, est superior quam B, cum tota pyramis per p po int B^of a°

totum sit supra B; et per idem, iacente illa pyramide surfacc, its top

r ' f i W1 " ^ c abovc

super B planum, contingit ponere punctum conalem B ; the top ot
ioalterius pyramidis super primam pyramidem, et sic in pyramid^maj

infinitum; ita quod ad omnem punctum linee erecte be placed

' . ~ r . above its top.

B iio a super medium punctum B sit conus umus pyra- and so on, till

• .. a line is

mtdts. formed.

Similiter de instantibus; videtur quod erunt inme- +. There musi

. ,. • ■ , i , • be immediatc

i.idiata, quta est dare duo, quorum unum durabit usque instants ; iov

ad B instans exclusive, et aliud durabit usque ad illud 'J two Dein ? s

' " last, one till

instans inclusive, et non ultra. Et certum est quod est the instant B

, ,• , , • t. exclusivelv,

dare quandiu utrumque durabit ; quia ahter non esset anct tne ther

dare quam senex aliquis erit, aut quam diuturnum inclusively, the

" n . n . .. . latter will last

2o erit aliquod successivum. Et sic, demtis alns supenus longer.

tactis, certum est quod unum durabit diucius vel ultra

reliquum per unum instans; quia aliter non essem senior

quam ante fui, cum ante fui ita senex precise sicut

homo qui incepit esse pro primo instanti mei, et nunc

25 desinit esse. Et idem sequitur, si continue intendam Thc samc

n ' . consequence

motum meum vel actum merendt, et stem sub gradu flows from
actus quem nunc habeo, et uno alio merente exclusive merit '

usque ad hoc instans, et nunc decedente. Deus enim exclusiyeiy or
. . . . ... mchisivelv

scit tales premiare proporcionaliter ad intensissimos up to a given

3o gradus suorum meritorum; quia aliter noceret homini can remunerate

quod continuasset actum bonum, cum plus premiaretur one mstant of
n ..... ment.

merendo solum 2 a medietate sut actus meritoru. Deus

ergo premiabit quemcunque 2 m intensissimum gradum

sui meriti, si non ponat obicem.

35 Et conformiter videtur quod contineit unum dare 5 - Let us ,

.... . suppose the

ultra B mstans per indivisibile, ut talem ventatem: A truth: A

• . »■ /-. , r^ toitches somc

tangit aliquem punctian C, posito quod C sit nomen « / w / ,,/ c.

commune ad primam medietatem dati possibilis, et ad C si^iiiivin- ihe

r . .... nrst hall ot

quamlibet partem imparem 2 C medietatts dtvtse contra a line and all

40 medium punctum; et quod A in B instanti primo divisions ol the

second halt;

c ^,

1—2. exptates B. 5. ta n8 B. 20. dem 1 '' B. 21. et certuni B.

20. zfte pro et stem B.

32 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

and that A gets deveniat ad mcdium punctum, continuando uniformiter
the hrst^halHn motum suum super omnes partes proporcionales 2° me-

the instant B: dietatis: tunc patet quod A tangere C manebit usque

then the . l . n ,. ° _ . . ^

proposition will ad B mstans, et mmediate post B mstans erit : ergo

immediatdy duracio sua erit inmediata B instanti, ante et post; 5 -
before B, at'B, et per Jdem notest Deus proporcionare infinita taliter

and r , . ... . ,.

immediately se extendencia per descnpciones situum punctuahum

inmediatorum vel quomodolibet aliter.

There are also Similiter est dare motus indivisibiles quo ad dura-
indivisible .... , - ,„

movements; cionem mmediate succedentes; ergo et mensuras mstan- IO
also'ind e iv e isib?e taneas, ipsos mensurantes. Antecedens patet de divisioni-

instants to Dus superiicierum inmediatarum in corporibus contiguis
measure tliem . r . . ,. .

by. dividendis continue; ut, posito quod A dividens pnmo,

divide two dividat superficiem B aeris, et post superficiem inme-

contiguous diatam C aque: patet quod dividentur distinctis divi- i:>
surfaces, v. g. . . r _ . . .

air and water, siombus, pan endencia qua aliqua superncies dividetur

l two distmct 6 appropriata divisione. Et constat, cum divisio ponit

divisions, dividi aliquid de presenti, quod est dare instancia in-

theretore ciii . . . ...

indivisible mediata in quibus erit ita quod hoc dividens dividit

m one™ urface m i stam superficiem. Aliter enim dividens divideret quot- 20
to another. libet superficies quas nunquam tangeret, ut infimam

And the *■

division of superficiam B pro illo instanti in quo tanget C. Et

ta e ke Cl place S at nunquam tangeret illam, nisi forte in instanti inmediate

separate precedente; sicut tota divisio B terminabitur inclusive

1 n st i n t s

ad illud instans in quo infima eius superficies dividetur, a5

cum continue usque ad illud instans manebit, et non

This argument | n [[[ ye \ nost iH u d propter nisum agentis. Et idem
holds in many . ' . r r . ° . .

othcr cases," sequitur de luminibus et quantitatibus qui mnovabuntur

v. g. in the subito pro quolibet instanti istius hore 2 m se tota, dc

hypothesis pyramide circumrotata super multitudine punctorum 3o
that were (>od r - . ,. , _.

successiveiy per se servatorum sine hnea; ut posito quod Deus

and^e-create annichilet Sortem, et post vivificet illum, et 3 adnichilet,

the same e t sic sine fine, patet quod, subductis omnibus motibus

mdividual , p • ■

eternaiiy, preter tales, foret tempus; quia pnus et postenus suc-

th of S m C e C dfa S te n cessivum; et cum tempus se habet ad divisibilitatem 35

creations and s i cut motus et eius materia, patet quod illud tempus
annihilations ••

would be time. componetur ex mstantibus.

Note that J7 t hi c m iror quare theologi admittunt casum ultimum,

theologians l T ^

admit the et tamen dicunt quod Deus non potest aurerre punctum

tlnsTiy^lliheMs, a linca | nisi addiderit alium, nec continuare duas B 110

and are yet so Hneas ad invicem, nisi corrumpendo puncta extremalia
inconsistent as v x

to dcny that.

11. andj B i5. d v l B 28. Imibri B, J8. ca"'ulti"

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 33

et generando terminum communem, cum summe libere He could take

,■ • , •,-, .one point from

contradictone agit ad extra; et quihbet punctus potest a |j ne w ithout
per se esse dependens ab alio. adding another.

Similiter, ex modo loquendi de difFormitate motuum 6 - Again;

7 . . eveiy umiormlv

5 quo ad tempus, patet idem. Nam motus uniformiter vaned motion
.•rr . • , ,. • , , must include

difformis, m quantum tahs, terminatur ad gradum tne degree of

inclusive; quia aliter non esset dare gradum eis inten- mtensityat

' ~ . ^ which u

sissimus vel medium, et per consequens non esset de- arrives.

scriptibilis aliqua descripcione; quia dicere quod gradus

ioad quem terminatur exclusive, qui non est in mobili,

mensurat eius velocitatem vel uniformitatem, est plana

contradiccio, cum medium requirat extrema illius cuius

est medium. Et dicere quod gradus medius, qui non est

extremum vel terminus illius motus, est plane de-

i? mencie.

Gradus ergo medius motus uniformiter diftbrmis Thus, when

quo ad tempus. erit gradus utriusque medietatis suc- halfits

cessive; quia aliter non continuaret unam medietatem mtensity, there

' ." . . . . musi be thc

latitudinis cum alia. Continua enim sunt talia quorum same degree
, . u„ c • • ot' intensitv ior

20 ultima sunt unum : ut agregatum ex 2 DUS termims con- ti ie end ofthe

tinuatorum est unum commune utrique continuatorum first and the

n p _ beginnmg ot

2 m partes eius. Nichil enim continuat primo aliud cum the second half.

.. • • r • •,,• , • Otherwisc

alio, nisi ruent llhus quod continuat; ut punctus non t | ie movement

est terminus communis lineis ipso continuatis, nisi sit w ™L d tin 1 ° e j be

25 punctus utriusque illorum. Et ita, generaliter loquendo

de continuacione, terminacione et velocitate successivo-

rum incidit homo, velit, nolit, in istam sentenciam.

Sic enim ponunt auctores quod habitantes sub polis ,. Il . lu: : tra ' l " ll 1 "'
r ^ _ r this by thc tact

zodiaci habent duos dies in anno, in quorum uno that at thc

3o habent instans pro nocte, et in altero instans pro die, i s once a year

emereentibus illis subito ex siqnis. Et illud plane patet a mght, and
f p . once a day,

ex hoc quod sol, describendo tropicum estiwum, solum of but one

per instans tanget zodiacum fixum illo die; et cum duration.

zodiacus fixus sit orizon habitantibus sub circulo artico,
33sequitur quod solum per instans deficit sol in illa die

ab existencia supraorizontaliter habitancium ; et ita per

idem instans vel agregatum ex paucis instantibus, erit

illis nox. Supponatur enim |definicio] quid nominis ter-

minorum, modo quo auctores locuntur.
40 Similiter, ut credo, nullus theologus negaret quin 7 ahsolute]v'

Deus de potencia absoluta potest facere substanciam speaking make

a substance of

the size of a

poinl :

29. }o ci li. 32. fpicu B. 38. definicio deest B.

34 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

punctalem, vel condensando, vel noviter causando. vel

3" faciendo spiritum esse in situ punctali et annichilando

omnem aliam creaturam preter talem spiritum servatum

immotum; et tunc patet quod punctualitas vel punctus,

que est substancia huiusmodi esse punctalis, est actus 5

positivus [in] illa substancia, sive sit separabile sive

and He can inseparabile. Punctus ergo potest esse. Nec dubium

sev^a" of^such quin, si Deus potest unum punctale producere, potest

points so as to et quodlibet iuxtaponere. Nec dubium quin situs essent

touch each ^ , . . . . , .

other. correspondenter mxtapositi, cum situs sit subiectum io
And thus out situari. Et ultra patet quod Deus potest ex talibus non
inextended quantis facere unum quantum : quod sic ostenditur

substances, an argumento ad hominem. Creet Deus ad omnem situm
extended . .. , ,

substance punctalem mundi unam substanciam punctalem, et

"suPDoseThat 2 ' annichilet post omnem substanciam continuam, servando i3
God created punctales substancias inmotas; et patet quod Deus est

such substances r ,, , .... ...

in every point adhuc per tantum locum sicut tuit rn pnncipio, et per

and SP then consequens est tantus locus; vel saltem contingit tantum

annihilated locum fieri ex illis punctalibus, sicut prius. Aliter enim

all continued ... , _ i- „

substance. non esset distancia, nec punctuale tiuens super alia 20
remaiiTas 1 '» punctualia posset moveri localiter; ut iste globus suc-

was, and the cessive circumductus, causaret duracionem successivam.
things in space _ .... .

also; Posito ergo quocunque tah accidente continuo, oportet

ponere subiectum eius continuum, et illud esset com-

positum ex punctalibus, quia illa forent eius principia 25

Andifthisis intrinseca. Nec dubito quin, admisso hoc pro possi-Bm a

1 defy S a_y e, onc bili, omnes philosophi mundi non haberent infallibilem

to pVove that evidenciam ad concludendum quod non est sic de facto.

it is not so at ... , , .

present: Nam, contormiter sicut tunc respondendum esset ad

^asauist 1 ?" 18 argumenta in oppositum, respondendum est et nunc. 3o

would have Nj ec adhuc areuraentum plus concludit nunc quam tunc
to bc retuted , , ... .

then as we concluderet, nec expenencia, vel auctontas, vel quivis
•^™^^ 6 !^» alius locus efficacius probat nunc quod non sic

IIOW, allQ JIC * *

of no more est, quam tunc probaret. Et negans puncta vel

value now than ,. ? ,. ....... , , • ~-

ihcy would bc taha lndivisibilia esse, nec vere loquitur de mstanti ^3

,l,en- temporis nec de motibus subitis, et generaliter de

continuacionibus accidencium. Nec arguet efficaciter

contra ponentes composicionem continui ex non quantis,

nisi prius stabiliret nullum huiusmodi posse esse: quod

faciendo nimis diu exceptaret principale intentum. 40

Thc truth that Argumentando eciam pro isto puncto, multum expedit

fEifn» 8 .» habere concessum quod omnia preterita vel futura sunt

IllllIIc dlc l l

present to God,

'i. iu deest B, 12. o r B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 35

Deo presencia: tunc enim scquitur omnc quod erit js of great use

.... . . ... • , !•' ■ i in this matter.

ahqualiter, lpsum est taliter; et per idem, si aliquid

dividet superficiem, vel erit summe propinquum ipsum,
sic sc habet: et hoc multum valet pro intento.
5 In oppositum est philosophus 6° phisicorum, 3 de F A.ris?otfe ' h? '
celo, et primo de generacione, per multas pregnantes many places,

. , • jt£ -i r% seems to

raciones et consideraciones dirhctles contra Democntum contradict this.

et Platonem : ut puta de tactu, de mediacione cuius-
cunque continui, de divisione cuiuscunque continui in
lojnfinitum, de continuacione indivisibilis cum alio, et
multis similibus que postea tangentur.

Sed ad illud respondet Linconiensis, dicens quod „ But ,

" . ' ~ Grosseteste

Aristoteles intellexit nullum continuum distincte sensi- points out that

... . . Aristotle has in

bue componi ex non quantis tanquam partes eius nu- m j niJ tnat
t5 meralibus. Et vocantur partes numerales partes quan- Y«i°*/ S
titative, que aliquociens hnite quo ad hominem sumpte continuous;

• n ^ 1 .. .. ■ and that, ot

constituunt suum totum, vel maius; et tamen tmpossi- course) cannot
bile est non quantum esse partem vel componere con- be . com P°sed ot

" ' ' mextended

tinuum sic sensibile. Verumptamen apud Deum est paits, such that

, we can

20 notum ex quot non quantis mundus componitur, et distinguish or

quecunque pars eius corporea; sicut notum est sibi Rut^Goc^ca'-
quota pars quantitativa anguli recti est angulus contin- as He knows'

_ ... _ . „ , what part of a

gencie quam Euclides, 3 elementorum 25 , demonstrat rightangleis
csse minimam speciem angulorum, et partem anguli thc s c m n H 5 s 5 h of
25 rectilinei. E2t sic dicit Aristoteles, primo posteriorum, 'angle of

.. • • j-cc continence.

punctam esse causam linee, cum ponitur m eius dim- Aristotle

nicione tanquam prius naturaliter. Ideo dicit Linconiensis adlll ! ts that the

" . r . .... point causes

quod ista opinio non contranatur sensui Anstotehs, the line.

sed sequitur ex eodem. Nec est possibile punctuale only^Tnot 3
3otaneere vel continuari cum aliquo 2 m intellectum quem opposed to his

~ n ^ doctnne, but

Aristoteles exponit de termino; quia supponit omne tale iollows from it.
habere ultimum.

Verumtamen unum indivisibile potest tangere reli- Onc point can,

, , . • j j in a wide sense

quum, large loquendo; quia esse ad eundem situm t0(icll ano ther,
35 indivisibilem positum cum alio; et sic potest continuari »■ c - bc in the

1 ' •» . same place

cum alio large loquendo, quia facere unum continuum with it.

,. r-, • hnt 1 »i - u~» A collection ot

cum alio. Et compositum ex 3 DU!> punctts, vel quotlibet po j nts j n oc id

number can
have halves ;

2 1 . miam B. 3o. it Tm B. 3i. det'uno B. 3^. oe B.

22 — 23. Angulus contingencie. We find further on (p. 48),
that the angle of continence is the one formed bv a circle tan-
gent to a right line.

36 JOHANNIS WYCI.IF

<:ak ix.

for in onu imparibus, habet medietates; quia sicut medium dupli-
Se must ^not" «^iter dicitur, vel per abnegacionem extremorum, vel

necessarily bc p er e que distanciam ab extremis, sic est dare duplicem
equal, r . ... ,. ...

though in medietatem : scihcet, medietatem, que est pars simph-
an °niust. 5 citer subdupla ad indivisibiliter plus vel minus suo tota 5
(et taliter loquitur arithmeticus de medietate maiori et
medietate minori numeri imparis). Et 2° modo, sed non
primo, habet omnis quantitas medietates, i. e. duas
partes quantitativas incommunicantes, quarum neutra
indivisibiliter excedit reliquam totum equaliter constitu- i<>
entes, licet ternarius et omnis quantitas habeat duas
medietates equales ad alium sensum.
Aristotle Nec demonstrat Aristoteles oppositum, sicut nec de-

''contrary to' 8 monstrat, si aliquod sit instans, ipsum est principium
T tr )if- unius temporis I et finis alterius ; cum primum instans B 1

Neither . . ' , , r . ,. . .

geometricians non precessit mstans vel tempus, sed capit alias signi-

philosophers ficaciones ex famosis modis loquendi philosophorum

liave anything naturalium, quorum non interest tractare de partibus

to do here, for ,.,?,., , . ... ,

thev consider punctuahbus ni phuosophia naturali, m qua demonstratur
beionfintfto causa per effectus, demonstracione quia est, cuius prin- 20
experience and c ipium est experiencia vel sensus. Punctus autem non

scnsc

Now the point est sensibilis vel ymaginabilis; ideo tractatus eius non
1S 'nor^even 1 ' 16 ' pertinerit specialiter geometre, qui solum de ymagina-

imaginable; bilibus pertractat directe, sicut nec naturali philo-
it belongs to , {, . .,, , ,

the province sopho. Sed lllud conservandum est metaphysico et 2?
meta P °hysics. aristotelico.

No number of Unde impossibiie est quod aliquis numerus substan-
points^can be ciarum vel punctorum, vel aliud preter deum sit simpli-
infinite: God citer infinitum, cum omnis talis numerus habet deum

alone is so. . .

God knows hnem suum extrinsecus finientem et ultimum eius punc- - , <>
points^go^to iu ale finiens intrinsecus. Ymmo deus satis noscit quo-

make up a modo omne quadratum per se sensibile inteeratur ex
sqnare or anv ... .... . ,. . ., ....

other figure partibus mimmis et pnncipns eorum lndivisibihbus

perceived by cumulatis. Et sic dicitur de qualibet alia figura prin-

the senses. cipiata ab indivisibilibus primi numeri, ut figurati. 35

Novit eciam in qua proporcione quicunque numerus

punctorum se habet ad alium: et de istis habemus nos

11 onc . inseparabilem ignoranciam. Scimus tamen quod, si una
linev.g.is ,

twice as long linea fuerit 2P la ad aliam, tunc numerus punctorum
contains twice ems est <l u pl ex a d numerum punctorum alterius : et sic 4°
as many ,je similibus. Verumptamen non possumus scire nisi

points;
but we cannot
know exactlv

u. abne" 1 " i>. 7. isto pro 2° B. 23—24. yniag b ' B. 26.aris 00 B.

32. 4«" B. 33—34. expt-f B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 37

sciencia confusa et communiter dicta aliquod tale ante- that it is twice
cedens; ut nemo mundi scit distincte quantum est hoc j n d| e d anything

corpus, quodcunque demonstretur ; quam velox est iste ielative to size.
r n ' * . . . movement, otc.

motus; quod hoc est medium mstans, vel pnncipium

: huius diei. Et sic de aliis singulis que supponimus

taliter se habere, quando contingit nos loqui de talibus

illis. Ideo dixerunt philosophi quod de singularibus,

propter suam infinitatem, non est sciencia. Omnem ergo «infinite' is a

numerum qui excedit ingenium nostrum ad aptandum term we . use
" D . ' . tor denoting a

insibi terminum specihcum naturalem vocamus lnfinitum, number in-

r ,. ,. • -c • conceivablv

sicut protunditas maris dicitur in una signincacione great- '
esse infinita; et talia que sunt hominibus inmensura- lf 1S in tn ' s

' p- . sense ot

bilia et illa voco infinita 2 m quid, vel quo ad homi- relative

. . «•■ , infinitude that

nem, et tta tntelhgo quandocunque pono numerum | eni p] ov jt

i5infinitum. when ■P e «k» n e

01 nnmber.
Unde, ymaginato quod Deus successive addat ad A Snppose that

punctum alia puncta, continuando unam lineam, est po int to

dare instans quando numerus punctorum erit 2 m quid another soas

. . n . . . to make a Ime,

iniinitus uni, et quando erit 2 m quid mfinitus alteri ; there will come

20 et sic diversi (2 m perspicacitatem suam) habebunt diver- the ^mJbeMs

sos maximos numeros illis iinitos, et diversos numeros infinite to one
. . . . . „ . . . . man, and then

minimos lllis innnitos. Nec est mconveniens unitatem to another,

, ,. , , ^ c j according to

additam vel subtractam a numero racere quod quis | lis powe r ot
non sufficiat distincte totum apprehendere confuse, cum conceiving it;

i- -ii r ■ an " t,le

25 cognoscatur de quocunque tali quod lllud esset finitum ; addition of a
et si esset duplicatum, quadruplatum; et sic quamdiu makes the
scivero numerare. Est ergo dare maximum numerum differencc

. between

quem quis potest distincte simul apprehendere, et nullum infinite and
numerum sibi infinitum excedentem solum per unitatem ' sense .
3o quem non sufficit distincte apprehendere. Omne enim Tnc greatest

. . . ., . . . . possible

disttncte sensibile conttnet ultra hoc quod scio distincte number of ages
calculare indivisibilia 2 m quid infinita. Unde maxima 'infmberf
multitudo evorum est numerus maximus possibilis, sed l' 10 , 11 ? 11 l } me , ls

. , . . . mhnite in the

hnitus, et per consequens multitudo mstancium, ter- future, it is not

35 minorum, vel parcium talium quaremlibet est finita; nor °i s it ° t aii

licet tempus sit infinitum a parte post, quo ad finem infinite in the

, . , ? , past.

lntrmsecum, sed non quo ad hnem extrmsecum (qui

est Deus) omnium novissimum. Et sic dicitur de pro-

porcionibus quod repugnat aliquam esse simpliciter

40 infinitam. Tempus ergo est sic infinitum a parte post;

sed non concipio quod aliquid possit esse sic infinitum

nnii B, 36, ap_p< B.

3» JOHANNIS WYCI.IF CAP. IX.

a parte prius, nec quod aliquod tempus posset anterio-
I cannot rari ; nec quod linea simpliciter infinita 2 m unum

conceive ot a . . . ,.,«.,. • r> s

straight line extremum possit circumduct vel figi aliter termino o "2
'"formi^n^ "^' ^ xo P ro P ius P er eius talem amocionem, ut communiter

circumference ymaginamur homines. Unde satis est pro sensu philo- 5
or having an ,. , . . . , ,. . .,.,

end anywhere, sophi quod omne continuum sit 2 m quid divisibile m

We that S the mit ' n fi n ' tum et ultra omnem numerum finitum a viatore
extended is distincte noscibilem. Unde volens argumentare infini-
'divisible tatem simpliciter per communes exponentes, nunquam
relatively to us ; p rOD abit illum saltum monstruosum : et sic in infinitum. io

no other r

infinitude of Sed do ultimum cuiuscunque corporis, superficiei, linee,

division can be . a . . . _ . . ,

proved. ve l nniti termino mtnnseco. Et patet solucio ad pnmam

racionem factam.

Second 2° principaliter areumentatur quod nullum infinitum

Objection. ,. . • • a i- j i-

All 'infinites', sit rehquo maius; quia sit A hnea pedabs, cuius puncta i?
th^theorv s ' nt su bdupla in multitudine ad lineam [B] bipedalem ;

contain the et pono quod C [etl D, uniformiter movendo, describant
same number . ,. , L J . , . . ,

of points. For lstas hneas adequate m hora : et tunc videtur quod tot

lf u J° s m ° e b r ,les precise puncta tangeret C in ista hora sicut D, quia

spaces utrinque precise tot quot instancia erunt in ista hora; 20
respectively , ,.. . . ,

equal to 1 and e ° quod pro quohbet mstanti tanget solum unum

1 hou/for The novu m punctum. Cum ergo quecunque sint equalia

same number alicui tercio sunt equalia inter se videtur quod uterque

of instants) . .,.,..

they pass over maximus numerus punctorum sit equahs alteri, sicut est

number^of e qualis maximo numero instancium huius hore. Et idem 2?
poinu. deducitur, ponendo A et B circulari concentrice; tunc

Or if the two . r • r> • 1

lines A and B precise tot puncta sunt m B quot sunt semidyametn
circumferences aD '^° ac ^ centrum ; et tot sunt puncta in A: quia que-
of concentrical Hbet talis dyameter tanaeret in A disparem punctum,

ci rclcs thcn . c .

there are as sicut tangit in B, cum omnes tales pnmo concurent 3o
n p a !!- v S.TJi^i» m centro, eo quod aliter non esset recte. Et idem
radii of its deducitur de infinitis punctis existentibus in eodem situ

circle * . . ■ .. •

and just' as indivisibili applicatis mfinitis pyramidahbus 2 m conos
many m A; ac j eundem punctum in aere. Et ad id fiunt multa

101 tne lauii r

are the same argumenta mathematicalia et geometricalia, reducendo 35
centre opposita conclusione io me et cuiuslibet conclusionis

ItisZrtrue Euclidis -

that either ot Et hic dicitur quod claudit contradiccionem C et D

the mobiles ,., . . , . ,

passes over pro quohbet mstanti huius hore tangere novum punc-
one ^nstant tum ' sic tarde movendo. Pro quo notandum quod^o

1. appq B. it>. B deest B. 17. et deest B. 35. redu d0 B.

36. Q n « B.

CAP. IX. T.OGICA. 39

dato puncto velocissime moto qui, gracia exempli, sit Alonc the
punctus equinoxialis; ille pro quolibet instanti temporrs pmSt^fntoe

adquirit et deperdit situm punctalem et nullus alius sk . v P as ses over
,. .... . . one point ln

tardius motus; sed ahquis exceptat per duo mstancia, each instant;

5 aliquis per 4 01 ' instancia, et sic proporcionaliter 2 m quod all others pass

tardius movetur illo. Nam motus celi est minimus pos- according^as

sibilis quo ad multum de situ describendum in narvo they move

... ..... .,, slower, for the

tempore, eo quod est velocisstmus possibihs: et llle est movement of
mensura omnium aliorum motuum; non solum regu- mos/rapid

lolariter dictus mensurare tempus et aliorum motuum possibie

* . and not onlv

quantitates, sed erhctens omnes ahos motus propnos, is taken to

cum, cessante illo motu, cessarent alteraciones et motus ^eanyljcies

locales quicunque mobilium non intellectivorum. Patet nieasure all

^ 1 others.

ergo quod quihoet punctus recte motus vel circulanter

i5per horam tardius quam punctus velocissime motus,

tanto pauciores situs adequate describet. quanto tardius

movebitur.

Et ex istis potest patere. cum nichil potest velocius Note that this

moveri motu successivo quam movetur equinoccialis, a t 8 r 'u t " that the"*

20 et cum Deus non potest creare maiorem mundum quam worid cannot

1 . ^ be greater than

potest circumducere, sequitur quod non maior mundus it is; for God

potest esse, nisi forte posset moveri successive motu can W orld loo °
subito, stante continuitate parcium: vel forte Deus posset 2reat t0 u be

. . r . . r revolved thus,

spisstus ponere punctaha m mundo, stante erus circum- unless under
2.5 ferencia in eodem situ, ita quod poli possent quantum- hwotheses
libet plus distare sine eorum motu. Conclusio princi- w "'cn are very

..... . _ unhkelv.

pahs de posicione mundi rn magnitudine, situ, figura,

et terminis inseparatis consequentibus est multis eligibi-

lior, quam alie recitate.

3o Patet ergo ex dictis quod argumentum 2 m peccat Thus in this

n ,, • . • , iii-* areument tlie

B ii2"in materia, caprens quod omne punctum | locahter assumption is

motum pro quolibet instanti adquirit situm punctalem: ,. wrong :

r " . " . . . r . It mav be

quod non est verum, cum sicut intercisiones talium urged tliat if

, • • • ,.^ , ,. so, we mav

adquisicionum proporcionaltter ad tardttates motuum. j ust a s wefl
35 Sed argumentatur contra illud per hoc quod tales , cal ! movement

_ . . . dunng an hour,

motus non essent continui, cum, pari evidencia vel rest during

, •, , . ..... that time,

matort, mobile per horam qutesceret qutete llhs oppo- yet W e see the
sita: experiuntur tamen tales motus esse contra nos. ccntrary.

10. doctus B. 26—27. Con° pu ,|i8 B. 28. qiitibo B.

2. Punctus Equinoxialis. Doubtless the point where the
equator is crossed b\ tlie ecliptic, and which is supposed to turn
round on the equatorial circle once a day-

40 IOHANNIS WYCUF CAP. IX.

We answer Hic dicitur quod loquendum est de continuacione mo-

that continuitv , , ... ...

of movement Is tuum quo ad tempus vel quo ad subiectum, sicut di-
apparent, not cendum est de continuitate formarum substancialium

I C J I , ct S 311

continuity is. et simplicium in mixtis, et de densitate ac raritate cpr-
The senses porum. Pro quo declarando, notandum 2 m sentenciam 5

often misiead • ....

us in this perspectivorum et communem expenenciam, quod maxima

matter. decepcio contingit in sensibus, in significando continui-

When the time tatem motus. Cuius racio est, quia tam ad situs quam
taken up by a , ■ a ■ ■..

phenomenon is ad motus signihcacionem requintur tempus conveniens;

th Very sll0I anv et ^ eo P arv itas temporis facit quotlibet illusiones; ut io

illusions. ticio circumductus in noctibus videtur causare ignitum

brand, swung circulum, sicut et punctus sensibilis rubricatus in base

round, seems a } Da troc i celeriter circumducti; ut exemplat Avicenna

circle ot nre ; . ......

a red point on 6° naturalium, et Boccius in principio musice sue, et
forms^circlc experiencia communis de ioculantibus docet idem. Et i 5
t°o, when it patet quod non est credendum sensui generaliter in
Reason, not talibus, sed pocius racioni, errorem sensus corri^enti.

sense, must be ,, , , • ' , ., • , , , .,

judge in such Unde de singularibus sensibus habemus exilem scien-
matters. ciam, quam aliqui vocant scienciam communiter dictam

scienciam putativam, probabilem, thopicam, sive fidem. 20

We do not Ex ista proporcione ergo temporis convenientis, ex uno

minute latere latet sensum talis parvus motus velox, et ex alio

•e^ts^dlslinctlv ^ arere m anet in sensu communi et ymaginativa species

but there is a et iudicia servata de coloribus et sitibus, dum motus

feeling that fuerint celeriter repetiti; et hinc fit talis illusio. 20

produces the 2 ° supponatur ex supra dictis quod sicut motus

continuous agregatus vocatur motus inter cuius partes intercidunt

motion. , , , , • ,• .,,. .

This motion is rnulte quietes vel multa substanciahter llh impertinencia,

thus an proporcionaliter dicendum est quo ad intercisionem
aggregate 01 . r r ^

manv mstancium de quandalitate vel tempore agregato. Sic 3o

movements and • 1-11 1 • i- j , ,

manv rests. enim oportet philosophum loqui, amphando verba de
presenti, quando loquitur de huiusmodi agregatis; ut
patet de stirpe vel genere, de religione vel ordine, de
populo vel quacunque alia multitudine.
Continuity of His premissis dicitur 3 quod dupliciter dicitur mo- 35

motion mav • , • ,. - , ,

apply eitherto tus continuus ; vel simphciter ut solum motus, vel
rtiovement velocissimus, inter cuius partes non est aliqua invasio

withont any . . * ~

intermingled quietis opposite; vel motus continuus quo ad eius
movement of primam mensuram, licet intercidant multe quietes oppo-

which the s ; ie _ j7 t j srum voco motum continuum 2 m quid. Et^o
pnmary . .

measure is taliter oportet quemcunquc philosophantem ponere
continuous.

i5. deiocnla 1 ' 9 B. 36. sol B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 41

omnem progressionem, omnem tremorem cum suis To the sccond
., ■ • , sort belong

consequentibus esse continua, ut sunt soni cordarum, pr0 gression,

et eeneraliter omnes soni vel loquele; cum quotlibet and undulatory

& p ....". movement,

similibus, in quibus sunt quotlibet intercisiones, racione such as sound,
' n ,. , t ,• which a PP ears

3 motuum reflexorum, licet sensus decepti putant taha fn De unbroken

simpliciter esse continua. to our senses -

Istis notatis, dicitur quod quilibet motus successivus All successive
j ^- ttjj^ .. motion is

est modo suo continuus. Unde datus motus est con- continuous, for

tinue per suam primam mensuram, hoc est, agereeatum jt exists during
1 r _ .... . . p . a continuous

10 ex instantibus vel quandalitatibus mdivisibilibus, m aggregate of

quorum quolibet movetur mobile talis motus; quia pro

nullo signo illius mensure desistit. Et proporcionaliter

dicendum est de quiete opposita habente mensuram

incommunicantem sed commixtam. Et patet solucio. Sic . DeveJopment

. l . is a contmnoiis

i5enim est motus augmentacioms contmuus, hcet multe motion, though
quietes intercidant (ut vere dicit Commentator); et ita ' '"'^pested! 1

continuat. quantumlibet tarde motum. suam mocionem , bec . ause jt

n . ... tulfils ltselt

respectu sue prime mensure. Nec est mconveniens, sed continuously in

consonum racioni, vocare agregatum ex indivisibilibus '' f Time. 1 ™ 06

20 aut divisibilibus distantibus substanciam, quantita- ,,T nere j s
11 oh , ,- ,-, • i-n- • notlnng absurd

Biirs tem quahtatem, etc. ut alibi patet dinusius. in calling

Ulterius, quo ad 2 m de A et B circulatis concentrice, '"poTnts a^

dicitur quod talis est proporcio numeri punctorum ad supstance or a

M J *. . l . ,. , . quality.

numerum punctorum, qualts proporcio circuli ad cir- In the case of

25culum; et ita generaliter de quibuscunque continuis et ^circles 6 "/ 10

multitudinibus ipsa continentibus. Ideo ponunt sapientes whicli onc

r . r . ' circumterence

concorditer quod prtma racto mensurandi est ln nume- is double ot

ris ; et patet quod quotlibct semidyametri et circuli con- formei^win e

current, antequam deveniatur ad centrum, servarido rec- liave double as

n many P oints.

3o titudmem.

Ideo est assumptum argumenti falsum. Quis namque The

negaret quin, ponendo puncta A circuli esse inmediata, of^the^worid^fs
semidyametri iniciate a punctis inmediatis statim con- probably a

r .. . ., .,. P crtect eircle,

currerent antequam procedatur dtstancta sensibth versus with the least
35centrum? Unde opiniabile est quod circumferencia mundi cur^atm-e ^and
est maxime reeulariter de possibili circularis; et cum exceeds the

. r . . nearest P ossible

ipsa habet graduum remissimum arcualem, opmabile inscnbed
est quod supremus circulus excedit circulum proximo C point 6nly" C
suppositum solo puncto. In circulis autem magis curvis, but . the others,

rr . . . ,. . ,. bemg more

40 propter lrregulantatcm ulttmo linea circulans excedit curved, differ

sibi proximam multis punctis; et hec est 2 a consideracio points?

quare non potest esse mundus maior, quia quantus

mundus potest esse, tantus potest esse mundus circu-

laris: sed non potest esse maior mundus circularis, cum

42 JOHANNIS WYCUF CAP. IX.

This again remississimus gradus circulacionis possibilis sit sue cir-
P worid ca^inot 6 cumferencie ultime conveniens: ergo, etc. Gum enim in

be larger than q ua libet latitudine sit dare cradus immediatos et eradum
it is; n . . . D . °

for no remissimum 2 m lllam viam, patet quod sic est ponen-

jess^curved^is ^um m latitudine curvacionis. Possibile est ergo deum 5
possible, and creare mundum 2 m quamlibet partem sue circumferencie

the world- ..... ^ * . . .

raust be a remississime circularem; et cum nemo scit probare quod

spieie ' non sit ita de nostro mundo, patet sequi ex illo sup-

posito et opinione de compositione continui ex non

quantis ac aliis necessariis, quod non potest mundus 10

This takes alius esse maior. Nec plus derogat hoc infinitati divine

God^powe™ potencie, quam quod non potest producere alium filium,

adnichilare suam fabricam, vel producere mundum in

an iniinite specie milius figuratum. Sicut ergo esse mundum infi-

worid no"arger nitum simpliciter propter nimietatem magnitudinis noni?

than a pea, are esse t validum nec esse mundum equalem pise propter
both equally . . ... , . . r r

impossible. mmietatem parvitatis eciam non valet; sic videtur quod

can^fonger 6 i nter ^ec extrema intelligibilia est dare optimum gradum
ihan the medie quantitatis; quoniam verisimile est Deum scire

diameter of the ,, • ..,..,. . . _ . .

world: et velle in tam principah tabrica contigisse. Ex lstis 20
lfnes^which patet quod non potest esse linea recta longior quam
cannot possibh mun Ji dyametrum et per consequens non quelibet linea

be straightened. .„,.,.

est rectificabihs.
it is said that Ad 3 m dicitur quod impossibile est multa puncta
' of^many 65 ve ^ substancias punctales esse simul in eodem situ 2?
pyramids indivisibili ; quia per idem possent multa prima subiecta

touched each . . ^ . r :.,..,

other, manv situs huius esse in eodem situ mdividuo: quod repugnat
be'h'i Ve^ame formaliter cum hoc posito de A et B subiectis. Patet

, place. q U od aliud est A situari et aliud B situari; et per con-
But this is n . . . . ' v. . ,

impossible, if sequens situs vel situaciones sue distinguuntur. Et ldem 00

^tlie position l s eq u ' lu r de nbi indivisibili, cum sit actus qui multipli-

of apex A and catur ad multiplicacionem subiecti sui primi. Et con-
Ihat ol apex B . . r \

are different. firmacio huius est, quod tanta toret racio repugnancie

the^stfi-rie St q u od puncta forent simul quo ad suos situs, sicut quod

imoossibiiity qiiantitates molares essent simul coextense; sed hoc non 35
for two points ' .....

to coexist, as potest esse : ergo nec pnmum. Si enim quihbet punctus

volumes. ^ potest esse simul cum puncto B, tunc totum A potest

coextendi cum toto B, et per consequens totus mundus

These apices potest esse involutus in quamtumlibet parvo situ. Dicitur

St ide. C as er g° quod puncta | conalia pyramidis cumulata con-Bii'3*

maamtiK

has been stituent maenitudinem, ut tactum est superius. cum

shown ;

1. circtilarius B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 43

unum distabit ab alio per quotlibet intercepta. Unde to suppose the

. . ... . ... .. contrary is to

argumenta hominum volencium detrudere quotlibet talia beg "the
puncta in eodem situ indivisibili petunt pro fundamento question.
quod non sit possibilis composicio continui ex non
5 quantis. Ideo illud 3 m non est probacio, sed peticio
principii.

Unde alias dixi quod non possunt plura quam sex Only six points

,. / . . can touch a

puncta mmediate circumstare eundem punctum m me- seventh
dio. Et hec est una causa quare septenarius est numerus ^ddfe: thus 6 ?

10 universitatis. Omnem erso punctum mundo sensibi- is the number
,. . . . . ,. ,., of totality.

hter lntrmsecum circumstat tnmediate, versus quamiibet

6 differenciarum, unus punctus. Sed argumentatur com- dtfficuTty-V

muniter quod quemlibet punctum intrinsecum circum- would seem

* . „ . ... . tliat everv pomt

stant puncta lnnnita; quia sit A punctus m aere quem j s touclied by

i.isolum sex puncta tangunt 2 m istam viam ; tunc patet ^'"itlmde^of

quod A constituit trieonum superlicialem, quadratum, ° thers -

n . °, .., ■ c If a e iven

pentagonum; et sic de qualibet specte hgure super- point A touches

iicialis, quo ad gradum eius minimum. Ex quo sequitur W hich is^tself

quod A tangit infinita puncta ; quia, sicut tangit punctum touched on
~. ° * ~ . i each Slde bv

^odirecte onentalem et punctum directe occidentalem, ita the points C

tangit utrumque immediatum suprapositum aut suppo- ^ n mU st aj| n

situm iilis punctis; quia, sit B punctus inmediatus A touch these

r n . . . ,. . and so on ad

onentali, et C punctus sibt mmediate suprapositus, et infinitum.

D punctus inmediate supra positus A B in linea eque

25 distante inmediate B C lineam; et patet quod A B C D

constituunt unum quadratum minimum, et quod unum

quodque istorum 4°'" punctorum sit inmediatum cuilibet

eorumdem. Videtur ex hoc quod nullus punctus est

fingendus intercidere inter unum et alium. Quod con-

3o firmatur ex hoc quod linea aliquante incidens, que

habet punctos angulares intrinsecos, cum sit recta et

continua, habet utrobique puncta inmediata. Patet ergo

quod A, ex una quadrata superficiali, habet 3 a puncta;

scilicet B C D sibi inmediata, et per idem habet versus

35 occidens alia tria puncta; et sic habet sex puncta in-

ferius tangencia; et per idem, multiplicando pentagonos.

12. drarp B. 14. ac' B. 16. .\ Um B. 21. ntrf B. 26. .•i t,,m :

and so all alnng B. 3o n'qe B.

1. Unum distabit. Wyclif seems inconsistent here. He all
along savs that his indivisible points are 'inmediata'; which 1
cannot understand to mean anything else, except that they touch
each other.

44 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

exagonos, etc, haberet ex omni parte puncta circum-
stancia intinita.
r note S that thT' ^ ro 1sta consideracione solvenda, notandum quod
world, with mundus, sicut quotlibet eius partes, habent posiciones

each of its ,. _ . , . . i- -

parts, has suas lineares et superhciales, quarum posicionum radix ?

con-espondin" est -> x dynamiter mundi ; scilicet longitudinalis, latitudi-

to its diameters nalis et altitudinalis. Iste autem tres dyametri, sicut et

breadth an'd quelibet linea ab aliqua istarum eque distans, habet

hei *the's e aliam manierem posicionis suorum punctorum, quam

diameters have alia linea reliqua obliqua. Sicut enim non esset racio 10

their points . •,.,. . ,. ... .. , . ,. ,

placed scisstbilitatis hgni vel lapidis 2 111 poros longitudinales
a^ofher^lines 11 P° C1US quam transversi, nisi racione disparitatis in

somewhat like continuacione linee naturalis. sic in mundo non esset
directions ot . , ,.,.,.,,.

cleavage in racio quare una dyameter esset longitudinahs vel latt-

woodorstones; tudinalis, pocius quam quelibet tracta ad quoslibet polos i5

mundi, cum esset racio specialis quam ego pono a

michi probabili ex posicione suorum punctorum respectu

and they punctorum alterius linee ohliquate; et hinc videtur
inHuence the . . . „ . . . . . , , ,. -„

position of radios tnrluxos m tsta mferiora habere disparem emcaciam
tiiat°_ n _rven° 2m mocium disparem incidendi. Dico ergo quod omnis 20

point A will punctus sensibiliter intrinsecus alicui istorum trium
be touched bv ,. , ., . ,. . . ,

only 6 other hnearum vel sibi eque distancium, tangit duos punctos

direction "of^the ^ n eaciem linea, et nullam reliquum angularem. Ut in
ihree diameters casu posito, si A sit punctus talis linee, tunc illum

of the world, 1 _ !•«■

and by no tangunt solum sex puncta versus 3* dinerencias supra 2?
others. dictas, ita quod nullius quadrati minimi puncta angu-
laria obliquata a posicione predicta tangunt se.
it does not Et si areumentatur quamlibet lineam [non I directe

follow that •-, ... , ,. LJ „

any line drawn incidentem quo ad posicionem | predictam esse curvam, B 114
benf 8 unless 'fn ^icitur quod non sequitur. Pro quo notandum quod ?o

this direction: quilibet punctus linee primi modi est punctus linee
for it will ; ,. r TT r , .. . ,. r . . ,

touch that - modt, et econtra. Lnde linea m medio mcidens mter

of^anotlier^that ^ uos semidyametros mundi, dividendo angulum rectum

touches it, and \n duo equalia, ut loquitur geometer; ut, gracia exempli,
belongs to one „ ,. . , . . l . , . , _,

of the three ( > hnea mcidens mter A semidyametrum onentalem 3r

diameters. et; g semidvametrum meridianum, tangit per centrum

i5. t c,rl 1!. 18. v'er B. 20. incedendi B. 22. ta nt B. 28. non

dee.it B. 32. lra B.

28. It is with some hesitation tbat I have added nou here,
supposing directe to mean 'in tlie direction of one of the world's
diameters'. Anv line produced to tlie point A in another direc-
tion would form a curve witli its lasi two points, so to speak.

GAP. IX. LOGICA. 45

punctum A linee inmediatum centro. \Lx quo sequitur
quod ille punctus A linee est medius inter centrum et
punctum angularem proximo supradictum punctum in
linea inmediata. Et sic ascendo obiique 2 m situs indivi-
5 sibiles inmobiles et sempiternas. Unde, quicunque con- No line could
cedit talem lineam non esse rectam inveniat in mundo None^ot i?s'
alium situm reccius positum vel ponibilern inter extrema. intermediate

„ . ...... . ... points is out ot

Rectum enim est longitudinahter positum, cuius nullum Hne with its

medium obliquat ab extremis eiusdem. Et si argumen- ff^be^said

lotatur quod non sit racio quare punctus A linee, in- that it migbt
,. . „ r . as well toucli

medtatus centro, sit extremum C tangens centrum, quin any other point

per idem punctus B linee, inmediatus centro, sit ex- i„ t °Jif 1, tLl Ilc

r r . ' centre, tnis

tremum C linee per quod tangit centrum : dicitur quod is denicd.

• bccnu sc thcv

sunt due tales hnee, quarum utraque communicat cum form different

i5reliqua in omnibus preterquam in signatis punctis. Ideo by^ne po?nt 8

oportet ex supposicione capere C esse lineam illam ' °nly.

.,-.,. . This is a

que per punctum A linee mmediate centro tangit sophism: The

centrum. . DointA ,

touches B, and
Ex istis patet quod non sequitur: A vunctus tangit tlle pointB, C .-.
„ r, ■ ,-. i A touches C.

20 B punctinn, et h punctus tangit L punctum: ergo. A it is true that
punctus tangit C. Ymaginacio autem non sufricit ista i,^!;"",!, !.,

^ H I t <> I .. I I i v. ' I J L -^ ^

capere, cum solum capit sensibile cumulari supra sensi- things;

, ., . ... . . . , . but we must

bile et per consequens inter ula mtercidere angulanter transcend

unum minus. Ideo oportet superius ascendere ad aciem ima j|\e?lect n - by

25 intellectus in recte concipiendo composicionem continui a work of somc

„ , / , , difficulty,

ex non quantis. Quod grave est facere, ex hoc quod because

vmaginacio cogit intellectivum in apprehensione cuius- cannoTfind^the

eunque vmaginabilis; et cum in toto ambitu sui obiecti inextended

, ,. . anvwhere, and

non reperit composicionem huiusmodi parcium, non est consequently

3o mirabile si dissentit. Sed intellectus dicit sibi quod est * t .l\ ssc " t t s ' j

dare parcium indivisibilium composicionem aliam, quam nominem

,. aaainst

non est suum discutere. Nominalists :

Sed quia dicta posicio videtur plurimum repugnare ^athematicai'
conclusionibus geometrie cum suis principiis; ideo expe- points.

.,. • ,. ,. ..,.., . lines, &c?

3a ttt parum disgredi, ne posicto dicta videatur contrana it not, how
tam lucidis veritatibus, ex tam firmis principiis de- ^geometricaP
monstratis. Libenter tamen scirem a modernis arguen- difficulties?

., ._ . ,. . , . . against us.- 1

tibus geometnce contra dictam viam de composicione And if thev do.
continui ex non quantis, quid ipsi vocant lineam, super- ^p^fjo^as 1 ''
40 riciem, punctum et angulum ; si negent talia mathema- tnie -

ticalia posse [esse], quomodo non verentur arguere, pec-

41. esse deest B.

46 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

cando in materia, dum sumunt sibi notoric impossibilia?

Si autem dicant quod necessarium est esse huiusmodi

elementa, ut oportet geometriam supponere, coacti erunt

concedere quod talia non possent mathematice sustineri,

nisi ponendo sua subiecta indivisibilia, et per conse- 5

quens componere substancias sensibiles quarum sunt

principium.

Dirtorent Primo erqo notandum quod unumquodque a ot pre-

senses: . ° ...... ..

(!) o/a point: dictorum potest lntelhgi equivoce. INam punctus potest

minimum signiticare vel minimum sensibile 2 m 3 S demensiones 10
perceptible hy terminatum intrinsecus quantitatis continue permanen-

o ur scnscs or ....

the absolutely tis, vel terminativum linee intrinsece simpliciter sine

oFa Hne? Dd parte. Et sic linea potest significare vel quantitatem

{2)Ofaline: continuam, permanentem, sensibiliter longam, sine sen-

length either ... . ' : , » ,. •, i „

without sibili latitudine vel profunditate eiusdem, vel 2° quan- io
Se or rtfcknessf titatem permanentem sine | latitudinali profunditate B 114"
or without any simpliciter. Similiter, superficies potest significare quan-

(3) Ofa titatem huiusmodi longam et latam sine profunditate
len*g1t?an'd sensibili; vel quantitatem huiusmodi sine profunditate

breadth simpliciter. Et res primi modi vocantur apud philosophos 20
without r r 1 t-- i f

sensible puncta, hnee, vel superficies naturales. Et res 2 1 modi

''absofutely 01 vocantur puncta linee vel superficies mathematice. Et

without diversimode sencientes statuerunt sibi talia naturalia

thickness. . . . . . ,. ,

(4) Of an disparium quantitatum; sed omnia huiusmodi, solo
eithf/uie intellectu noscibilia, sunt posita in suo termino naturali. 25

relation of two Anqulus eciam potest significare posicionem figure sen-

natural lines, .,... r ,. , ,. ,

meeting in a sibilis 2 111 concursum linearum laterahum ad punctum
na or "of two nt ' eius signabile naturalem; vel posicionem significanter
mathematicai simpliciter 2 m concursum linearum lateralium ad punc-

lincs meeting r . . . .

in a point tum eius mathematicum termmantem. 3°

„1 th^same Et iste yi^etur esse sensus Euclidis et aliorum mathe-

The Hrst sense maticorum loquencium de istis 4 01 ' modis rerum. Non
seems to bc . \ . ... .. ..

cmployed by enim potest mtelhgi omne tndivisibile esse punctum,
No UC evei7 q uia tunc Deus et quelibet unitas ac principium cuius-
'indivisiblc', cunquc ireneris esset punctus. Ymmo sunt quotlibet 3p

onlv that . ,. n . ., .f. . ' ,. .

'indivisible' of lndivtsibiha situata, quorum nullum poterit esse punc-

NV 'made 5j! " tus - Ideo melius et planius dicitur quod punctus descrip-
is a point. t i ve est indivisibile compositivum linee. Et si obicitur

This is rather . '

a description quod linea, cum sit puncto postenor et compositivum,
definhion ; cum sit passio vel accidens puncto, non debet cadere -P
in eius diffinicione: dicitur quod punctus, cum sit extra
genus, describi potest, sed non proprie difiniri. Nec est
inconveniens in tali descripcione poni quodammodo
posterius. Verumtamen patet logico quomodo punctus

CAP. IX. I.OGICA. 47

est prior linee in clemcntari composicionc. Sed linea at <'">' ratc tllc

. ..,,.. „ . . word 'linc'

est pnor puncto m hnali racione, cum est hnis gracia can enter into

cuius est punctus 1 . Et sic eadem causant se reciproce ^otatecause

in dispari genere causandi. Et oportet proprietates each otner
. . . . diverselv.

5 capere logico differenciarum latencium in quotlibet

dcscribendis. Ulterius, quo ad decripcionem linee vel Note aIso that

r. ■ ■ , , , • ,,,., points, lines

superhciei, notandum quod longitudo vel latitudo non and arcas are

cst eius genus vel species, sed passio aut accidens; sed ^bltance^

sicut punctus aut punctualitas est substanciam esse vunc- . and mean

......... , r simply tiiat a

lotualem, sic linea vel hneahtas est substanciam esse substance has

linearem, cui inseparabiliter accidit longitudo ; et super- '"'or^surfacef 11 '

ficiem que est substanciam esse superticialem insepara- In each body

biliter consequitur quo ad speciem latitudo, licet eadem maximum of

superficies posset nunc esse longior aut lacior, et nunc surfacfand of

i5brevior aut striccior eadcm, dico 2 m materiam. Pro number of
,,.,., , . points.

quo notandum quod m quohbet corpore est dare maxi-

mam lineam, maximam superficiem, et maximam mul-

titudinem punctualium, que est prima mensura penes

quam attenditur cuiuslibet talium magnitudo.

20 Ex quo patet quod eadem corporis magnitudo sit And its sizc is

equalis sue maxime linee et sue maxime superficiei; et Sls S greatest°

per consequens rectificata maxima linea mundi haberet length or
, ,. . , . surtace:

duo extrema cum medio et proporcionem finitam ad

quamlibet eius partem, manens continue causata: ut
25 mundus. Hec tamen rectificacio est impossibilis, sicut though in somc

et posicio linee simpliciter infinite. Talis enim foret ^cann^otVe""

infinitum maior mundo. madc straight.

2° patet quod linea non superaddit multitudini punc- The line adds

torum nisi continuacionem ; superficies superaddit linee "^points^but C
3u continuacionem linearum inmediatarum, et corporeitas ■ the . ir ,

. . r continuitv: tlic

continuacionem huiusmodi superficierum. Unde in pre- surfacc is but
dicacione 2 m causam suscipiunt omnia hec 4 01 ' de se tfnts^the

invicem predicacionem, licet non formalem. volnme, a

•ii- senes ot

3 patet quod longitudo, latitudo, et profunditas non surfaccs that

35 sunt quantitates sed quantitatem continuam consequen- Length^breadth

tes, licet geometre propter ampliorem noticiam et dif- and height are
. ° . . . r not quantities,

terenciam accipiant longitudinem et latitudinem, loco

generum linee et superficiei. Nec ista duo et profunditas and thus

correspondent proporcionabiliter quantitati. Nam nullum "ar^e^as^tls

Bu5"corpus est precise eque maenum, ut loneum, I quia ,0 " fi > for then

'. r n ° ' bjin ^t would be

tunc tpsum et linea sua longitudinalis essent equalia; equal to its

own leneth.

1. logico pro lincc fsicj B. 28. multitudinem B. 20. lineam B.

48 JOHANNIS WYCLIF ' ■"'■ IX.

et idem esset argumentum de qualibet superficie assig-

A line may be nanda. Et de linea patet idem, cum quelibet linea in-

a 9 body" butrtie finitorum punctorum quo ad nos sit alicui corpori

body could eoualis cui repusnat esse eque loneum cum eodem.

not be of the ^ . , , , ? j- • , •

same length. Potest eciam deperdere longitudinem per circumlacio- o
Ll be 8t lost V bv ld nem > ut videtur, stante magnitudine. Ymmo magnitudo
merely turning et parvitas sunt passiones quantitatis; et idem est iu-
ihe bodv m the * c ,■ /V • • ♦. •

sense of dicium de protunditate. Omnia enim tsta suscipiunt

breadth. ma gj s e t minus, 2 m relacionem quam superaddunt

quantitati. i<>

As for angles, Ulterius quo ad anguli descripcionem patet quod
definition diffinicionem Euclidis oportet sane intelligere supra
^rooerlv verba. Nam primo videtur ex diffinicione Euclidis quod
understood. angulus sit tam contactus quam applicacio linearum ;
but a meeting et si sit contactus, tunc indubie est indivisibilis, et po- i5
° f iHs an" test manere non angulus; et si sit applicacio linearum,
indivisible tunc est agregatum ex multis applicacionibus extensis.
if ifis tieir Ideo vellem quod sollicitantes se ad pugnandum com-
"aagreaateof" posicionem continui ex non quantis per impugnacionem
many extended sentencie geometrice de magnitudine angulorum essent 20
liut thosewho primo fundati in noticia quantitatis eorum; quia no-
Tu^s stem'' ticiar 11 q u *d est oportet precedere noticia qaia est de
require to Iearn eodem.

what _, ... , , • . _

angles are. Suposita ergo descnpcione angulorum phisica, patet

^angks^into 1 q uo d sicut figurarum, sic et angulorum quidam est 25
thosc that corporeus et quidam superficialis; et superficialium

concluse a . , -,• ■ , ui* •,•

space or onh quidam est rectihneus et quidam obltquilmeus; et

the a iatter a into obliquilinearum quidam est in superficie convexa ut
reciilinear and anguli sperales; in talibus enim habent 3 S anguli 3 S an-

curvilinear, , , , a • • ■>

acute or gulos rectos; ut patet de quadratis extime superhciei 3o

or descrfbe^ on m undi. Quidam autem sunt anguli acuti obliquilinee,

a plane, when e t oblique superficialis ; ut anguli intrinseci zodiaci

may be curved, et equinoccialis; et alii anguli huius sunt obtuis;

orboth. ut an g U ij extrinseci illis oppositi. Qutdam autem anguli

obliquilinei sunt in superficie plana ; et tunc vel sunt 35
obliquilinei 2 m unum latus tantum; ut angulus contin-
gencie vel angulus intrinsecus sibi oppositus; quorum
primus causatur ex porcione linee circularis et recti-
linee eundem circulum contingentis, et 2 l,s causatur ex
eadem porcione linee circularis et dyametri circuli con- 4°
currcntis. Aliquis autem est oblique lineus 2 m utrumque

12. mlelligi (sic) B. 32. 50» 1 B. 36—37. ojin* B.

36 — 39. See pag. 35.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 49

latus tantum ; ut angulus causatus ex contactu duorum

circulorum. Et angulorum superficialum rectilineorum Rectilincar

quidam est rectus, quando linee recte super se erigun- dlvfded into

tur; quidam est obtusus, ut quilibet maior recto; et ri 8 nt j obtuse,
' n .,., . and acute

5 quidam est acutus, ut quihbet minor recto: et quot- angles.

libet sunt proporcionabiles divisiones de angulo cor- difficuWes.

pores, ut patet faciliter adaptanti. (i) The angle,

., .... ,•- ,• belonging to

Sed videtur ex descnpciombus supradictis quod qui- the whole
libet angulus sit multus per totum subiectum, et per :xt s e ides 0t is tS

ioconsequens multus magnus. Videtur eciam quod ad indefinitely

,-, ■ great.

eundem punctum essent quotlibet anguh; quia quot (2) Anv number

sunt figure sic posite ad datum punctum, tot sunt ° *„! p S f n re in

aneuli. ?° videtur quod nedum descripciones Euclidis, ( 3 ) Euclid's

. ° . n . r theory ot

sed eius sentencia, ut plunmum, est neganda. angles, as well

i5 Ad primum negatur assumptum. Pro quo notandum definition^is to

quod cuiuscunque mathematici substancia vel rtatura be denied.
^ ......... n . ,, ,. Answers.

est lndivisibinter situata, et per consequens nullus talis (0 Denied.
angulus est quo ad substanciam suam magnus. Verum- be^great ^iiHts
tamen 2 ter potest intelliei angulum esse maenum; vel , essence

r , Y 1 i- because the

20 m natura propria quo ad molem, ut angulus naturalis, essence of
vel rescriptive quo ad basem; ut quicunque angulus ma thenfatical
mathematicus; et sic dicunt geometre omnes angu- is indivisible.

° But we mav

Bii5Mos | rectilmeos equales, quorum quecunque bases ter- say it has size

minantes equalia latera indirecte incidencia sunt equa- ei ^space ft e

25les. Aneulus enim naturalis est principium mensurans contains, or as
. . & . 1 • to ns base.

posicionem et quantitatem iigure angulance, sicut ct We may

angulus mathematicus est principium eius. Ideo, sicut an angie'gr eat

virtus, eciam indivisibilis, dicitur magna respectu prin- as t0 lts eilect.

cipiati ab eadem, sic et angulus potissime, CLim sit de

3o genere respectuum; ut divisivum, proporcio ; agencia,

et quotlibet talia dicuntur magna solummodo respective.

Et si queritLir de subiecto primo SLiperficialis anguli, Where is the

cum sit accidens, dicitur qLiod cuiuslibet talis subiectum ^^ea^to^be"

primum est substancia tripunctalis, cuius quelibet duo fii' s Jiy found ?
' . i-ii ■ • . In three points

35 puncta constituunt lineam vel basem minimam possi- that touch

biiem et 3 111 punctum possibilem dispariter, tangendo f which two

utrumque priorum. form the

n r .,., . . . smallest

Unde patet qLiod qLulibet tnangulus minimus habet possible base,
3 S angulos, in quolibet 3 1 " 11 punctorum conalium, quo- fhcapeKV/a
j.o rum quilibet dicitur aneularis respectLt basis sibi in- triangle.

4 ,• • , . • ,■ So thc

mediate; et sic angulus mathematicus est situ aliter mathematical

in puncto mathematico, et essencialiter terminative in situa^fd^a^the

apex, but has

its essence at

10. nullus 13. 28 v'tus B. 36. ca do B.

50 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

thc basc of this base minima bipunctali; accidentaliter autem tripliciter

tria e3usts a ^ quamlibet basem suam. Primum autem subiectum

accidentally at an m U i cuiuscunque corporei mathematici est substancia

anv part ot lts a ~* r . .

produced quadrupunctaus, que est corpus minimum posstbue. Et
The soHdanglc proporcionaliter dicitur de angulo naturali. Anguli ergo 5
is in thc non dicuntur corporei vel superficiales, obtusi, recte vel

tetragon ot . . . r r .

four points, acuti, nisi quia eriectus corpons extenst sunt huius-

lb volume l modi. Angulus ergo formaliter denominat suum subiec-

possible. tum pnmum angulatum, et efficienter quodlibet subiec-

tum cuius ipsum subiectum primum est pars. Nec 10

oportet ipsum angulum esse per omnem ipso angulatum.

Ymmo sicut non per totum Ethiopem est ita quod ipse

est albus 2 m dentes, sed solum ad dentes, sic non per

totam figuram est ita quod ipsa habet posicionem 2 m in-

directum concursum linearum lateralium ad datum punc- i5

tum, sed solum ad illum punctum. In eodem ergo situ ade-

quato sunt angulus et punctus conalis figure sic angulate.

(2) As Et per hoc patet responsio ad 2 m . Sicut enim eadem

mav^be^ albedo partis est communis quotlibet corporibus iam par-

commonto ticipantibus sine eius multitudine; sic motus, angulus, 20
manv bodies, ' . ' 1

so angularity et quotlibet alia accidencia, tam respectiva quam absoluta.

cornmon Conceditur tamen quotlibet angulos, tam naturales

without bcing quam mathematicos, esse ad eundem punctum: sed
multiphed. ^ '. r

But we may non oportet quamhbet figuram ad datum punctum
m S any angles conaliter terminatam habere angulum mathematicum 25
cxist in one i nm ediate supra priorem : et eius mediatas habet an-

pomt. r x

gulum inmediate supra 2 m ; et sic de quothbet anguhs,
quoniam constituunt unum angulum naturalem, qui est
ophciter Jivisibilis, ut patet ex dictis de concursu et
communicacione linearum, et de quantitatibus angulo- 3o
rum. Unde ad omnem punctum mundi est angulus
componens alium, et tamen nullus angulus extenditur
per totum mundum, quia non est dare basem aut figu-
ram 2 m aliquid ab eo distante, respectu cuius foret
angulus. Sed sicut quidam vocant quamlibet figuram 35
quadrangulam lineam, sic communiter vocarent quam-
libet extensam posicionem figure ad conum terminantem
et circa basem eius, angulum. Sed ista tercia wulgaris
significacio terminorum est extra locucionem congruam
geometri. Ex composicione ergo anguli mole magni ex 40

36. Perhaps lineam is a mistake for quadratam. or some
citlicr such word.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 51

angulis inextensis potest patere composicio continui ex

non quantis.

Et patere potest preterea quod angulus habet magni- An angle has

B n6 a tudinem preter molem: quod sic arguitur. Capio | 3 S an- w^fjif^not

5 gulos superiiciales, qui equaliter constituunt aneulum quantitative.
n ■ 1 m i • • -r- , 1 akc a rii^ht

superhcialem rectam, 2 m doctnnam pnme Vitulonts, angle; divide it

que docet angulum rectum datum in 3 S partes dividere '"p^,!! 1 /"!,^ 1111 '

equales. Et sint illi anguli A, B, C. Capio ulterius 3 S an- compare it
, r ■ , , u ,• • Wltl1 a tngon

gulos superhciales equales, qui in y ns diversis super- of which each

iohciebus constituunt angulum corporeum piramidis trila- toonVo/th^ese
tere, iuxta sentenciam penultime difhnicionis undecimi partsj the

_,..,. . , , , plane n^ht

Euchdts; et tunc videtur quod angulus corporeus dicte angle Wfll
pyramidis et angulus rectus superhcialis sunt simpliciter trigon 1 ; thC
equales, quia eorum tercie sunt equales : quod repu- which, if all

' .... ^ . n x macjnitude ot

10 tarent adversarn maximum mconveniens. Certum est arigles were
tamen quod 3 S anguli mathematici superficiales con- would^bc? a^flat
stituunt quemcunque minimum angulum mathematicum contradiction.
corporeum; quia ; ut patet ex dictis, quilibet huiusmodi
angulus corporeus subiectatur primo in tetragono 4 01 "

2opunctalium in cuius cono situatur, et ad basem tripunc-
talem essencialiter terminatur; et cum in illa basi tri-
punctalisunt 3 S linee minime, patet quod estdare 3 S angu-
los mathematicos superhciales terminatos ad differencias,
3 S lineas ad constitucionem anguli corporei requisitas;

25 et sic ex talibus insurgitur ad angulum mole magnum.

Angulus autem corporeus mathematicus non est The solid
mole magnus, sed habet esse situale in unico puncto ^ngleTa^no

cum 3 bus angulis superhcialibus ipsum principiantibus. dimensions,
" l , , • • • on 'y position

Et preter hoc habet esse causacionis m quolibet of its apex and

3o trium punctorum sue basis causantis. Sic enim vere three^triangks ;
conceditur similitudinem esse subiective in subiecto simili als0 a causativc

.... .. ... . esse m each

quod mtormat, et causaliter, obiective, vel terminative, point of its

in subiecto, quantumlibet distante, a quo dependet. Et An a b n|f e ' \ ms

hoc habet angulus mathematicus ultra punctum, cum thereforc
„_ . . . , , r ' . relative, not

3o omnis punctus sit absolutus, et angulus respectivus. only absolute

Differt eciam angulus mathematicus corporeus ab angulo bc '' p oj n '[ kc a

superhciali, in hoc quod talis aneulus inteeratur quo , Tllc difference
, . . * ,. , . D ~ bctwcen a sohd

ad substanciam ex anguhs superhcialibus, tanquam eius and a

partibus qualitativis, licet non quo ad molem, sed angie^that

40 tanquam partibus disparium racionum, convenientibus the former
1 r r consists ot the

latter, as its
parts.

6. vitulois B. 10— 11. trilate' B. 12. 3 e (sic) B. 14. mic B.

39. qu via B.

6. Vilulonis = Vitellionis. Scc Logica, I, p. 18

52 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

Every physical in genere anguli; sicut figura componitur ex finitis.
composcVofa Non S1C autem de superficiali angulo quocunque.

great many Anculus autem corporeus naturalis quicunque habet
angles and ,., , ■ ...

substances. quothbet angulos et corpora, que lpsum pnnciptant;

mathemafical et patet quod non sequitur esse aliquos angulos mathe- 5
solid angle has m aticos, sunerficialem et corporeum, coequales, cum

parts the . .

superficial has primus sit indivisibilis quo ad substanciam, et reliquus

it caTonW be habet partes. Ideo angulus superficialis mathematicus

divided into non esl: divisibilis in suas partes, sed respective divisi-

the parts of * . . .

which it is the bilis in suos enectus, que sunt partes posicioms figure 10

cause, i. e. :l;i;

thc figure that sensionis.

strikes the a. V 11 dicitur quod Euclides, more suo, describit

scnscs. •

(3) Euclid gives angulum in predicacione 2 m causam. Nam ex ipso quod
definifiorfof an ^ue ^ nee alternate tangunt se 2 m applicacionem figure

angle; when n U am terminant in differenciam, causant angulum ad 1 5
two lines meet, ' . ' j-«* •

they produce terminum utriusque; et quandoque econtra dirhnit

He^likewise Euclides natura prius per suum causatum posterius;

caiis right lines L1 t lineam et superficiem rectas vocat extensiones; ut

and plane ,

surfaces patet primo elementorum. Speram vocat transitum

e tmu S a°sphere S dimidii circuli, ut patet libro undecimo; lineam ductam 20
is the revoiution m se J i c i t superficiem quadratam perficere, ut patet

o f ci s c m i-circlc

and that a line' libro 2°: et sic de j de quotlibet dictis huius philosophi^ B u6 b

toTtself^makcs Q ue ignorantes sentenciam universalium ignorabunt.

a square. Sensus ergo suus exprimitur per descripciones supra

positas, si non fallor. 2 5

No Nec obviant hec dicta sue sentencie, etsi finem quo-

r/be rumdam ipsum communicatum contradicant. Nam licet

divided as to nu llus aneulus mathematicus dividi poterit quo ad

quantitv, but ° ... ...

thc magnitude molem, tamen dividi potest 2 m magnitudinem respec-

be thus dfvided. tivam captam respectu sue basis, ut docet conclusio 3o

Every right primi et quotlibet alie conclusiones eiusdem. Et sic quan-
line may be ... .7 , , ...... . ,

bisccted, and tamhbet lineam rectam dandam contingit dividere m duas

sectfons"are medietates, quarum neutra divisibiliter excedit reliquam.

properly called r£ t omnes tales vocat sensibilis philosophus, satis vere

equal, so far as * J"

our senses go. ad sensum siiurn, medietates equales. Nam, capta qua- io

cunque linea naturali, contingit significare punctum eius

medium naturalem, quia coniunctus utrique parti residue

constituit duo equalia, que integrant suum totum. Talis

enim punctus naturalis continet quotlibet puncta mathe-

matica. Et sic intelligitur de centro circuli. Nam capta 4°

i5. duc" B.

34. Snnsibilis. In thc same sense as pliysicus.

mathematical
angie car

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 53

dyametro equalium punctorum, nullus punctus mathe-
maticus est eius centrum, simpliciter, sed punctus linee As imagination
naturalis. Et per hoc solvuntur conclusiones 3 11 libri repre^sent^two
elementorum Euclidis. Nec capit ymaginacio duo puncta p°ints that
,. . , c • 1- • j touch each

5 esse inmediata tn eadem superncie, ut lmea; ldeo negat other, Euclid

talia duo esse sensibiliter inmediata, ut patet ex A primi existence for
libri. Unde quererem a volente lineam dividere in duo the senses.

,. ,. . It \'ou bisect a

equalia, utrum medius punctus manebit vel corrumpetur hne, what

post divisionem. Si manebit: quare pocius cum una rrid^te print?

10 medietate quam reliqua? et si corrumpetur utrobique,

sequitur punctum quemcunque esse accidentalem sue

linee: quod est superius inprobatum.

Et idem est iudicium de divisione anguli. Nam nullus No angle can

angulus mathematicus 2 m molem differre potest, cum anolheMn 1

1 5 sit indivisibilis quo ad molem. Si enim angulus super- magnitude;
' , . ,. . n ........ , ° , ' theretore lt is

hciahs quicunque esset divisibihs quo ad molem, tunc indivisible in

angulus contingencie est angulus rectus, et angulus othe^rwlseMie

intrinsecus oppositus angulo contingencie essent equales angle of

11 .... . . tangency would

simpliciter: quod contradicit m $ iam Euchdis elemen- be a right

20 torum. Dividere ergo angulum mathematicum ad sensum
Euclidis est dividere figuram ipso angulatam 2 m lineas
pertractas ad basim et conum dictefigure; et illa vocatur
divisio anguli in effectum quodammodo similem ; ac si quis
divideret potenciam vel virtutem individualem in sua sub-

2 5 stancia ad divisionem sui effectus. Causaliter enim dicit
philosophus, 3 de Anima, ipsam habere partes virtuales.

Ex istis et superius dictis satis patet quod si A, linea Thus if the
mathematica, cancellat B, lineam mathematicam, equa- 'equaliy S fon| '
lem in medio puncto orthoconaliter ; et si, manente at r 'S ht ■ angies,

• j t, /-• a\ i i- and then B ls

3o utraque recta contmue, sed B (lnmota A) declinet suc- turned round

cessive, quousque fuerit directe supraposita B, mediis ^with^A^the 65

punctis continue se tansentibus, quod statim cum A central points
r . . . remainmg

mcipit declinare ab angulo recto ad acutum, movendo the same
2 m quemlibet eius preter punctum contactus, incipit A it as s e V °j| nt
35 simul tancere multa puncta mathematica in B; quia that A, from

° . r . . ^ the momcnt lt

aliter quemlibet punctum circumstarent lnnnita puncta, is no longer
et minimus gradus superioritatis vel cuiuslibet denomina- perP wjn 1CLI ai
cionis continue, sicut et quilibet angulus in sua sub- touch man Y

' .... . ot tlie points

stancia foret in infinitum divisibihs; que omnia sunt ot B.

40 inpossibilia; ideo et antecedens.

Et ex istis patet responsio ad illam famosam racio- A celebrated

,. • • , • • t - araument

nem contra dictam opinionem de composicione contmui aga j„ st our

doctrine: the
diagonal of a

23. filbe B. sc] " are alld its

54 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

sidc would ex non quantis, qua probatur ex illa sequi quod omnis
^Length dyameter quadrati sit equalis | suo lateri; quia, si non, B 117"

for the numbcr srt A B G D quadratum cuius A dyameter non sit

ot points ln n . J

both are equal. equalis A B lateri. Contra: precise tot sunt puncta- in

lf we draw A r>- • a r^ i- a » 3

parallels from A. B sicut in A D : ergo, sunt equaha. Antecedens

one side ofthe p ro batur ex hoc quod si a quolibet puncto A B linee
squarc to thc ' ^ n . <

other, protrahatar ex transverso eque distanter ad costam

intersect the quadrati linea recta usque ad C D, tunc de facto

diagonal in onc tanseret quelibet talis in utroque latere quadrati et eius

pomt; so . . . . .

to each point dyametri unicum et disparem punctum a reliqua linea. 10
there will Ex q 1 - 10 plane sequitur cum veris quod precise tot sunt
con-espond puncta in data dyametro ut in costa.

one point ot * J

the diameter. Istud argumentum peccat in materia, cum quelibet
that as these datarum linearum oblique et non orthogonaliter dividit

parallels datam dyametrum, et per conseauens contineit aliamiS
intersect the J . r . " &

diagonal tangere multa eius puncta, sicut patet ex nota proxima.

obliquelv, they NT , • ,• ,• •,,

will each ^ ec ex "oc sequttur ahquam hnearum lllarum esse

touch sevcral cufvam, vel reeulariter dyametrum esse duplam, aut
points. ' ° J l '

If the lines 3P'am ac j CO stam, propter numerum duplum aut ^P' 11111

other some of punctorum integrancium. Stat enim illas lineas sic sec- 20

the points they tantcs dyametrum tancere eadem puncta, cum omnes
touch will . - ° . r .

cotncide. tnmediate tangunt omnta sua puncta reciproce.

^rs/xhesc Sed argumentatur contra illud, supponendo omnes

parallcls lineas de quadratis esse rectas et in eadem superticie,
would no . i . . . . . ' . '

longer be tuxta peticionem primam prtmi Euclidis. 2° supponitur 25

2 na. Tneydo omnes dictas lineas transversales a latere ad latus esse

nottouch incommunicantes. Et ^ areumentatur sic : quilibet
cach other. *j o 1

3 ra . Each punctus ad dyametrum est captLts in aliam partem
interseaing thc alicLiius istarum linearum transversalium, sicut et qui-

diagonal in a libet pLtnctus date superficiei quadrate; et aliqua earum 3o
ditterent part r r " ' . ^

of its extent, habet duo vel 3 a pLtncta date dvametn, nulla com-
they touch municante cum reliqua. Ergo quelibet habet totidem.

cannot be j£ x q UO sequitur quod omnes ille simLil habent in 2P 10
countcd 1 • 1 1

togcthcr. vel tn 3P' plura puncta date dyametri quam sunt

puncta alterius lateris iniciativa omnium illarum, et 35
stat conclusio; scilicet, quod quelibet dyameter est 2P ,a
vel 3i l|a ad latus sui quadrati.
Here we deny j> r o isto oportet negare conseqLtenciam. Pro quo
consequence. notandum, quod si una illarum linearum transversalium
touch only one caperet in partes multa puncta date dyametri, et alia 40

i". vnic B. 24. dcq'9 1S. 28. dyamet' B. 38. Pro — con-

sequenciam in marg. B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 55

non, tunc non esset color in consequencia. Sed sic est point of the
, •■ , -i •,• tvt diaeonal, and

in quolibet quadrato sensibih: ergo, etc. Nam m rm- ano tner several.

nimo quadrato, sicut et in quotlibet figuratorum punc- ln ^ smallest
^ ' n D ' pnssible square,

torum quo ad nos, dyameter est equalis suo laten; the number of

t i- t t .. points (twoi

5 quia utraque eque punctalis. 1 ales autem sic, cum *j s eqU ai foi .

sint extra illud subiectum primum geometrie, non sunt tlie djagonal

\ ° . and the side;

directe de eius consideracione. Ideo non mirum si but this is
descripciones et proprietates figurarum geometricarum scope of 6

illis non contrruant. Et in quolibet quadrato due coste T geometry.

° * * . In every square

ioextremales tangunt tantum duo puncta sue dyametn. the extremities

Alie autem linee intermedie, si ad tantum declinent ab touch only two

aneulo recto quod oportet punctum proximum contactui P°! nts ot the

. . n . . . diagonal.

incidere in suum proximum lateralem, inmediatum puncto The other lines

contactus, tunc tangunt tria puncta de dyametro, et touch three

i5aliter non. Ad quod concipiendum supponatur ex prius points,
^ \ l l ' sometimes

declaratis situs esse inmobiles, et quemhbet punctum fewer.

mundi in eadem superficie circumstare 4 01 ' puncta, difference

versus directiones 4 01 ". Ex quibus sequitur quod quilibet depends on thc
^ . ? * . l ■" . movement and

4 or punctorum mmediate circumstancium polos mundi change of

20 tantum 4 or situs describit in die naturali. Et si que- posi ^ ",^ f the

ritur in quibus instantibus, dicitur a michi probabili At the poles
, n ....... ,-• there are four

quod, cum punctus equinocciahs ruerit ln medio mter points touching

oriens et meridianum, tunc punctus inmediatus polo po } n ie ^"'ptane
versus oriens incipit per posicionem vel per remocionem surface, and

,i ...... . , tlicv move

Bii7 b de I presenti mcidere ln situm proximum supra polum ; onlv four timcs

et, cum dictus punctus equinoccialis fuerit in medio t he equinoctial

inter meridianum et occidens, tunc incipit dimittere P°int is equally
..... ... distant trom

situm lllum et incidere 111 situm proximum stntstrum cast and south,

vel occidentalem; et sic de ceteris quoad sibi. Quorum ^"st^and so d

'-,0 racio est, quia, cum punctus equinoccialis fuerit in on,

.. ,. ,. . ,- . ,. , the angles being

medio tahs contradictorie, tunc dividit angulum rectum equal

centralem in duo equalia, et per consequens ad neutrum ^^
latus declinat. Et cum nichil potest poni in esse ex
contingencia equali, patet quod racio est abdita apud
35 deum quare pocius est in uno situ quam in reliquo.

18. dras=differencias B. 29. quadralis? B;

quod s' B. 3i. <id" B. 32. adnetr B.

3. Figuratorum. I suppose that Wyclif means a square ot"
points, thus ' " ' ' in which thc number of points of thc dia-
gonal and thc side are equal.

56 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

We should not Nec verecundetur quantumlibet subtilis philosophus

^confess^oui- 10 fatere propriam ignoranciam in quotlibet particularibus,

ignorance of specialiter de finitate nature ; ut puta quare Deus pocius

such matters; r ..... ., ., n

it suffices that produxit hoc mdividuum possibile nunc quam tunc;
^God has 3 quare pocius hoc individuum quam aliud possibile, quare 5
ordered all pocius ponit polum articum in B situ quam in C; et

things ior the l . r * . •- j- • .

best. sic de quothbet alns, ln quibus omnibus dicimus quod

Deus ordinat istos propter melius ordinis universi. Et

istum gradum melioritatis ut plurimum nescimus ex-

primere in particulari. 10

As soon as the Cum autem inceperit plus declinare ad unum 4 or

movement . . ....

begins, it is situum semidyametrahum, racio exigit quod tunc tangat
"The^points^ punctus proximus centro vel poli situm proximo indi-

should change visibilem illius situs linearis semidyametralis. Et eadem

places by a . ,.,.,-'. ,

quarter of a est consideracio de quohbet circulo circumducto, centro n

re the U same is" ems quiescente; et de A linea cancellante B in casu

true of every superius posito, cum quotlibet similibus. Et ex istis
revolving L . L • ,, .-

circle, and convincere potest lntellectus quomodo linea recta,
'each^other! 8 oblique incidens super aliam lineam rectam, quandoque

This explains tangit duo puncta sua, et quandoque unicum. Et per 20
how two lines . , . ' . , ,. , ,.

intersecting ldem ln eadem superhcie tales hnee obhque se sectantes,

n °anglesf quandoque communicant in unico puncto (ut puta,

sometimes quando orthogonaliter se secant) et quandoque com-

touch by one L . . , . •,• •

poiiit, mumcant m plunbus, videhcet quando 2 m medietatem
S ° m more. S 5 anguli recti se secant, et semper cum acucius sese 25
Yet the lme secuerunt. Nec sequitur ex hoc curvitas alterius linee.

crossed is not . . . .

curved; Quamvis enim curvitas sit extensa, nulla tamen eius
C aMeast^iree 8 P ars situatur in situ punctali, aut in situ bipunctali;

points, as it se j primo in tripunctali. Ideo oportet quod omnis
proceeds ,.. r . . r •,•

from obhquacio vel curvitas procedit a rectitudine, sicut 3o

omnis inequalitas ab equalitate. Quia ergo talia tria

punctalia possunt esse eque distanter posita respectu

alicuius trium dyametrorum mundi, vel in aliqua

eorumdem, ideo stat ipsam servare rectitudinem.

Here we sce j? x i sl j s pa tet quod incertum est cuilibet hic vianti 35
that no one . L . . .,. ,

here below can de proporcione dvametn sensibihs ad costam sui

proportion of quadrati, eo quod dyameter, sicut dividit duos angulos
ihe diagonal to quadrati in duo equalia, sic et quotlibet alia parti-

the side ls; n . n • • ,•

for no one can culana per quorum medium mcidit 2 m partes: et

lines^toijch^in ' n tau posicione ignorari oportet que due linee ta- 40

one point only, liter se secantes communicant in unico puncto, et
and which 111 r

more.

[2. ca Rl B. 20. ta' 15. 40. quod quc B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 57

que in 3 bus ; et per consequens ignorare oportet pro-
porcionem, sicut et proporcionem anguli contingencie
ad angulum rectum.

Si autem quis theologisat dyametrum mundi oportere If we say that
5 constare ex punctis inequalibus, cum argumentatur th t h e w^orkUs^
non esse medium mundi simpliciter; nec quemlibet c . om P°sed of

.... . r . ,. . points unequallv

mundi intnnsecum circumstarent precise 4 01 anguli recti, distant,

eo quod, dempto impari circumferencie, ita esset; et th" re^fs aif

R .,0» sic diceret totum mundum constare ex punctalibus I pa- absol ute central

ionter paribus, cum altter mundus non esset simphciter and asserting

divisibilis in medietates 4 as etc. (et sic de ceteris par- symmetry^of

tibus, quo usque deveniatur ad indivisibilem unitatem); the P°i'its of
. . ... . - . . ,' which the

et posuent msuper quamhbet circumferenciam circuh circumference

oportere constitui ex punctalibus pariter paribus, sic there^can^be

i5quod non est dare simnliciter medium quadre, quin found no
1 i- -j- • j j- • ,• • •,,• reason whv

angulus dividitur m duas medietates simphciter: llh one point
nunquam esset racio diversitatis quare, pro instanti one pface rather
divisionis anguli recti in duas medietates, punctus semi- ,lian another.
dyametri proximus centro erit pocius in uno situ
20 proximo centro quam reliquo.

Illi autem qui 3 ponunt Deum posse ponere iuxta Or if we admit
situs punctales lineares alios situs punctales commixtos 5,^ po^nts^to
sine amocione alicuius situs, esset facile quod dvameter those which

. . , . ^ ,., J ,. already exist

quadratt esset 2"' a , equahs, vel quomodohbet ahter without taking
2 5 proporcionata suo lateri. Et tunc nec sensus nec racio p^op^ortionof
convinceret conclusiones geometricas esse necessarias, the diagonai

°. , ' to lts side

ntsi ex supposicione: quod credo esse verum, si non might be
intelligatur condicionaliter, vel de subiecto intelligibili, ^Geometry'
sed actualiter demonstratum. Nec probabit eeometer wouid then be

, . . . r ° . true only by

3o quod mter dyametrum quadratt et costam eiusdem supposition.
servatur utrobique eadem proporcio: scilicet medietas ge ometrician

proporcionis 2^ 1,e ; sicut nec probabit quod dyameter cannot prove
j ' ,. . , . that the

quadrati, costa eiusdem, et medietas prima dyametn, proportion

sunt 3 S termini continue proporcionales. Et per hoc \/ 2

35 medium sequeretur conclusio. In omnibus enim talibus ex . lsts ev ery-
. n . . ... where ln the

satis est mathematico quod non sit sensibilis defectus, diagonal.

vel quod sic oportet esse, suppositis suis principiis ye t been able to

possibilibus; et ad istum sensum concludit. Ideo sciencia re {"J | he t se

est satis necessaria. Nec scio adhuc aliquam istarum opinions.

40 3 m responsionum efficaciter improbare. Another

r-,. , . . , ,. . . geometrical

Et per hec patet responsio ad obiectionem geometrt- difficulty:

cam, qua obicitur sequi exposicione continui ex non '" thls s Y s, em

17. inq, B.

58 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

one continuous quantis quod qualitercunque est proporcionabile con-
ITto^another tinuum continuo, taliter est proporcionabilis numerus
as one number nume ro; quod repusnat conclusioni XI e 2 1 Euclidis, et

to another; .' 1 r . ° . . . _ . .

now this is the conclusioni 20 tl - 9 1 libri ; et satis expresse dithntcioni
incommen- 3 e 5 t! llD ri. Videtur eciam contradicere sentencie X 1 5

surable ^ Dr j que ponit quotlibet quantitates continuas incom-
quantities. . ., ..... . ,

mensurabtles, et quothbet locis ponit multas passiones

verificari de continuis que non veriticantur de numeris.

Reply: . q uo a( j i s ta, certum est quod omne demonstrabile

Whatever is ^- . . ' . n . . ... .

demonstrated m continuis est eciam potissime demonstrabile m 10
f0 quantides° US discretis, cum totum sit sue partes. Quicquid ergo de-

holds also for monstratur de quovis continuo, demonstratur de numero

the numbers ot ^ . . .

points of lndivisibthum qui tpsum constituunt. Verumptamen geo-

W consist. ey meter habet pro inconvenienti quod quantitas continua
But the ymacinabilis resolvatur in partes indivisibiles [que i5

geometncian J 9 . . f .

does not non sunt] sue consideracionts, vel quod quecunque

quantity Into quantitates, continue vel discrete, communicent in parte
indivisible sensibili aliquota utrique. Nec aliter vocant communi-

points, and ^ , ., . . .

dcnies that all cantes aut commensurabiles, si communicant m parte
qU a n comm5n Ve indivisibili. Unde nec in 5 to nec in 7 mo diffinit Eucli- 20

measure that is cles pa rtem ut descripcio parti indivisibili conveniat.
itselt divisible. r . F . ,.

Two lines, Non ergo sequitur quod omnts numerus totalis punctorum

sen m ' a b v ly e a C q n ' a1 ' linee sensibilis est par, cum stat totalem numerum

contain nunctorum unius linee et totalem numerum alterius

different '

numbers of sibi paris esse numeros contra se pnmos, et per con- 20
may nt be prime sequens lineas illas ad unum sensum esse in commen-
numbers. surabiles: ut patet ex 2Q a conclusione 7 mi Euclidis. Si

Ofcourscit . ■ ■ ■

a line were tamen omne continuum esset simpliciter divisibile m
twoateo/lSS- dLias medietates equales, ut 4 rills , tunc indubie seque-

equal parts re t ur contradiccio, si cum hoc omne continuum com- ?o
this would be
impossible. ponitur ex non quantis.

The senses err j7 t ex istis concipit intellectus quantus error contingit
very much m . . r * . ..

their, senstbus, considerando hguras, equahtates, et altas pas-
of°figuresf&c., siones corporum, cum hoc sit indubie verum quod

since no nulla superftcies est quadrata. nisi numerus punctorum 35
surtace can bc l . ^ , . .

really square ipsa constitutivus sit quadratus cuius radix est nume-
number oMts rus punctorum sui lateris. Nam ad istum sensum dicit

points be a Euclides quod linea ducta I in se constituit superficiern R 1 i8 b

square. n . ' . . ,

This agrees quadratam; et si ducatur m se cubtce, tunc cubum

d!fin"it?o U n Cl of'a constituit. Unde, sicut bis duo constituunt primum nu- 40

square — a line merum superrtcialem quadrattim, ita (capta linea pedali)
moved at nglit ' n -

i5— 16. que nnn sunt deest sue sue 13. t6. ofi°? B. 36. 9dtus B.

anples to its
own length.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 59

continens tot puncta quot sunt illius linee, constituunt

superficiem quadratam pedalem; et continens tot super-

ficies, constituunt cubum pedalem.

Ex quo plane sequitur quod non omnis quantitas Not every ■
■ • i ,- • i- • -u quantity,

5 cubica vel superhciahs constat ex punctis panbus; nec whetber cubic

omnis ex imparibus. Patet prima pars ex hoc quod co or si s s ? s ua of e an
omnis numerus circularis cuius quinarius est prima odd or of an

... .... even number ot

radix est lmpar, ut patet ex natura numeri circulans. po ints.

Ymmo quilibet numerus quadratus videtur esse impar,

io et per consequens cum quotlibet huiusmodi numeri

sint quadrati et cubici, patet quotlibet huiusmodi esse

quantitates ex punctis imparibus constitutas. Et a a pars

patet de quotlibet aliis numeris quadratis, quorum radix

est par numerus.

'5 2° patet quod non quecumque proporcio signabilis Nor are all

r /■ , *.,... ., square or cubic

est quadrati ad quadratum, et tta de alus speciebus quantities
figurarum. Patet, ex hoc quod qualiscunque est pro- rab?e?s?nce
porcio fieure ad figuram, talis est numeri ad numerum; numbers of

1 . ...... . pomts are not

sed non quahscunque proporcio signabilis est mter necessarily so;

2o U num numerum quadratum et reliquum: ergo nec inter . .

a , . thus lt is not

unam quantitatem continuam quadratam et reliquam. always possible

Ex quo patet quod nec corpus nec superficies quadrati to f or m n |f s hc

potest quelibet augeri vel minorari, servando continue giyen square,
r "l o keeping

quadraturam. the same.

2 3 3° patet quod ambiguum est philosopho si omnis squ ^- r po n ints ber

circulus sit quadrabilis, et econtra: ymmo si alicuius It is doubtful
, n . ........ . whethor everv

circuh quadratura sit scibihs. Nam, si oportet omnem per- c j rc ] e can be

fectum circulum constare ex punctis pariter paribus, ^,"^;. ™£

iuxta evidencias supra dictas, vel supra tactas, patet quadrature of

. ., ,. . . , , anv circle can

3oquod est lmpossibile aliquem circulum adequare quadrato, be found.

cuius radix est primus numerus circularis: et sic de

quotlibet aliis que non constant ex numeris pariter

paribus. Ymmo patet intendenti quod illo supposito,

solum quantitas quadrata cuius radix est quadratus

35 foret circulo coequanda. Si autem ex quolibet numero

pari punctorum ultra io, constat pariter cubus et solum

ex tali, adhuc patet illud de quolibet quadrato con-

stante ex numero ipsi circulari. Et ex isto patet quod ^jf^ f h f™

areumentum buffonis non sequitur ex dubio: cuicunque if we can find

° ^ a circle (or a

i. co" 3 pro contincnte B. 2. co us B. 7 . c'cu r P B. 8. c'cu r B.
29. sb B. 3i. p'g B. 36. prt culg B. 3g. z B. 3g. briffonis? B.

60 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

number) larger contingit dare circulum maiorem, dato qnadrato, et con-
one, and"a<>ain tingit minorem eodem : ergo contingit dare circulum sibi

a circle (or a yarem; sicut non sequitur: contingit dare numerum

number) * , n . , .

smaller than parem maiorem, dato numero circulari, et contingit dare

can find a numerum parem minorem eodem: ergo, contingit dareb

circle or numerum simpliciter sibi parem.
number equal . r ....

to it. Radix autem ambiguitatis hums materie est ex hoc

The root of the , • , ■ •, • • c v

difricuity is that quod nemo scit de quovis numero sibi lnhnito, utrum

the number ot s j t p ar ve [ inipar. Et per consequens non scit de totali

points is * r .....

infinite/or us numero punctorum mundi sue circumferencie vel dyametn 10

and wc do not sue ? sl Slt P ar ve l impar; quia viden potent quod, si

know whether numerus totalis punctorum sit pariter par, consequi ad

even. hoc numerum punctorum sue dyametri esse pariter

parem, eo quod, diviso totali sith mundi in duas me-

dietates equales incommunicantes, situs centri indivisi- i5

ihe sensible D jij s cum n eutra se teneret. Ideo videtur quod 6 puncta

centre ot the . .. r

world consists mathematica conglobata constituunt cum alus centrum

mathematical sensibile ; et sic quelibet mundi dyameter foret pariter

pomts taken p ar cu i us un a medietas se teneret cum una medietate

together. .

Every line can quantitatis mundi, et alia cum reliqua. Videtur eciam 20

be circled or , ,-, t ,• , , , .,•

squared ; thus quod quelibet hnea sit circulans, sicut quadrabihs, et

everv square p er consequens quodlibet quadratum equale circulo, et
can be equal lo 1 / . . . .

a circle; but econtra, si non obsit maxima magnitudo. Totum istud

we cannot here - • •, •, ■ • ,-,• ,- • • ,

go into details. requint sensibile scrutinium diiigenter dispositi, quod

iste locus ex tam multiplici non permittit. 25

Another £ t s j areumentatur ulterius sequi ex oposicione quod

objection : the ° " . . ' . . "

smallest quadratum et qualiscunque figura minima sit circulus,
oUier tigure) dicitur ut supra quod tales figure minime sunt extra

possibie is a consideracionem eeometri; ideo descrinciones figurarum
circle. . . ° . . . l r

These quas ipsi ex opposito distingwunt, non realiter illis 3o

intinitesimals • ■ • t c ,- , ^ ■

are bevond the conveniunt: sed sicut hgure ahunde sunt m suis premor-

province of j us | C onfuse, sic fieure corporum in suis primariis ele- B iiq"
geomctry, and '. . -, .

the names of mentis. Unde prima figura, que [estj triangulus constans

do not properly ex 3 bus punctis, dici potest primus circulus cui insit sum-

denote them; mus p ra j us circularis, que est indivisibilis quo ad mo- 35
or rather these ° . . . : . , .

Dodies are lem : et illa est simplicissima superficies. 2 a figura est
time triangles quadratum 4 01 ' punctorum, que, posita 2 m 3 S dyametros,

(squares, constituunt minimum corpus; sed et huic figure con-
pentagons, . . . r . ...

hexagons, venit circulus, sive spera, et illa spencitas est maxime
ancfcircles- arcuosa, multiplicata per totum, cum sit primus gradus 40

8. deq'uis B. 25. ml" B. 3o— 3i. r'"tit' illis gut B. 33. cst

decst B.

CAP. IX. LOGIGA. 6l

et simplicissimus. V 1 fieura est penthagonus qui 2 m or if one point
1 . . ° ° . . . . of tlic four last

diversam posicionem potest esse circulus vel pyramis. j s no t on the

Si enim punctum aliquem inmediate circumstent 4 01 ' py.-amid^s "(of
puncta in eadem superficie, tunc ille punctus est centrum ihree, four, five

.,.,,.,, • , • and six sides)

5 circuh habentis duas dyametros tnpunctales; et quia and spheres.

illud centrum communicat cuilibet earum, ideo est ^'['"hiTin^.

quelibet 4 01 ' semidyametrorum bipunctalis, et circulo

circumferencie ex 4 01 ' rectitudinibus et 4" 1 ' curvitatibus

causata. Si enim 4 01 ' punctis, contituentibus primum

iocorpus, addatur conaliter 5 US punctus, tunc erit confusa
pyramis, 4 a figura est exagonum constans ex sex punc-
tis; et illa potest esse linea, superficialis, vel corpus,
sicut due proxime, 2 m diversitatem posicionis suorum
elementorum. Et potest esse superficies 4 a,1 s ula , vel

i5exagonum; et sic confuse circulus vel triangulus habens
quodlibet laterum tripunctale; et patet consideranti
figuras numerorum, de quibus 8 Euclidis et secundo
Aristotelice Boecii. Et in casu quo sit corpus, potest
esse spera, vel pyramis, vel exagonum imperfectum. 5 a

20 figura est eptagonum, ex 5 e punctis constans; et illa
potest esse linea, superficies, vel corpus, 2 m diversum
modum posicionis; sibique competit perfectius racio
spere, dum versus 6 differencias circumstant 6 puncta,
7 m quoad centrum.

25 Unde 2 m istas 5 e figuras numerorum primorum The ancients
posuerunt antiqui 5 e species corporum simplicium, a tnese'tive 10
secundum 4 01 ' elementa, et s tum neutrum ; et istas 5 e , figures,

^ '. ° . . ' ., admitted five

hguras appropnarunt ordinate tstis 5° corponbus, ut simple bodies:

patet per Themistum super 3 11111 celi et mundi. Et ad ^nd^fifth*'

Soexemplar istorum sunt tantum s e figure corporee regu- (primalmatter?)

lares, ut patet 13 elementorum, conclusione iy 1 ; et neither;

hinc sunt tantum 5° figure repletive loci; ut patet 3 the niy r fi V e ,s °

de celo 68°. Hinc eciam exemplantur 7 cm species regular

. . volumss*

speculorum regularium, ut patet libro 5 Vitulonis, con- and there are

35 clusione 8. Ex istis colligitur quod prima omnium r e L n V u C ia r s m f r s r o°rs.
fieurarum, quo ad elementarem composicionem, est Thc triangle is
? , • r ■ ■ 1 z: 1 the first ot

tnangulus; et pnma ac perrectissima quo ad hnalem figures as to
causacionem est circulus. Unde licet Euclides prius the^cTrcie^as' to

perfection.

18. -2. f,° ap ce boe n B. 24. q B. 25. a" n B. 27. 5" B.

28. ap'parut B. 29. f'r B. 33. 68° B.

34. Vitellionis. See above, pag. 5i.

62 JOHANNIS WYCUF CAP. IX.

tractat de triangulis quam de circulis; tamen primam

passionem trianguli demonstrat per diffinicionem circuli,

innuendo quod circulus sit triangulo prior perfeccione

causalitatis.

Sensc cannot In omnibus istis oportet sensum sollicitari, cum non 5

conceive this, . . ... - . . , . , ,. ,

■ and must capiat ista dicta. Licet enim Jongitudo linee mathema-

a,W troulle e US lice et l^titudo superficiei mathematice capiantur a
Even our sensu in aliis, non tamen in subiectis suis primis:

intellect can .... . . , ... . .

but confusedly sed et lntellectum viancium oportet subtilitatem lstius
P here' b° lo\\ S ' mater i e plurimum ignorare. Necesse est namque duas 10
lineas rectas inmediate poni in divisione mundi, et ab
eisdem terminis oportet duas lineas indentatas progredi
sic, quod una habeat in partem quemlibet datorum
punctorum parium linee inmediate supponente; et
econtra de altera; sic quod, quot sunt combinaciones i5
parcium talium rectarum linearum, tot sunt diversitates
possibiles linearum equalium terminatarum ad eosdem
terminos, sine hoc quod aliqua diversiter sit curvata;
sicut eciam corpus mathematicum componitur intrin-
sece | ex superficiebus, punctis, et lineis, sic stat cor-Biio b
poris mathematici unam terciam esse corporeitatem,
2 am superficiem, et 3 am lineam sive punctum; et sic de
quotlibet combinacionibus. Nec est hoc plus incon-
veniens, sed longe plus patulum, quam quod figura,
numerus, vel relacio, componatur ex partibus disparium 25
specierum. Et racio est, quia subiecta inmediata istorum
sunt substancie materiales, corporee, superficiales, vel
lineares, que omnes (eiusdem speciei specialissime)
integrant idem. Ideo oportet quod adequata eorum
accidencia coextensa integrent eandem magnitudinem 3o
vel figuram. Non autem componitur accidens extensum
de accidentibus disparium specierum, que quidem acci-
dencia informant subiecta inmediata disparium specierum ;
quia talis forma foret etrogenia et non simplex.
Thc greatest Et ex istis patet quod est dare maximum et minimum 35

possible aiiiile , ., ., . , .

is thc angle in angulum possibilem; maximum, ut anguium m centro
'the^woHd"' munu ^> causatum ex incidencia duarum linearum in-

cansed by two mediatarum semidyametrimundi oppositis. Minimus autem
lines, each of

which is
tangent to half
of its diamcter; 21. 3* 1 " 1 B. 38. o'P B.

10. Intellectum . . . ignorare. As if to illustrate this truth
morc clearly, Wyclif gives us a long paragraph that seems in-
comprehensible. There is no doubt, however, that there are
mistakes in the text; as, supponente (\. 14), agreeing with nothing.

CAP. JX. LOGICA. 63

angulus est figure cuius basis est bipunctalis, et cuspis the smallest

i- r* 1 . * 1 lias two points

quantumcunque linealiter prolata. Angulus autem con- toi . j ts f, ase>

tin^encie datur, sicut et quicunque alius corporeus; et and ' lts aoex
.'?., ■ • n • • • • • as far ort as

cuuibet angulo m proporcione finita nosctbili, si non possible.
5 obesset ignorancia comparandi.

Quotlibet sunt talia argumenta, quibus multi nituntur Wc have now
inpugnare dictam sentenciam. Sed ex predictis sumi principal ie
potest responsio ad maiorem partem areuciarum quas arguments

... ..... r . ° n drawn trom

aln multiplicant m hac parte. In tsta namque materia geometry, and
10 particularius et diffusius sum disgressus, ut hic dicta this question°

occasionem dent posteris ad considerandum subtilius more . at len^th,
. . r . . . that lt may bc

composicionem continui ex non quantis. propcrly

Tercio, videtur sequi quod nichil potest rarefieri, nec Third

duo corpora coextendi. cum materia prima non potest Objechon.

i5componi ex suis partibus intensivis, et sic non esset rarefactiqn or
1 •.. • i_«.-v • L'i- • ,• condcnsation is

dare situm corpons subtilis, mmobilis, quem mgredi possible;

potest quodcunque corpus glorificatum, ut theologi lo- s b / nor ailv ,

cuntur. Nec essent elementa in mixtis, sed corpus quanti- which gloritk-d

tative compositum ex non corporibus, et motus ex non pass; '

20 motibus, et esset status in utroque termino lacionis ^ the e, . emtnt s

' n are not ln their

motUS. compounds;

Hic dico quod dupliciter est rarefaccio intellecta : moveme^is
primo modo, quod corpus occupans situm corporeum , made , u - p , ot -

r . . ' . l . r r . that which is

sme adquisicione materie successive occupet situm neithcr.

, • Answer.

2b maiorem ad omnem eius punctum per egressum parcium Rarefaction and
intensivarum materie, vel quomodocunque aliter. Et condensation

n . ^ mav mean that,

correspondenter de condensacione. Sed talem rarefac- vvithout any

, , , addition or lbss

cionem vel condensacionem credo non posse esse, ot - matter a
sicut nec rarefaccionem infinitam vel condensacio- bod y ma y

occupy morc

3o nem ad punctuale. Et sic de multis varie ymaginatis or less spacc;

in ista materia. Non enim potest aliquid rarefieri, nisi C onsider to bc

vel per extensionem, vel per evaporacionem materie impossible.

inbibito corpore alieno; et econtra de condensacione.

Unde 2° modo dicitur aliquid rarefactum, quod sine

35 pluri sui materia partes eius ponuntur extensius per

intrinsecam occupacionem corporis alieni. Sic enim Or the words

,-, . . mav sianifv

spongio compressa dilatatur per mgressum aeris; et that a body

simile est iudicium de lana, farina et cinere, et quotlibet occupies a

. . . . grcater or less

similibus in quibus est intercapedo notabilis corporis space on

r-, , account of the

40 continentis. Lcontra autem, condensatur corpus ; cum presence or

arte conprimitur extruso cornore alieno, ut aqua vel absence of
r ' ' " another body;

c u spo B. 2. jitelata B. 3. datus B. 10. dcta-, B.

64 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

aere;nec aliam rarefaccionem vel condensacionem con-
vincit racio, experimentum vel auctoritas.

It is foolisli Unde fatuum est credere quod, stamine humido,
to believe tliat _ ....

a house is unctuoso, vel alio combustibili resoluto in fumos, tota

really tilled , , c ■ , . ,. c

with srhoke and domus lmpleatur fumis huiusmodi sine commixtione o

,\ n 'l a ".'i • aeris inclusi. I Et idem est iudicium de nebula exalata, B i2o a

or that nothing I _ )

but mist can que videtur sensui decepto occupare regionem notabilem

space sine commixtione corporis alieni. In omnibus enim

There are a i oc j s in n U ibus fiunt tales motus, sunt corpora subtilia
great many " _ ' *

interstices commixta cum materia terrestri, ut aer vel aqua. Nec 10

filled with . . , ......

subtle bodies, est dare in loco nostro, de aliquo lllorum, partem
lif, and water. se nsibilem que sit elementum purum, sed est quidam

All bodies are _ "... ' "

said to have imperfecta mixtio ubique locorum nostrorum. Unde
pores, even TT ,.. , ., , .

glass; Urso et alu philosophi ponunt omne corpus esse po-

tlns must be so j n tantum quod philosophus dicit vitrum esse i5

as the lighter ' .

elemcnts in porosum ; quod eciam oportet concedere, cum elementa

every , , . ....

compouiid fill oportet habere loca propna m mixtis, et per con-
its pores. sequens iuxta elementa grossa oportet ponere ele-
menta subtilia, quorum situs porus vel porositas no-
minatur. 20

Rarity and Unde notandum quod rarum et densum dicuntur

sometimes equivoce; nunc de posicionibus mixtorum, quorum partes
signity the sparsim aut unite iacent cum mixto corporis alterius

spaces lett r ...

between the speciei ; et nunc de subtilitatibus aut corpulenciis,
g^ven^body, quibus corpora dicuntur subtilia vel terrestria. Et in 25
and sometimes - sta equ i V ocacione laborant Aristoteles et Gilbertus Porre-

the bodies ^

which occupy tanus, hoc est, auctor 6 principiorum. Quorum primus

those spaces. . . . • •

Aristotle and ponit rantatem et densitatem esse posiciones, et non
Gilbertdela p 0n it ipsas esse qualitates. Primo modo loquendo,

Porde do not V r t n

make this possunt raritas et densitas solum mixtis competere. 3o

distinction. .^,«11 • • • j s

In thc first ^cd 2° modo celum est ranssimum; et sic gradatim
sense, only US que ad infimum elementum, ita quod terra pura sit

compound " > t r

bodies are rare summe densa, et celum purum summe rarum. Et cer-
in the^second tum est quod isti sensus sunt valde equivoci, et pro

the sky is the j sra materia cum diliiiencia memorandi. Raritatem 35

most rarefied, . ...

and the earth autem primo modo dictam dixi quondam attendi penes

of all things. magnitudinem situs quem rarum cum corpore alieno

Rarity ts tn CO mmixto occupat in comparacione ad peneitatem sue
direct ratio . « . r . . ...

with the materie; sic quod raritas positive intelhgitur quo ad

proportion oi • ■ , 1 ■. ,• • .-.

the rare sttum, et pnvative quo ad multitudinem matene. Econtra 40

element tn tiie autem Jcnsitas privative quo ad situm et positive quo
compound, and l ^ r t

in inverse ratio
witli that of the
dense element,

2(3—27. Polctanus (!) B.

^AP. IX. LOGICA. 65

ad multitudinem materie. Unde non opponuntur priva-
tive, sed quodammodo relative, ut magnum et parvum,
intensum et remissum, cum ceteris similibus.

Sed obicitur per hoc quod, iuxta hanc viam, quod- II . is u . r S e d that
5 libet elementum, proporcionaliter ut esset maius, con- the quantity of
tinet plus de materia. Consequens falsum. Probatur 3 1 *. element would
Primo, quia tunc ignis iuxta communem proporcionem depend on the
in iooo 10 plus contineret de materia quam terra. Patet occupies.
deduccio, supposito quod omne elementum superius sit F or s J«/ a gre
10 ad proximum inferius io' um quantitate. Consequens would contain

c , . , . . 1000 times more

tamen raisum ; quia elementa, ut supenora, minus matter than
habent de materia et plus de forma. 2°, quia tunc grln^thaf each
omnia corpora simplicia essent precise eque densa et eiement has ten

, times more

eque rara: consequens contra communem scolam que quantity than
i5ponit ignem in ea proporcione rariorem terra, in qua th tf e io"v i'"^

proporcione est ea maior; ut sic servetur equalitas Buttheelements

. • ,. . „ . , n . contain more

multitudinis sue materie. 3 videtur esse contra experi- of form and

mentum, quo experiuntur de quantumlibet parvo denso 'accondin^as'

generari quantumlibet magnum leve: ut ex uno pueillo their place is
■n- • .. • i- 1 ... , higher.

soaque, 10 puguli aeris ; et proporcionahter de alns ele- 2° d :

mentis, in quibus videmus materiam duci ad circum- A wou?™be tS
ferenciam, sicut econtra in generacione aque ex aere, equally dense:

1 . , . , . _ which

ducitur ad centrum: ut patet rn pluvia. Cum ergo non contradicts the

sit dare vacuum, sequitur quod elementum purum who ^ a s £ h ° o1 -

25 superius sit naturaliter inferiori rarius. contradicts

a j • j-^ 1 • t- t- 1 experience

Ad primum conceditur conclusio principahs. Et ulte- a little
rius conceditur quod, supposita proporcione tacta unius W m U ch 8 s"eam CS

elementi ad reliquum, ignis est in iooo' plus habens Answer i rst .
, . . , .... We admit

de materia quo ad multitudinem quam terra; et cum that,

3oomne elementum proporcionaliter habet de forma ut l! 1 i n n t i"f tl -l h n e

de materia quo ad multitudinem, patet quod in iooo'° m ' e has
11 ijr •,• , ,.. , 1000 times

nabet plus de rorma, et proporcionahter de ahis ele- more of matter

B i2o b mentis. | Nec derogat hoc perfeccioni mundi, sed pocius th but^also '

atestatur quod plurimum sit de elemento perfectissimo, 100 ° tim es

„. t • • , , . . . . . more of torm.

3o et mimmum de elemento lnperrectissimo mtegrante. Thus the
Verumtamen elementa ut inferiora plus habent de con- ekmL^Ys^the
dicionibus materie, et elementa [ut] superiora, plus de most abundant.
condicionibus forme: ut terra inter omnia elementa est

6. gus m B. 34. pertectissimum B. 3y. ut deest B.

8 — 10. ioool° iolum. We must rememher that the natural
place of each element was as follows; eartli, nearest to the
centre; then, water; then air, and rire last of all.

66 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

Tims earth is maxime possibilis inpressionibus peregris, ideo ordinavit
the most apt natur i s ip Sam constantem in medio mundi ad terminan-

TOiLClIyL * ^

impressions, d um copiosius incidencias varias angulares luminum
most oalpable. . r . .

least active and celestmm. Unde est tactui naturalion sensuum nosci-
least productive ^-j- minus activa et motiva; que omnes noscunt 5

ot movement; ' ...

while the esse condiciones materie et a condicionibus forme
superior bodies . _,

are less mobile, plurimum elongate. Econtra autem corpora supenora

and more sunt p auc i or ibus modis mobilia, perspicua ad recipien-

dum lumina celestia, ut sic sint media ad modum cor-

pora terrestria. io

Thefirst heaven i n tantum quod primum celum ponitur moveri unico
can move only . .... ... , . c , • ,

with one motu simphcissimo, et ahi celi mreriores plunbus.

simple motion, Qmnes celos tamen ponunt philosophi exemptos a

the others * .

with more; violencia, in spera servare eundem situm totalem, nec

but none can . . . , . •

be moved ahqua matena motus habente contranum transmutan. i?

agamst their £ t ^ e spera corruptibilium ponunt reeionem supremam
nature. * l ....

The sphere of ignis multum conformem superioribus lacionibus, et sic

fire is the most ° , . ,

like that of the gradatim usque ad terram: m tantum quod propter

sky, and so eloneacionem istorum superiorum a sensibus, quidam

downwaras. o _ r *

ponunt ipsa vacua, alii puras formas, et aln corpora 20

Sight, multum formalia. Unde lux, color, et huiusmodi sunt

co.lour, & ?.-. arc qualitates vitales, cum quibus anima intellectiva, suprema
vital quahties, n . . c

by which the forma naturalium, copulatur corpori tanquam forma
intellectual . „. . . . , , , , ■ • •,

soul is joined et motrix. Sic enim homines plus habentes de spintibus

to the body as j jjj t n -, a „i s ineeniosi: et in luce et claritate 2?

its mover. . ° ■ .

As men who proporcionali extrinseca tam homines quam bestie na-

have more ,. , . . , ,

lucid spirits turahter delectantur, horrentes tenebras; cumque calor

are more naturalis et humidum subtile extincti fuerint, cessat

mtelhgent,
and all. animals animacio qualitatibus mortiticantibus ad centrum ducen-

°so tlfe ' tibus. Ex multis talibus potest attendens convincere 3o

extmction of qu0 modo elementa superiora plus habent de condicio-
natural warmth ^ • , , , ,

and moisture nibus forme, etsi longe plus habent de natura materie.

2nd US i t S i s e quite Ad 2 am racionem, dicitur quod oppositum sequitur,

tlie contrary. cum rar i tate q ue est qualitas superhabundantis, dyaphana
1 he supenor ' " ^ r . . J . .

bodies have [excedunt]; et infenora, ut excedunt m oppacitate, lta m 35
m0I and anty densitate, que est qualitas. Non sic quod in uno corpore

transparency; equa li s q uantitatis sint punctalia spissius posita quo ad
the mfenor, ^ ^ . ,.,'.,. . J^ \ . n

more opacity locum quam in quohbet sibi pari. Et quo ad rantatem et

an But ul m ' v densitatem, que posicionem sonant, multas implicia ipsis

the sense of participant extra mixta. Pro mixtis autem sunt elementa^o
closeness 01 ' . r . .

panicles, only supenora magis pauca, et per consequens rarius posita.

compounds
are rare or

o 61156, 1. pe'gris B. 34. excedunt deest B.

S. Perspicua. The "crvstallincs", for instance.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 67

Unde, sicut semen est rarum in terra, dum paucum Seed is rare
semper gignitur in magna area; fides autem virtus est when t^ere"^'

rara in populo, dum in multo populo sit parum fidei little on a widc
. . r : . *" . , ' extent: faith is

sic in mixto terrestn est parum lgnis aut aens, dum similarly rare

5 natura paucos igniculos spargit cum multo terreo. Nec in a n<f in P a e '

oportet quodlibet elementum in mixto continuari cum terrestrial
,. • • . T , ....... , compound

alio sue speciei. Nec obest tah dislocacioni quod cor- there is little
puscula distancia constituant unam substanciam cor- when^thdr

poream; quia res communes dicunt nunc colleccionem proportion to

,. . ,. . the amount ot

iosuorum suppositorum, et nunc dicunt simphciter naturas earth is every

huiusmodi, sic quod tam homo quam materia prima, This™reaking
etsi partes dividantur ab invicem, manent perpetuo; et up of the

, ... - .... elements does

sic elementum, quamtumhbet fractum m minucias in not destroy

mixto, manet continue eadem substancia. Et per hoc snbstantial

i5patet responsio ad communem conclusionem qua que- unity.
. . . , Both the

ritur utrum elementum mixtum sit rarum, vel totum element and the

compositum ex elementis. Nam utrumque est rarum C0 S p ^ u , n J < L arc

■l LllUolcllt*.

B i2i a communiter, | sive elementum sit unum continuum per
totum, sive discretum minutanter sparsum. Et utrobique

20 est multitudo parcium rari, subiectum raritatis, quo
extenditur modo suo.

Ex quo notandum quod elementum quodcunque, The element is
commixtum cum altero, estprecise eque rarum vel densum com pound just
in mixto, sicut foret sine mixtura quo ad raritatem vel as rare or as

25 densitatem 2 modo intellectas; quia ad omnem eius outofit,
punctum intrinsecum correspondet tanta raritas vel "h?!'^ 1 !'!? 1 ',"
densitas absoluta. Sed super huiusmodi raritatem habet porosity or of
raritatem respectivam de genere posicionis, quam non but it is also
haberet, si esset a quolibet commixto penitus depuratum. when^not

SoUnde, ad concipiendum talem commixtionem, oportet completely

.... . pure of anv

primo capere unam multitudinem corporum dispanum mixture of any

specierum, constituentem quoddam unum; 2 oportet Totf 1 ^ 6 ! 6 , 1 ? 6111 '*

attendere ad totalem situm quem occupat talis globus; different sorts
„„ , , . . .,,. of bodies, note

et oportet 3° attendere ad quantitatem partis llhus the space

35 situs occupate per unum illorum, et penes paucitatem the^wnchf and

talis multitudinis disperse in comparacione ad quanti- b Y each part
, . , .,.. r . . ,. . ? ot a ditfereut

tatem loci oportet attendere lllius multitudinis rantatem. sort: thus

Unde raritas respectiva non solum dicit posicionem, l^c^oHts
sed eciam relacionem ad mixturam [et ad] constitu^ncia density.
^oquoddam unum; quia stat eandem terram inmotam
quo ad situm esse respective raram, et desinere esse

1. fe m B. 2. sif B. 2'i. mixtum B. 33. gleb, (!) B. 3y. atten-
dere illius multitudinis oportet B. 3g. et ad deest B; ib. 9sti cia B.

=1*

68 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

sic raram per gravacionem terre ex commixto relico

It is quite falsc elemento. Unde falsa et infundabilis est ymaginacio

the^rarerany 4 ua putatur elementum, eo quod rarius, eo paucius

element is. thc m aterie continere; ut precise tanta sit multitudo materie

less ot matter . . ...

it contains. spere lgnis, quanta est multitudo materie spere terre, i>
vel alterius elementi.
3 ri . There is no Ad ^ m dicitur quod error sensus excludit experien-

experience ° , .

where the ciam ; nam errando putatur quod gravatum manet

t ^!t c Lo7' Cf1 utrobique inmixtum corpori alieno. Unda ad tantum

1 Ollic WilS aU 1 A

foolish as to desipui quod putavi zimare, id est videre eciam vel alium io
tiiiiii'tii'iti
pigment mixed pulverem colorantem, cum terra liquata vel alio misci-

™J?J; a ,[3 ™£h bili coextendi; quod tamen est error intellectivi mania-

coextenueu witn ' ^

it, because the cus cum m inuta corpora iuxta posita causant fantasiam

. colour was .... . . , , . ....

apparently coloris dispans; sic quod credens solo sensut tudicat

everywherc. q UO j p er totum subiectum fit disposicio uniformis, '5

sicut in mixturis pannorum et quotlibet aliorum arti-

ficialium contingit fteri: multo magis ergo in subtiliori

The forms composicione nature. Et isto modo contingit de omnibus

' combhfation" 1 qualitatibus 2 is vel formis resultantibus, quod est dare

are not niixtum agregatum eis subiectum; et non cuilibet parti 20
q everywnere quantitative subiecti sui primi correspondet appropriate
compound. P ars an 9. ua tans forme; sed satis est quod cuilibet parti
When wood is quantitative illius nature correspondeat talis forma. Sic

burnt, the liery ^ , ,. , .

and gaseous ergo, quando lignum combuntur, partes tgnee et aeree
ascend on sparguntur superius, et commixte cum medio manent 25
high, but never C ontinue eque ma^ne, etsi exalerentur usque ad cel-

become larger . ,. .... , ,

than they were. situdinem spere tgnts. Nec credo quod expertmentator

ex noticia sensuali convincet oppositum.

In this case a Hic tamen ingeniatur natura, quod mixtum, multum

£t' C 'f!!. qL ,', ; !'t n !, N ,- terre habens, dummodo habeat parum ignis vel aeris, 3o

is generated, cum sint per contrarium dissolutum, tunc generantur

natural spheres, multe minuticie ignis et aeris ; et ipse, cum aliis qua-

previous^form c,am violencia cathenatis, petunt 2 m multas dyametros

(of wood) loca naturalia, pereunte forma superaddita continente.

Hea"un1tes Sic tamen congregat calor homogenia ad invicem et 35

and^dfsperses ^isgregat eterogenia ad invicem, dans generato pro-

heterogeneous porcionaliter de loco dicto, ut de forma. Econtra autem
substances. : , . . m , , ,

in resolucione gravtum que 2 m angulum descendunt

ad centrum. Et, propter istam intercepcionem medii,

inter levia que 2 m dyametrum moventur ab angulo, 4°

et extrinsione medii inter gravia que moventur ad

1. 905 B. 4. Qtine 1 B. 10. 3imar' i. vide' et^ B. 35. cum

vro tamen (!) B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 69

angulum versus centrum, creditur quod hinc inde sunt

Bi2i b absoluta | raritas et gravitas adquisite, computando cum

summo aereo totum medium interceptum.

Ex istis facile est videre quomodo pluvia gravantur; How rain is

5 nam nubem vel unbeculam, sive nebulam, in qua sunt S omiitimes hear

4 or simplicia cathenata, dissolvit nunc calor, nunc sometimes cold,
7- ... . . . dissolves the

rngus; et, segregato subtili terreo racione convemencie clouds; the
cum igne et aere, exsudat aqua formam spericam. terrestrial part

Et quia deficit sustentans, quo usque ex illis euttilis goes offwith

.... . . n . n . ° the air and nre,

ioaqua notabihs magnitudinis sit unita, ldeo guttatim and water
j_ ]•«. j _ • • remains, which

descendit secundum rormam maiorem aut minorem, t akes a

proporcionaliter ut exalacio commixta celerius vel tardius spherical form,

r r . . larger or

segregatur. Aquam enim, racione sue fluxibilitatis, stat smaller,
„_i„u: 1 + • j- accordina as tlie

coiabi: sed terra, racione constancie et siccitatis, diu- dissoluuon is

i5cius cathenatur. more or less

. . 1 • • rapid.

Ex istis colhgitur quod nullum corpus potest esse It is clear that

maius aut minus quam prefuit, nisi propter adquisicio- body takes

nem aut deperdicionem materie, quamvis putatur quid- , more ro .°_ m .,

- . . . ~ than )t did, lt

hbet rarefactum esse maius quam prefuit, ignorando is because of

20 situs quos perdit intrinsecus, sicut et ignoratur com- a __ed'to it-

mutacio situum extrinsecorum pro intrinsecis in par- and l ! ,e ,
. . r ' converse is true

tibus condensati. Et patet quod vera sentencia de rari- for

»--»„ ] •«. » u • . 1 • • condensation.

tate et densitate non obviat huic vie.

Ulterius videtur michi probabile quod non est possi- T , do not admit

. the possibility

25 bile duo corpora coextendi, cum nulla materia prima of two bodies

potest componi ex suis partibus intensivis. Patet sic. °s_rne y space. C

Conclusio opposita non posset verificari, nisi materia u that were

punctalis componeretur ex partibus intensivis; et tunc, matter must

rarefacta materia vel condensata per totum, vel rare- less intense,

3o faccione vel condensacione durante per tempus, ut which '? not

. . admissible;

adversarn locuntur, sequitur quod corpus motum in

infinitum rarefieret, vel in infinitum condensaretur, ante

quodcunque instans signabile; quia si non, da A pedale

terre uniformiter rarefactum per horam 2 m totum, et

35 patet (cum in quolibet instanti illius hore exibit a quo-

libet punctali materie unum aliquod iuxta positum)

1. bic B; ib. m B. 8. aliquando pro aqua B. i3. Aqua B.

14. colabr B.

26. One great division of parts is into extensive and inten-
sive parts. Matter, as such, must be extended. Heat, cold, intel-
ligence, virtue, etc, having no extensive parts, and yet admit-
ting of more or less intensitv, are said to he made up of
intensive parts.

/O JOHANNiS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

quod unice quodcunque instans dandum erit totum

infinicies quo ad nos duplicatum in magnitudine; et

opposito modo sequitur de condensacione. Illud patet

in paucioribus, ponendo quadrupunctale, si sit possi-

bile incipere per totum rareiieri, cum hoc quod non 5

incipiat rarefieri ad sui duplum; et patet iuxta com-

munia principia adversancium quod hoc incipit esse

maioris quantitatis quam prefuit, et cum non sit racio

quare una medietas, quin per idem et quelibet, sequitur

quod hoc incipit esse 2P |um ad illud quod prefuit: et 10

that is, it eadem est racio de condensacione. Ex quo patet quod

contradicts my repugnat composicioni continui ex non quantis quod

svstem ot ; D , r 1 *i

composition of aliquid per tempus vere continuum rarefiat vel conden-

tlc No" *" setur per totum, in adquirendo vel deperdendo continue
philosophical quantitatem. Nec scit philosophus fundare casus cal- i5

argument has ^ . . ...

value culatonos istius materie, in quibus quondam multum

against this • • - , •

theory. maniter msudavi.

b) Theolosical g e j p ro fundacione parcium intensivarum materie,
arguments. l , . . .

(1) Absolute argumentatur theologice lsto modo : forme absolute,

'irms^canW tam substanciales, quam accidentales, possunt ad invicem 20
;oextended cum materia coextendi, cum ereo idem sit iudicium de

iuth matter; .. . . p

therefore, substancns matenalibus, eo quod forme huiusmodi
"J.th^rnauvr! poterunt per s.e esse, ergo per idem materie poterunt

(2) Glontied coextendi. 2 a consideracio est de elorificatis corporibus,
hodies are ... . x .
coextended que ponuntur sicut lumina cum medio coextendi. Et 20

med^ium 3° consideracio est quod situs aut locus, cum sit acci-

through which j e ns absolutum, potest de dei omnipotencia per se
thev pass. . f l r

(3) position, esse; sicut concedttur de corporeitate et alns quothbet
^accident, quantitatibus, que videntur magis a substancia depen-

might possibly dere. I Cum tali ereo loco prius vacuo potest Deus B 122°

exist by ltselt; I ? r r

if so, God coextendere substanciam vel quodlibet accidens sensibile,
"two^material ex P aT1 evidencia duas materias; cum repugnancia, si

substances in q ua foret, oriretur ex impossibilitate coexistencie dimen-
that space. \ .' .!,,.. ,

sionum m eodem situ ilhs adequato, vel ex duorum

indivisibilium possibilium per se esse coextensa in eodem 35

situ indivisibili.
An infidel Ad ista diceret logicus cui non esset cura de creditis

wouhfsay^that nostre legis, quod impossibiliter petitur antecedens pro
one absurdity a ij impossibili inducendo. Sed quia necesse est totam

here proves r . ji

another:but tiuem catnolicam esse veram ; ldeo oportet proressores 40

Cath anLwer 1USt h uius fi dei aliter respondere. Quidam autem dicunt

ditferently.
Others say :

1 lince B. 4. fi' 15. 24. ofi' H. 26. 9fi'° B.

tor

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 71

quod assumpta, cum sunt supernaturalia vel miraculosa, We must not

non subiacent iudicio racionis; ideo est satis ipsa cre- 'wesimply

dere, nec oportet racionibus impugnantibus respondere, beheve, and

nisi forte responsione illa famosa wulgarium quod Deus, no objections

, • j- ,■ drawn from

5 cum sit omnipotens, potest huiusmodi hcet lgnoremus fettn

misteria faciendi et subtilitatem obiectibus contrariis IJllt } ° b i ect t0

tnat, because

respondendi. Sed illud non placet michi, quia per ldem any absurdity

. ... ,,.. . ., •, mieht be

posset poni opimative quodhbet tmpossibile, si non ma intained

dent expectari racionis iudicium, nec argumentorum thus -

10 oppositorum solucio.

Ideo, supponendo necessitatem fidei ac eius proba- So admitting

bilitatem 2 m singulas eius partes, suppono 2 pro ' e n a e nd SSlty

descripcione quid nominis, duas res situaliter coextendi reasonableness
* " . or taith, I take

quando per locum aliquem dimensionahter pertendentur. coextension

irHoc enim sonat iste terminus coextendi. Ex quo patet %mensionaf

quod quotlibet accidencia contingunt per idem subiec- existence of
" " .... twn boaies tn

tum situaliter coextendi. 3° dico quod minor primi the same

argumenti est impossibilis, et radix multorum errorum a nd liffirm that
infundabilis, si non fallor. Si enim materia aut forma Argument

' ... (0 is lmpossible.

20 substancialis. matenalis, vel accidentahs, potent per Any substance
se esse, tunc haberet quelibet talis propriam dimensio- existingby
nem, locacionem, et cetera accidencia: vel omnis res itself myst

' ' . . c . have lts own

foret substancia, vel esset necessanus processus 111 lnhni- dimensions and
tum in generibus accidencium; ut alias diffuse arguam. other^accidents ;

25 Non ereo in infinitum rara est terra ad quemlibet would be

... substance, or

terre punctum, nec suscipit substancia magis aut mmus we shouid have

in sua essencia, que est forma. Et idem iudicium de ^f^nfnln.

quantitate, ubicacione et situ, que omnia oportet com- Earth is neither
n * ... , mhnitely rare,

poni ex suis partibus mtensivis, si per eundem situm n or can it

3opossunt coextendi res omnino distincte, quarum quelibet b o C r ome s ^o; e

pars minus potest esse sine coexistencia partis alterius; andthesame
r r . .... mav be said of

quia, hoc dato, forent hmusmodi accidencia coextensa; quantity,
et cum sunt intrinsece presupposita ad accidens racio- ubl p t s ' i ° t " , n ^ nd
nale, relinquitur quod qualitative aut intensive com- They wouid

' " " n . have to be

ponunt ipsum; quod tamen superriueret, cum pnmum composed of

35officium quantitatis vel loci sit quantificare; quod eque ' ntens ^ v u e it Parts;

fieret, si non componeretur ex suis partibus intensivis. unnecessarily,

. r . r . tor they only

Inconvemens eciam videtur quod una pars mtensiva exist to give

numero sit actuata forma ignis, et alia forma terre; et ^ 1 ™^

5—7. licet — respondendi (sic) B. 23. ntiis pro necessarius; very

illegible B.

20. Materialis. From here to f. 176, end of Logica, the MS.
is written in a very bad, scrawling, flourishing hand.

dimensions.
can one
intensive part
of the same

72 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

be the sic de ceteris, quia materia dicitur relative ad materia-

and^another the tum. Ymmo, cum materia sit eadem essencia cum

torm ot fire. composito, sicud et forma, si essent 4 forma extense

According to r ' ' ~

that theory, per eandem naturam, singulum lllorum elementorum

\\-ould be esset singulum; | et cum qualitas aut quantitas per se Bi22 b

equally dense. existentes haberent proprias densitates, per idem eciam

in composito, et sic essent omnia corpora eque

densa.

As for (2), it is q uo a j secundum, quod est michi plus difficile,
more dithcult ..... r

to answer; potest dici tnphciter: primo, quod celum cedet medium 10
sup^ose^fhat sublimari, et sic corpus sublimatum ascenderet usque
the substance a j confinium mundi; tunc cedit a latere et non ex-

of the skv gives . .....

way ori one tumescit, propter nature regulam hmitantem. Philosophi
thegforified autem ponentes nullum corpus extraneum cum celestibus

body may pass. commisceri, ponunt nimirum quod celum non potest i5
Some , ' * n r

philosophers condensan vel rarenen, sed fundamentum est falsum,

wiihout proof licet inexpertum sit eius oppositum ; nec videtur cessio

tliat any ce \\ p i us repuenare nature quam cessio ienis vel aeris,

foreign body r . r °. n . °

can be thus cum tahs cessio non arguit densitatem. Sed videtur
pa bec ( ause le the" , ' generaliter quod nullum corpus potest moveri localiter, 2 o
sky, being n \ s [ aa omnem punctum mundi pars eius localiter

absolutely r r

pure, is moveretur; quia da quod non, et quod post quantitatem

incondensible. : ■ 1- a 1 •«.■!_■• ■

A difficulty: tocius mundi A punctus mutetur ad situm sibi mme-
nothing couid diatum, cum hoc quod aliquis punctus maneat inmotus

be moved ^- -1 r

without a (et voco omnia puncta mota ; oportet enim esse multa, 20
^ttufwhole 111 cum nullum potest exspectare aliud in eodem situ

world; proprio) videtur quod quodlibet expellet proximum, et
tor every point, r . r . n \ . r n r .„' ,.'.

touching its stc non remanebit aliquid mexpulsum. Fro 1II0 dicitur

' wcfufd' cause q u od conclusio non sequitur. Nam motus circularis
it.to change salvat illam instanciam; ut possibile est quemlibet punc- 3o

lts place. . . .... .

But this is tum vasis vel loci dati circulans mutare situm suum,
V °circular ° uno insequente reliquum circulariter, cum hoc quod

movement of non extra datum situm, quantum ad hoc pertinet, fiat
the points . , , ,-,•

disturbed. motus. Et hinc credo quod ad motum rectum lapidis

falis^U^reTiTa ve ^ alterius concucientis causatur in medio tremor cir- 35

circular cularis, sicut in tribus elementis nostris et mixtis in

movement of . . ...

thc air round eis concussis sensibihter esset videre; et si non esset

So iii the taus circulacio, moto uno localiter, omne corporeum

ascension ot moveretur. Nec est vis, quam celeriter circulus per

glonhed bodies. ' ^ . x

the rapidity of totum moveatur, ut quod motus ceh m tah ascensu 40

movement of

6. pp'as B; ib. defi t< " < B. n. subluan 15. 22. o,m te == communi-

tatem(?) B. 3o. sanat B. 3(). qua I?.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 73

corporum perturbetur, quia est dare statum corporum particles in this
quo ad motum. Nec sequitur motum astri perturbari not^hinderany
in tali ascensu, licet ex quolibet motu recto sequitur astral

, . _ , * . ,. ^ . movements.

circulans. Quando autem ent generahs assumpcio, And at the

5 stabit celum, quantum nos possumus sensu convincere. the^k^wiU^no

Nec repuenat quod sit talis motus circularis insensi- longer move,

.... r a n , , ...... . , . or will move

buis, cum tamen delectabihs sit beatts. Secunda responsio insensibly.
dicit quod est dare quantitatem supranaturalem, a qua suppoJe ^lat"
unum corpus erit penetrativum alterius, ut sint con- one Dod 3' ma y

- r , r . oi-j • i • compenetrate

iorormiter per eundem situm coextensa. Sed videtur michi another by a
quod illa opinio sit minus gravis, cum per idem posset SU q u ™j* y a . ral
qualitas disponi, ut sint quotlibet coextensa. Et stant But I do not

. * ... approve ot this

Bi23 a omnes raciones racte contra coextensiones | matenarum, answer, which
corporum, vel formarum. Deus enim prebet unam talem possTbiiity of
i5 materiam coextensam cum alia connectere, cum alia compcnetration,

. . . . and is opcn to

componendo, stcud et quamhbet partem quantitativam ali the
unius posset ponere cum parte alterius; quo facto, awinst"^
foret una composita intensive ; et sic difformis tam
substancialibus quam accidentalibus; potissime cum, ad
20 composicionem quantitatis cum extensis suis terminis,
sufficit inmediacio terminorum.

Tercia via dicit quod omne corpus plene sublimatum Or we mav

iinillvmivtlij-it

potest penetrare corpus celeste vel aliud dyametraliter a glorified body
sine hoc quod continens sibi cedat. Verumtamen, in any n ther body
25 tali penetracione est novi situs generacio utrobique, without its

.... ... giving way,

cum utrumque occupat sibi proprrum, srcud sunt m- because, having

communicancia quantitate. Sed illud videtur difficile bel^that^oes
propter tria. Primo, quod non videtur racio quare Deus not come in

. . . . . ,. contact witli

posset sprssrus ponere rn parte superrorr mundr corpora the sky, there
3o sic locata, cum hoc quod mundi convexitas sit immota, differenTsfte 3
quin per idem potest ponere quodlibet corpora loco for it.
corporum sublimatorum, et alibi, stante quantitate mundi g iorified'body
equali continue; et tunc nullum oportet ponere vacuum c *xh£*o\i\sA&<z

vel situs noviter eeneratos ex motu recto. Et per idem of the heavenly

, ° ,.. , . sphere, whv

oo rnundus posset recte pellr, generando srtus consequentes n ot other
ad motum. Secundum videtur mirabile quod aliquod ^f^t^AJrirted >°
punctum potest noviter poni distancius ad polum quam This would

. . r ,. , r . bring other

ponrtur rdem punctum, et alrquod punctum potest ponr difficulties to
propius, sed nullum precise eque prope. Nam si precise Aaainhow
40 eque prope, per idem potest poni corpus in toto con- can one point

e . r V , . . . v . . . . V be nearer to

rormiter ad trra posrcionrs prrncipia; et per consequens the pole than
adequate in eodem loco: quod repugnat poni. Tercio fartne s r £ °£ it

but 110 two

12. desponere B. i3. extensiones 13. a3. dyametrum B. 3q. prc- pomls eq nal| y
cipue after si B. neal ■

74 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

And how can videtur mirabile quod unus punctus potest interseri
between uvo inter quecunque duo puncta, nisi ex aggregato, posita

others that una linea, una constitui, et per consequens linea manens

touch, without ' . . . r n ... ..

having any recta continue posicionem, cum hoc quantumlibet licet

relation with ■ c ,-•.. • j c

them? crescere, secante utroque extremo eius hxo. Lt sic de 3

supposicione aut corporeitate, ut superius tactum est.

These que^tions g t tunc videntur parare demonstraciones eeometrice de
I leave to be . . r . " ...

answered by hguns. Scio tamen quod dicendum esset hguras dissolvi
merelv^sfaUng ex ta li cremento quantitatis, novis sitibus generatis,

that there is Jicet sensus non sufhciat ita discernere. Distinccionem 10
nothmg against .

faith or truth lllius materie relinquo theologis, hoc asserens, quod
in my doctrinc. ,, r- , • v • i • ..•

c) I consider it nulla pars hdei, nec verum aliquid, opponitur tsti vie.

an indubitable 3um argumentum claudicat, sicud et primum. Quan-
tact that the °. . .... ...

elements tum ad existenciam elementorum m mixtis videtur michi
remain in the • , , • , », a • .. .- 1 -

compound. mdubie tpsam oportere conceuere. Nara Anstoteles, i.-i
According to p r j mo de eeneracione, ca° de mixtione, movet dubium

Anstotle, a f . . . ...

compound in termmis; et tenens afhrmativam partem, dicit quod

alterTuon^and difhnicione | mixtio est miscibilimn alteratorum unio; B12:
umon, not \d eo diflfert a eeneracione vel corrupcione, ubi alterum

destruction and . . ° • ' .

production, as corrumpitur et rehquum generatur. Differt eciam ab 20

generation does. . • , • ,• • -i .

augmentacione, ubi ahmentum assimilatur aucto con-

servanti suam speciem vel naturam in actu. Differt ab

alteracione, cum oportet utrumque mixtorum esse sub-

stanciam per se separabilem a reliquo, quod non potest

Three thmgs competere quantitati. Unde tria requiruntur ad vdon- 25

are required . r .... . .".

for a eitatem miscibilium; primo quod sint bene minutim

compound : , •,• . ,■ ., , TT _ ,_

that its separabuia, ut sunt liquida et corpuscula terrea. Unde
eiements should m lapidibus, metallis et omnibus mixtis perfecti novit

be m a state ot . r '. r

fine division, subtihs expenmentator quando componuntur ex minucns

that their terrestribus, aliis humidis interceptis. Secundo requiritur3o
qualities should . ...

be to some contra contrarietas vel repugnancia mixtorum; quia

conflicting with aliter non resultarent forme superaddite pocius quam

each other, m p Ur i s> nisi quadam armonica complexione dis-

and that there posicio ex contrariis resultaret. Et tercio oportet com-

should be a r . ... . .

certain mixta esse proporcionabilia in multitudine, ut gutta 35

quantitative

proportion aque propter paucitatem suarum parcium non proprie

between them.

2 — 5. quecunque — extremo (sic!) B. 10. fp us pro sensus; and so

on B. 18. vino B.

19. Differt a generacione. I have all along understood gene-
ratio by 'combination', and also mixtio. But the ancients often
included under the latter name what we should call mechanical
mixtures. Wine and water was a 'mixtio'; but so was also gold
and quicksilver. The) r only spoke of generation, when there
secmed clearly to be a new substance produccd.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 75

commiscetur cum dolio vini; et proporcionabiliter de
aliis est dicendum.

In via itaque generacionis mixti conveniunt omnes All admit that

,.,. . -,, _ • , ■ the four

proporcionabuiter sapientes illam matenam, 4 elementa e lements are

5 secundum partes miscibiles commisceri. Sed iuxta mo- . mingled

r . . together ln the

dum loquendi philosophi negant illa elementa manere compound;

. c jjv _ • j 1 1 , :iud most of

in actu, dum rorma superaddita est mducta; quod iatum tnem taking
est a variis oninantibus. et terminative intellectum. ... Anstotle

1 . - . hterally, denv

Comentator autem ponit formas substanciales elemen- ti.at they exis"t

, • .... • • - „ :«. actually after

k.i tares intendi et remittt m sua essencta, cum ruerit combination,
media inter substancias et accidencia, et sic manere whileAverrhoes

. .. savs that they

in esse remisso incompleto cum formrs contrarrrs. Et reraain with
• ,, , • r-, . . • * less intensitv

rllud vocat commentator esse rn potencta. Fatet rsta of being. "

posicio 3° de celo 69.

i5 Sed hoc videtur michi impossibile propter tria : The latter

, . .. , • c ncsition seems

prrmo, qura substanciahs, vel essencia que est rorma jmp OS sib]e,

substancialis, non suscinit maeis et minus pocius de '• be cause no
' * ° . . r . essence can

substanciis elementaribus quam de mrxtrs; ut srcut have more or

•i-i i- t_ r • 1 „ * less intensitv;

ntchtl est rehquo magrs homo. stc nec aliqutd est nothip(T is more

.20 reliquo maeis icnis. Nulla ereo igneitas est reliqua or lcss m , an )

>■ • n a ^ 00 ... more or less

plus intensa. Secundo videtur innuere quod rn mixtis fire.

sunt forme contrarie coextense, et per consequens tam "seems^to 68

materie quam qualitates; et tunc nullum continuum believe that in

. n n . . , the compound,

componrtur ex non quantis. Patet deducro ex hoc quod contrary forms

25 infinitum remissa foret forma tam substancialis quam eadfolher 1 - 1 "

accidentalis ad quemcunque punctum elementi; et per which is
. _ . t r _ r conlrarv to

consequens m mfinrtum foret remrssa substancra talr our system of
forma, et non totum quod est tota essencia materie. '"polms. 6

Ereo relinquetur quod pars eius qualificativa. Non enim | n eyery point
n n . r . ~ . , . . the torm would

3o stat quod lllud subrectum prtmo stmul reciptat tormas be infinitely
contrarias, sicut patet de racione contrarietatis. Tunc ^resulting 1 6
Bi24"enim simul I haberet denominaciones contrarias, cum substance

I . . . would be so

quehbet forma, ut hurusmodr, intormat informancra too

appropriata ut, si est calidrtas, tunc est aliquid illa
35calidum. Et sic de qualibet forma substanciali vel
accidentali, ut patet de quibuslibet earum ; cum quelibet
forma sit subiectum vel essencialrter vel accidentaliter
formaliter se habere. Et tercio videtur quod 4 elementa 3 - Theelements

■* . . would become

contraria, que communtcant rn eadem materra ln nu- the matter of

40 mero, constituunt aliam substanciam : una quoque foret form SU and 8

inmediata materia forme superaddite, et foret formarum wouid : thus be

r ldentined with

one another.

5. niffibles B. 7. latum B. 8. V» (?) r' tB B. 16. fubalis (sic!) B.
18. clementariis B. 3. r . calliditas B. 35. callidum B. 40. una que B.

76 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

et materiarum processus in infinitum, et ydemptincacio

elementorum, cum communicant in eadem materia vel

essencia singulari. Sequitur enim, ut supra tangitur :

ista materia est de essencia huius ignis (et sic de tribus

reliquis elementis): ergo singulum est singulum eorun- 5

dem. Nec evitabitur quin quelibet pars quantitativa

unius elementi huius continuatur cum alia parte quan-

titativa alterius.

Modern Secunda est via posterius philosophancium qui ponunt

philosophers r r ' i r

think that the nullum elementum actualiter esse in mixto. Sed quot- 10

elements • , ,

ihemseives do quot auctores et raciones ad hoc sonuerunt, omnes
not remain sentenciant quod disposiciones et qualitates, quales

actually, but . n ' "

say that their secundum speciem nate sunt consequi elementa, re-

dispositions «■ ■ . j '

and qualitiesdo. hnquuntur in mixtis: quod, cum sit verum, non arguit

But r»', this quod elementum aliquod sit in mixto actualiter. Contra i5

the°definition i stam sentenciam videtur descripcionem termini militare.

ot an element, Nam elementum, ut huiusmodi, est causa intrinseca rei,

winch must be . .

the intrinsic nec pars quahtativa, ut exponit comentator, primo phi-
compound, 1 and sicorum et 3 de celo 6. g. Aliter enim diceretur celum
not merely a eque elementum sicud aliquod corporum 4 simplicium 20

quahtative part ... ^ r t r

of it. sublunarium; nec congrue vocaretur lapis aut lignum

sphere "s a cor P us mixtum, cum habeant materiam primam et
cause non- formam simpliciorem quam aliquod elementum. Si enim

existent m . .. . ^ 3

the compound, non sit ahquod mixtum, est dare llla ex quibus mis-
of"Tts elemen^ts- ceretur. Corpus igitur hominis non misceretur, nisi 2?
a stone would forte ex anima indivisibili et partibus materie prime:

have matter and .... r

form alone, et sic matena pnraa foret caro, os, nervus, etc. ut

than 1 ™ny er auas diffuse prosecutus sum. Ymmo terra pura, vel

element. aliquod elementum, quamtumlibet modice alteratum,

The human . ' . 7 ^ . . . '

body wouid be foret corpus mixtum, et composicius quam ahqua pars 3o
CO ot p primal llly q u antitativa hominis: quod et componeretur ex materia

matter and an hominis et forma, et haberet qualitates contrarias, quales
mdivisible . ^ n

soul; secundum speciem nate sunt consequi elementa. Et
utrobique est generacio reciproca. Nulla ergo foret
causa nisi ficta simplicitas talis corporis supra carnem. 35
And thus the Et cum caro, os, nervus, sunt eiusdem speciei specialis-

human body, . ' f . r

so complicated sime, quia quodlibet lllorum materia prima sine forma
in would be rtb ' substanciali formaliter componente, sequitur quod totum

simpler than corpus hominis, quod est composicius inter mixta, sit
an element. . r ,. . ^ r

simplicius elemento. 40

i3. A11 ff' m 15. i_|. sit cum vm' B 21. sublunari B.

= vermis li. 35. non B. 36. u 1 uus B.

GAP. IX. LOGICA. 77

2° principaliter experiencia phisica videtur repugnare. 2» a ; it is
Nam tam arte quam natura cognoscitur ex partibus explrience.
B i24 a mixtorum elementa I dispariter resultare, ut in dissolu- weg-ettbe

..... .... ,, , elements out o

cionibus lapidum, calcancionibus metallorum, et breviter the compound;
5 de vitro vel quocunque omogenio, quantumlibet fortiter so "\Yern 13 ' 6 '"
commixto contingit partem subtilem aqueum vel aereum as is seen in

. . i , ,• , - ... . chemical and

extrahi, semulento croceo derelicto; et longe facihus m meiallurgical
vino, sanguine vel alio distillabili omogenee. Et idem w™see S fire
docet natura patere nobis de carne vel de quocunque , proceeding

<...... , . ..... f rom putrefving

'° putrefactibili omogeneo, quod luxta regulam Anstotehs flesh or fish,
humo putrescit; quod humidum unctuosum, relinquendo
incineratum terreum, petit partes extremos quousque
maior pars aerei vel ignei expiret, propter vim movendi
et convenienciam ad locum debitum ex natura, sicud

•Mn sensibus innominatis; ut quercu putrida et similibus
est videre. Talia enim ; scilicet per subtile aereum et
igneum ad circumferenciam exsudatum splendescunt in
noctibus, cum naturale sit ex talibus luminosum fieri,

, , . , . .,.,.-.. . in the darkness ;

quod se ostendit m absencia splendidi forcioris: ut ln it comes out
2o culis catticis, squamis piscium, quibusdam vermibus, £/ cats C „c.
et in omnibus conformiter proporcionatis in partibus
superficialibus in tenebris est videre. Cum enim ex No action can
contingencia equali nunquam fit accio, patet quod ter- without^an
reum derelictum et igneum exalatum etc. in mixto fuerit cfficient cause;

.... the appearance

2? dispanum naturarum, cum oportet esse per se motum of ihis fire
habere intrinsecus motorem in actu, preter formam m ^H% ^ "lusa'
accidentalem. Et idem patet ex elaboracionibus olei de which is not a

... , , . ,., .,. . . _ . , mere accident.

minutis seminibus et de lapidibus silicinis. Et ldem Many other

patet de fructibus, floribus, et quotlibet similibus que uk^nature^

3o sunt in partibus superficialibus et intrinsecis: multum miaht bc
,. . . , ... , adduced.

dispanter sapiunt, odorant, et speciahter colorantur.

Sed quo ad isto conceditur quod in talibus mixtis 3 rd . But as they
est dare partes quantificativas dispares, sed omnes eius- are quantitative
dem nature quo ad formam superadditam, licet in parts that differ

^ r in the

compound,

4. calcaconiba B. i5. tt, ins B. 16. fp B. 20. cattis B.

24. delictu B. 29. q,l$ B.

1. This is the same argument as was lately used (though
with all the superiority given by reeent chemical discoveries) by
those philosophers who maintain the existence of atoms against
the revival of the 'Matter and Form' doctrine in the Neo-
Scholastic system. The idea is the very same. "We get oxygen
and hydrogen out of water, therefore they were there before."
The reply is: "Actually, no; potentially, yes!" 7. Semulento.
Probably derived from semolla, bran.

one being

78 JOHANNIS WYCLIF

CAP. IX.

more similar qualitatibus una quo ad unum elementum, et alia ad
t0 ^otnereto"* 5 ' aliud, plus accedat; quia aliter non esset racio quare

others, hut all car bo, lignum, et talia combustibilia secundum aliquam
having the , • i i-

same form and partem resolvuntur ln cineres, et secundum aliam

C nTtu?e" d inflammantur. Contra illud 3° argumentatur. Signo 5

we argue thus: totam multitudinem per C et totam multitudinem per
Lach element , . . , . . . , .

existed D, que 4° r dicit adversanus corrumpi m adventu rorme

se $tforfy superaddite. Et argumentatur sic: quodlibet istorum

combination, ,or f u ' n CO ntinue seorsum in loco per se sibi proprio,

and still h . . . , ,

remains in its purum a commixtione cum contrano pereundum, et ad- io

,herefore tio nuc manet q uo aa< \ essenciam, vel remissum paululum B i25"
new forms can i n qualitatibus, vel ipsis servatis integris sicud prius.

possibly result ^ n ,, L ... , ,.

from it; or if Ergo per nullum eorum superducitur rorma superaddita;
'will he' of 7 ve * s * inducunter hec quatuor, habebunt formas super-

very djfferent additas disparium naturarum. Consequencia videtur ex r5
nature trom the , , L . . , . . .:.. . ,

compound. hoc quod ex pari evidencia, ln quodhbet simplex con-

If one s°mp?c 0f formiter altera tunc induceretur forma supperaddita con-
body on similis racionis; et per consequens, ex quocunque simplici

another can . . . r ....... . :

bring a new contmgit per accionem altenus simphcis sine commixtione
kmusTbe very quamlibet formam superadditam resultare; et, ut videtur 20

different from michi, in quotlibet istorum quatuor induceretur forma
either. ' , ,. ^ , . . . . , . ,

superaddita altenus racionis, cum sit subiectum altenus
composicionis, sicud fuit inmediate ante induccionem;
et proporcionaliter ad materiam datur forma.
Additional Confirmatur tripliciter primo sic: inpossibile est 25

proof : '. r .

qualities that quahtatem vel accidens quodcunque transmutan de

inlhe 6 ekments subiecto in subiectum; sed qualitates prime, que iam

are now in the sun t i n m ixtis, condam et fuerunt in simplicibus: ergo
compound; , . ...

as no accident ad huc remanent ln eisdem. Sic enim sonant quehbet
^subjectto^ Ji cta philosophorum quod nullum mixtum est calidum 3o

subiect, they aut frigidum, nisi participacione simplicis cui primo

are 111 the ? , J, , ,• ,

elements stiil. competit esse tale. Nec valet dicere quod tot et tante

sayine that^new qualitates prime subito generantur, aliis subito corrup-

qualities are t is in comitacione forme superaddite; quia non est
produced and . ' .

the old ones dare contranum a quo debeant corrumpi, cum possunt 35

wlwshouid uianere in mixtis, nec efficiens, a quo tot et tante

they be subito generentur. Nec superest racio quare forent qua-

litates prime, quare possunt inesse in mixtis quibus-

libet; quia sunt corpora simplicissima sine ordine

5—7. 3° — 4 0r (sic !) B. 8. sunt pro super B. 10. peund, B.

23. f)onis B. 3o. callidum and very oftcn after B. 3q. quod B.

6. Totam. Evidently somc parts of the sentence are want-
ing here.

destroyed ?

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 79

prioritatis respectu elementorem se habencia, stante

sentencia huius vie. ConnTmacio [2 a ] est hec. Impossibile Contrary

est qualitates contrarias coextendi; quod esset, stante ^hoseftat 6 '

illa sentencia: i^itur, etc. Et maior patet ex hoc quod remain of the

' n elements when

5 omnis quahtas est siibiectam esse qitale, cum non sit fhese are no

potens aliquid per se existere, sed unitate accidentis, coexfstln^the

cum aliis eiusdem racionis. Ex quo patet, si essent same sut, i ect >

* , . and cannot

qualitates contrane coextense, tunc vel nichil esset exist

simul denominatum denominacionibus contrariis, vel n ow thenon-

10 Tessentl materie coextense. Et patet minor, eo quod, remanence of

. - ., . "l ' the elements

si torme substanciales elementorum smt per totum impiies this.

mixtum, sequitur quod et qualitates; et tota contraria, cannot^at^the

multis modis contraria. Tercia confirmacio est ex im- same instant

., ... ... . act and react

possibilitate reaccionis duorum elementorum simul et on each other.

i5semel secundum easdem partes; ut, posito quod A combination,

ienis et B aqua purissima commisceantur in dato the element A

°. J r . . woula nave to

mixto, oportet partem A reducere partem B sibi neutralize a

inmediatam ad temperamentum in qualitatibus, et qU ] a em en° B- 6

econtra ; et per consequens, cum hoc non sit nisi per which it could

. l . . . r not do unless

20 reduccionem quahtatis contrane, sequitur quod ldem it lost-as much

subiectum secundum idem sit simul et semel agens et contrary

paciens, in actu et potencia respectu eiusdem. Prius quality- so it

r .... . . would be at

ergo et pnncipahus educeret qualitatem contranam a the same time

se ipso, quam induceret post debilitatem potencie per s .^ e point oi

B i2b h qualitates instantaneas qualitates suas in corpus I ex- view > bo ^

. . . ,. ,._ ' . active and

trmsecum. Ideo, ut ahas diffuse ostenderam, reaccio passive.

non est simul tempore et secundum idem possibilis; ad take^place™/!

quam oporteret qualitates contrarias simul, subito, et ,, action.
^ ' . n . . ' My position is

tempore reciproce generan, propter talia multa que tiiat of

3o naturales sciunt adducere. Credo 3 am sentenciam in the^ekments

hac parte; scilicet, quod elementa sunt realiter in mixto c , xist real, y in .

r . ^ ... tne compound,

secundum situs et formas propnas, ut dicit Avicenna, in their own

primo causarum, ca° 3 , et alibi multis locis. piaces"

Sed contra ista instatur tripliciter. Primo, videtur Arguments
. . . . contra :

35 quod proprie non sit mixtio, sed tuxtaposicio corpus- I. This would

culorum; quod sic, habens occulos linceos videret com pound but

quomodo quodlibet elementum foret seorsum positum ; an aggregate ot

. "■ . . r atoms; we

et sic per idem homines et omnia genera corporeum could, had we

essent commixta in mundo, et nulla foret forma sub- e noush, S discern

40 stancialis superaddita, cum nullum mixtum foret vere evei T element
r apart; men,

animals, all
would be

cv ^

2. 2 a deest D. 3. gritas B. 6. accus B. 10. essent decst.

.'6. p'usfuma B; ib. fuma? B. 29. recijie B. 33. Ca?, B. 35.Txpo B.

8o JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

mixed up, and aliquod unum. Ad illud negatur prima consequencia,

lio^superaddcd cum iuxtaposicio corpusculorum, ceteris requisitis, con-

fbrm to stituunt vere mixtum, cum omnes vere loquentes de

\hem. * mixtione oportet concedere vel corpora parva, vel ma-

The aggregatc terias corporum, iuxtaponi, et per formam superadditam 5

of atoms is thc continuari. Licet autem nullus oculus corporalis sufticit
compound . .

itself. cognoscere appropnatos situs corporum commixtorum;

YowThev^are Deus autem distinctissime, et intellectus humanus con-

placed, but God f use cognoscit posicionem in quolibet mixto perfeccius

mindWiws in huiusmodi situs dari. Et sic conceditur homines com- 10

^f^fnlAVthl 6 misceri ad invicem cum aliis, et proporcionaliter de

compound ceteris partibus huius mundi, sed non ad finem quod

theirVositlon. forma substancialis resultet constituens mixtum sub-

^ttogsirc' stanciale disparis speciei; et solum tale mixtum ad

indeed mixed propositum est naturale cuius quelibet pars quantitativa 1 5

anotherTbut in actu, que potest per se existere sub tali specie vel

dislinguisned P er se sentiri: quod philosophi secundum gradum mi-

by their nimum vocant minimum naturale. Nec obest materiam

suEstantial formatam suscipere super illam formam superadditam

form. disparis racionis. 2 °

II. The 2° videtur quod ad omnem punctum materie mixte

form'cannot non sit forma superaddita, et per consequens cum per

po\nt a of a tHe totum sit eius privacio, sequitur quod nusquam sit talis

compound, forma; quia nec indivisibilis, nec extensa. Ad illud

elemental forms dictum est superius, quod forme substanciales, ut a 25

are every- ma t e ria elevaciores, sic sunt a condicionibus materie

wnere) :

it is therefore remociores ; ut forma corporeitatis vel forma elemen-
Wereply tiiat taris secundum aliquos est situaliter secundum partes
form^artfmore punctuales materie;et quelibet forma materialis super-
eievated above addita determinat sibi certam multitudinem elementorum 3o

matter, they are . . . . , • , •

less subject to constituencium mmimum naturale; et sic grauatim
conditfons. ascendendo quousque deveniatur ad animam hominis,
que est finis formarum de quibus considerat philosophus
naturalis, ut patet 2° phisicorum. Nec extenditur mi-
nima forma per subiectum suum primarium, sed est ad 35
quemlibet eius punctum indivisibiliter quo ad molem ;
et quotlibet tales indivisibiles constituunt formam super-
Each form is additam mole magnam : Et sequitur quod tota sit ad
thewtoleWts omnem | punctum sui subiecti primi secundum aliquam B 126*
subject, but su i partem. Et patet quod falsum assumitur, cumque-4°
libet forma substancialis cuius partes quantitative distant
situaliter extenditur modo suo. Nec oportet quamlibet

27. vel forma twice. ?4— 35. ima B. ?8 — 3g. ad omnem twice B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 8l

partem quantitativam subiecti habere appropriate partem Sometimes
quantificativam forme, sicud forme anulosorum extendun- q Ua ntffying

tur. Si partes sue quantitative sint animalia anulosa fet part ofthe
...... . . . form answers

sic de bestns; si multe quantitative unam constituant) to a quantified

5 forma totalis extenditur modo suo. Ymmo, si duo ho- sJbfect* as i?n
mines unum hominem quantitative constituunt, forma the Annulosa,

,. .. . ,. . ........ , or where many

totahs extenditur sine aha sui parte divisibih vel ex- animals are

t united together

iciiaa. ^ in one wno ] e

Nec sequitur ex istis quod mixtum solum ligatorie There is a
iovel aggregative sit unum, ut cumulus lapidum, domus, fetween^a^mere
vel populus; quia ex commixtione propria et perfecta aggregate and

, i /• i ■ 1- c . a compound.

resultat quedam rorma substanciahs et perfecta specr- Tlie mixture is
fica ; non sic autem de aliis artificialiter aggregatis. th s a ° ^brines
In hoc tamen conveniunt quod, sicut impossibile est int0 being a

_ - .. ... , .,. new

iDmixtum perrecte ponr ln specie sine rorma substancralr substantial

a qua habeat quantitatem, sic impossibile est populum, Theyresemble

domum, vel asgreeatum quodlibet esse unum, nisi sit eacl] otner '"
' .„ .™. & . .? . , ... > that in both

forma artthcialrs vel alia accidentahs rn aggregato cases there is

huiusmodi, a qua accipiat esse unum, ut populus supra a natural~there e

20 multitudinem dicit consensum hominum, ut obediant artificial.
. , . „ , ,. . „ . A nation

unr legi. Et domus dicrt hguram aggregatam ex posi- implies the
cionibus suarum parcium, ut defendat hominem ab authoritY-
intemporaneis nocumentis. Et sic de ceteris, cum omnis a house, the
unitas sit a forma. Et sicud forma substancialis mixti disposition ot
25 est per totum subiectum, licet non extenditur nisi per parts '" . order

i i to give

subiectum homogeneum suo toti; sic forma aggregata shelter, &c.
f. ' ° & . & . And in both

tahter accidentahs aggregatr est per totum suum subrec- cases, the form

tum. Et de possibili non habet aliquam partem con- ^ the^subject
similis racionis; sed sicut forma mixti est causaliter in butwithout

?o elemento per quod non extenditur, sic et forma aggre-
gati est in quotlibet partibus eiusdem, que habent
appropriatas habitudines ex quibus resultat forma totalis
longe disparis speciei. Nec est vis, sive vocentur eius
partes, sive forme presupposite ad totalem formam.

35 Unde similiter intelligendo talia aggregata, concedi
debet quod proporcionaliter dissolvuntur ut mixta, ex
dissolucione vel deficiencia sue forme.

9. legacor B. 10. anulg B. 11. que quia B. 16. Et pro sic B.
23. Ttpa e!B B.

2. Anulosorum. It was formerly a great difficulty for philo-
sophers to explain how the one indivisible principle of sensation
can be multiplied by scission, as it is in certain of the Annulosa.

extension.

82 JOHANNIS WYGLIF CAP. IX.

III. According 3° videtur quod omne mixtum sit continuum cum
wouM^be onfy mc 'di° continuante; et per consequens nullum corpus

one being in the mundi est ens in actu, sed solum potencia; et sic nulla
world; since . . ' . l . .

everything foret continuacio, cum quantumhbet dispana corpora

orie°whole with in quantum inmediate sunt posita, sunt adunata. Ad 5

the surrounding illud dicitur, concedendo quod omnis pars mundi cor-
mcdium. . ' . .

It is quite truc porea continuatur cum aha ; cum ahas non esset mundus

form on" 88 una substancia corporea, sumens ut quoddam totum

whole by omnem naturam cornoream parcialem; quod est falsum,
continuity; , . , ., ... n rb

otherwise the cum mundus sit maxima creatura | possibuis, mole 0120

^no^be^one ma g na > circulata, constans ex omni materia possibili,

corporal subiecta situi et tempori, et multis aliis accidentibus,
substancc. . . „ . , . . ,

Those parts ot gracia cuius pernciende sunt omnes parciales substancie,

whichare^of ut noverunt philosophi, et supponitur in presenti. Mixtum

the same kind ergo, in quocunque elemento sit positum, trahet quot- i5

surrounding libet partes eiusdem speciei ad sui circumferenciam, et

^conTinuity 11 P er consequens inmediatas medio continuati ; secundum

with that tales continuatur cum medio; ut aer, respiratus a pul-
medium, as . ....

for instance mone et corde, contmuatur cum spintibus aens; et per

from^the^/ungs consequens, cum toto cuius illi spiritus sunt partes 20

Continuity precipue. Et indubie aer respiratus continuatur cum
requires a .. . . . . .

medium, medio continuante, quia tn aqua, tgne vel aere, non
thiiigthaTcan P otest exspectare successivam accionem per quam ipsa

exist by itself. p e r tempus inmediate posita in fine primo continuantur
The terrestnal ,. ,- • , •

parts ot a secundum aliud; ut ahqui, volentes contmuacionem esse "

not^connnuous 6 rem absolutam que per se possit existere, false fingunt.
becausc Et sic indubie esset de terra, nisi partes aque vel aeris

separatcd bv . . . , . . , .

particles of mtercise racerent partes distare ab mvicem; et hmc
water-^whicli m i xtum terreum, post exalacionem vel evaporacionem

when elementorum continuanciam, decidit in pulverem ; et 3o

evaporated, . •,-,•• ,■

only dust partes pulvens de possibih tnmediate constituunt unum

Sometimes to c° l "P us 5 hcet continuacio non sufficit ut una pars ad

avoid a quemcunque recessum alique insensibiliter insequatur.
vacuum, one ' . . . . , . . . .

heavy body Lontmgit eciam m casu, pro supplecione pleni, virtute

dTaw" another continuacionis, quantumlibet grave sequi aliud inmedia- 35

aftcr it. tum amotum, etsi fuerit disparis speciei; quod nunquam

contingeret, nisi esset quedam continuacio sic motorum.

Continuity, says Unde, ex influencia veritatis, motus fuit Aristoteles

Aristotlc

consists in'the 5° phisicorum (forsitan ignoranter) ad ponendum con-

i5. fiij B. 17. oti" B. 26. fgunt B. 3r. piui's B. 33. c'teffum B.

34. cum pro contingit B.

34. Pleni. Probably an allusion to the rising of water in a
pump.

CAP. IX. I.OGICA. 83

tinua descriptive talia: quorum itltima sunt umim; ut limits of two
duo puncta inmediate posita nunquam huiusmodi con- jd"nt!cal ^'but
stituunt quoddam unum, quod est terminus communis tw0 ppints that

. ... . tt 1 merely touch

utnque, commumcancium parciahter m eodem. Unde are not
5 conceditur quod quelibet quantitativa corporeitas est we^m^verant

in potencia, non tamen distinguendo potenciam contra that allbodies
r-^ • • ■ are potential

actum. fc.t sic omnia corpora que non sunt continuata (without

cum corporibus eiusdem speciei constituunt numerum de t "^f/// h .f r

actualem. Et continuacio talium cum corporibus disparis because they
_ • • , , . • t-, are more or

iospeciei, aunascencia vel contiguacio nominatur. Ex jess separated

quo patet quod hec duo, continuacio et conticuacio, *'" om . otlie '" s

n r ... . . ' ot the same

non sunt snecies distincte ex opposito, sed pocius con- kind; the fact

: • J , ■ • oftheir

tinuacio est genus utnusque. Contigua enim sunt que- touching bodies

cunque se tangencia disparis speciei, quorum ultima °* ? different

i5 sunt sifnul. Et si sunt corpora disparis speciei, conhxa per contiguily,

humidum continuans ad 3 m integrandum, tunc sunt ad ot continuity,

hoc nata, ut os, cartilaeo, nervus et cetera, et omnia j" d docs n( ? 1

' . . ... ditter trom lt

genera concurrencia ad integracionem corporis animalis. in a

d IO _>» T , ... 1 . . , . . . metaphvsical

D l -7 Ideo vere dicit | commentator quod m methaphysicis sense.

20 non differt contiguacio a continuacione, cum eo ipso

quod ultima linearum superficierum corporum, sunt

simul unum continuum; et econtra.

Ulterius notandum est iuvamen elementorum in mixtis, The elements
„ 1 ..... c • ■..• r\ concur activelv

au constituctonem et perreccionem sui compositi. Oportet to „j vc J

25 autem in omni mixto perfecto terram quo ad multi- perfection to

1 . their

tudinem dominari, propter mixti constanciam. Nec compounds.
aliter esset iuvatum efricienter sensus tactus. Unde, stability^and
secundum analoeiam, ad suum sensibile fundatur sensus palpability, and

. . . . miist

tactus plus necessarius aliis in nervo retilt terreo, predominate in

3o ceteris sensibilibus plus extense. Oportet secundo inesse c^mpound-^it

naturam aqueam ad multitudinem terrenam, forcius is the °a sis of

ii- ■ j • 1 • touch.

colhniendam terream, et ad stabiliendum m homine

sensum gustus, quem oportet fundare in humore aqueo, paVtides^of 11 "

nedum quoad lineuam et partes pororum extensius adia- earth, and is

^ ° r r necessarv to the

35 centes. Sed e converso quo ad gustale quod oportet sense o'f taste

omne humidum aqueum, si gustum debeant propor-

cionaliter mutare, et genera talium obiectorum sensus

distingwere, ut sensitum per habens sensus huiusmodi,

nedum quo ad noticiam, sed eciam ad esse. Et omnia A u ^\ n n S arc

40 talia sunt ordinata ad hominem ut ad finem. Ideo non made for man,

. . . . and the reason

lmpertmenter reducitur causa mixtionis elementorum m of all

compounds

which are

1. motus quorum B. 6. lpoita B; ib. ponam B. iS. genia B

23. Iuva™« B. 20. alitcr B; ib. r'tili B. 38. fp vus B.

84 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. JX.

inferior to mixtis remotis sub homine ad hominem, gracia cuius

tomiVii/him. taliter commiscentur. Oportet tercio aerem commisceri,

Air must be n U i a aliter non esset mixtum tale sonorum, dilatans se

present; ^ . .

otherwisc tlie post percussionem, nunc secundum dyametrum longi-

wo°ld P nothe tudinalem, et nunc secundum latitudinem, ad tractum 5

sensihle to the spiritus aerei complantati corpora, causando secundum

undulations ' * ... . .

which cause numerum tremulosum ex dilatacione et constnccione

S ° U "air ntlC secundum dyametros transversatiles, sonum in aere

and move the proporcionaliter continente, qui eciam moveret con-

cavity ot the ' r n . . . ...

internal car naturalem et complantatLtm aerum m minnga. In tah 10

aifditive namque mixto aere complantato, et non in aere alieno

faculty is contento m spongtosionbus, subiectatur vts anime au-

siluated. . r ° . ' . .

Fne is ditiva. Ignis autem clanhcat spintus ahenos, et racit
"th^ainmal P ro po r ciones, ad colores iuvans ut sue speciei cum

spirits, that irradicacione luminis extranei per medium dyafanumiS
thev mav . . . . . ...

perceive light sensibiliter difrerenciuntur. Unde tn spintibus animahbus

T^iereismore I 11 * subiectant virtutem visivam, ignis plurimum domi-
fire in the eye natur in proporcione admixta alia; ut ex claritate crista-

than in anv . .. . . ., . ... . . .

other part of laydts, cum tunicis suihcrenter lllummatis m suis srtper-

^Nothing hciebus, et species libere inserantur, et lumen oculi 20

leaves the eye cum virtute visiva commisceatur cum specie visibilis
to strike the . , . .

ohject, ncr can in medio e converso, usque ad sohdum terminans

witfiout 06 visionem.- Non autem egreditur corpus ab oculo ad

sometning terminum ; nec sufhcit hec multitudo ocularis sine
visible, in . . ...........

regard to coexistencia speciei visibihs obiecti, a quo organum, 22

passive though rec ip iens speciem, specialiter paciatur. Unde passionem

active in other visus declarat Aristoteles I in De sensLi et sensato et 2 13 1 27^
ways. . ' . ...

De anima. Accionem vero sensus ponit, 19 l;e animalibus

et 3° Metaphysicorum.

Naturai Alie autem sunt quotlibet commoditates in existencia 3o

pliilosophers . ... . .

teii us elementorum m mixtis; quorum tractatus ultenor per-

filfiJff^itae tinet naturali, qui ponit inter mixta perfecta terrea

p 1 c o n 1 11 1 «» 1 u s 7i * r

in ores and habundancius dominata; ut in minera, vel lapide; 2°

stones: water . .. ..... ..

in metals; aquam, quo ad opus hquacionis dommart generahter
innammable air j n m etallis ; 3° unctuosum aerem, qui est causa in- 35
flammabilitatis, ponit in vegetali quo ad illud effectum

7. cofac'one 15. 14. fue Hcu B. 24. mlti B. 3o. existencie 14.
33. lapidc vel B. 3|. loqconis B.

35. Unctuosum aerem. I havc rendered this in tlie note by
inflammable air, wh i ch was one of the rirst names given to
hydrogen; an element that is really abundant in plants, as is
\\cll known.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 85

dominari; quarto aerem puriorem in sensibus, speci- in vegetables,
• • j • • •, • . 1 u to render them

ahter quo ad spintus aminales; et qumto ignem habun- combustibie-

dancius in homine, propter maiorem copiam istorum a P urer air

r r . r constitutes thc

spirituum, et ahas operaciones ad quas natura ornat animal spirits

5intentum. Et sic et species et genera mixtorum, que- abundant fn

cunque senera corporum simplicium in maiori mundo „ man.

" . D . r r . . . Each element

proporcionahter coaptantur. Nec tolht tale dominium predominates
i-i i« somewhere for

altorum elementorum super terram amphorem terre some spec i a i

multitudinem, vel dominium terre quo ad aliqua super T , pur . pose ,-,
. , , ,. . It Anstotle s

ioilla; sed satis est quod unum elementum quo ad aliquid words on the

super reliquum dominetur, et quod mixta totaliter per- S proper]y e

feccioribus formis substancia, habet plus proporcionaler examined, he

. ' * r r will be tound

de supenonbus elementis. Conferat ergo protervus in agreement

textum Aristotelis alio, mediate in fine, cum dictis eius,

i5primo De generacione ; 4 Methaphysicorum, et alibi ad

significacionem debitam, et videbit quod nullum dictum

philosophicum sit obvium huic vie. Causa precipua

quare illa via abhorretur a pluribus est quod non per

sensum percipiunt adcomposicionem continui ex non

20 quantis.

Tercio et ultimo restat videre de velocitate motuum Question III.

quo ad signum penes quid attendi debeant. Et primo mca sure*af- the

de motu locali. In qua materia recordati sunt mo- veiocity of any

. ,. • , • • motion ?

derni quod non attenditur penes magnitudmem situs It is certainly
25 corporei acquisiti in corporacione, ad tempus; quia stat C overed by^the
aliquid subito acquirere vel deperdere talem situm per mobiie in a

. ,. . . _ . , given time.

adnascenciam vel discontinuacionem. Stat eciam colump- Two cylinders
nam rotundam, 2 pedum in longitudine, et 8 pedum s ,° e \H mov-ed

in latitudine, sicud hasta est, descendendo uniformiter with the same
o • 1 7 -u • 1 j 1 • rapiditv, one

3o in hora, descnbere 111 hora situm secundum iongitu- paraiiel to

dinem duplum ad hastam; et aliam simillimam in ' \ h * oTher^'

fi2ura volvi latitudinaliter precise eque velociter, de- parallel to its

& ., , . .. . l M . ,. . ' , length: lt the

scrtbendo situahter plus quam octogmtophctter ad length be to the

priorem, sicut patet calculanti: ubi certum est quod ^""^"the

35 quolibet punctus unius precise eque velociter movetur, s R a , ce covered

. , ,. . , . n .. ., will be eighty

stcud ahquis punctus alterms. Non ergo esset possibile times greater.

aliquod corpus moveri uniformiter quo ad subiectum,

supposita illa tria repugnancia.

2. Exgmto B. 5. ga B. 11. totalia B. 21. Io^ B. 33. octo-

gincoplr B. 38. ta' B.

33. Octogintopliciter. As I understand the case, the difference
would not be so great; onlv as iG to 64. Rut I cannot help
thinking that the marginal note renders Wyclifs meaning.

86 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

it is generally Ideo dicitur communiter et bene quod in omni cor-
beHeved^tha/in pore mota localiter est dare punctale velocissime mo-

every mobile tum, quod est mensura velocitatis tocius motus, I cum B 12I
there is a ' . ... ' .

point that omne motum tam velociter movetur sicud ahqua pars sui;

swiftest^ ot all, et slc patet quod sequitur ex illo punctum, lineam, et 5

and measures superficiem esse et motus sibi proprios, et per idem situs

its motion. r • tt • 1 , • j 1 • •

This implies et aha accidencia. Ut, posito quod latitudo alteracionis et

Voints^havlng eciam motus localis uniformiter, et difFormiter a non gradu

distinct degrees US que ad gradum ut 4 01 ", extendetur per B corpus : est

of movement. x ° .7 , ...

dare gradum intensissimum motus alteracionis, sicut et 10

motus localis, qui gradus solum est ad extremam super-

The degree ot ftciem totaliter; sicut et qualitas sic intensa sicut est

mtensity of c •

movement is color vel lumen solum per superhciem corporis spacit,
at&e°urfacc q u °d luminosum transpicit solum secundum talem

of the body, superficiem totaliter et primo. Aliter enim aeeret color 1 =>
as colour is . * . r °

also only at the mtnnsecum quantumcunque parvus per medium opacum,

cum sit dare primum agens, sicut et nisum [et] difficul-

tatem quam produxit ad maximum. In omni ergo cor-

poreo moto, pars naturalis primo mota est punc-

tale. 20

There.is a '?° a Et preter hoc est dare minimum naturale in quo-
point ot , . . ^

minimum modocunque per se moto; quod minimum non potest

'every^befng 1 moveri secundum partem reliquam respectu opposite

that moves quiescentis: ut in motu animalis obiectum movet sensus

ltself; as in ' . .

sensitive extnnsecos et mtnnsecos; at llli movent appetitum 25
facurty^moves 6 sensitivum ; et ille movet virtutem secundum locum

another and is motivam, et illa calorem vel humiditatem quod in
moved by . . ^ . .

another. musculis et lacertis ; et iorte 111 corde est mmimus

calor primo motus, quamvis quelibet pars animalis iuvet

reliquam quamlibet ad agendum, sicut quelibet pars 30

Every part mundi iuvat quamlibet aliam. Et per consequens homo

as^one^naiVof variatur qualibet parte mundi. Sicud enim cumulus

the world aids silve vel arene ostendit se, quantumlibet distanter, per
the movement . 7 \ ; J

of another, and communicacionem parcium, sic tota terra (et per ldem
\vhohj°world. totus mundus) ostendit se per communicacionem par- 35
cium. Nam si quelibet pars iuvat reliquam ad integran-
dum suum totum, quod et equivalent finaliter per
quamlibet partem materialiter communicantem, sequitur
quod quclibet pars coadunat reliquam ct suum totum
ad omnem posterius esse causatum. 40

8. difformis B. 17. et aflcr nisum deest I!. 22. quod non B.

27. liuo 1 '' (?) B. 24. quiescente B. 2S. mistulis B. 37. equivocant I'..

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 87

Parum tamen locutum est de illo colore vel colorato, Remark
quod primo appropriate agit speciem et terminat distan- C olours£ how
ciam visionum. Non enim oportet, si unum iuvans agit, tlie y act t0 aid

1 n . VISIOII.

quod coagit cum eodem. Nec oportet, si hoc sentitur

5 vel noscitur a noscente, quod distincte sentitur vel

noscitur ab eodem. Sed hoc forte evenit ex dicta

communicacione parcium universi, quod quelibet eius

partem apprehendendo, apprehenditur ipsum totum

intencione confusa; et ipso confuse apprehenso, appre-

lohenditur eius quelibet pars; ymmo primum principium,

quod omnia appetunt, ad minimum confuse.

Sed reliquendo hoc, ut hic inpertinens, alibi per- Two opinions

tractandum, prosequendum est de mensura velocitatis vefocity of

motuum. Sunt ergo duo modi dicendi in materia de movement.

~ ... aome say that

iovelocitate motus localis. Nam aliqui dicunt quod atten- it is measured

ditur penes lineam descriptam a puncto velocitate mo- described'by

tus. Contra quod 4 er argumentatur. Primo ex hoc the point ot

quod omnia puncta mota in ultimo celo, sicut et omnia velocity.

. . • ........ Four areuments

puncta mtnnseca cuiuscunque mobilis, nullas iineas cotttra.
B i28 b describunt: ergo non generaliter | penes hoc attenditur '"ofthe^first 8
motus localis velocitas. Et si dicitur quod equivalet, mobile and

1 • • \> 1 -u » i- • ..• the points

modo ac si omnes lsti punctt descnberent hneas istis insideevery

motibus siderum, assencio quod, si sic describerent ista movi "? body

' *■ . descnbe no

puncta istis motibus lineas proporcionaliter ad veloci- lines at all.

■ c • , lf it is said

2 5 tates tstorum motuum, tunc m liinnitum velocius move- that it comes

rentur quam modo; et sic in infinitum tardius, cum tothe same as
" ' . 11 each 01 the

antecedens inplicat substancias duas corporeas coex- points

tendi, unam continue quiescentem localiter, et aliam line,' that 3

corpus quiescens continue penetrantem: quod cum sit '™£e* r s at c io m ."

3o impossibile, patet quod illud consequens verum nullius which is
rn • j • 1 absurd.

est erncacie, sed oneris responuenti.

Similiter, planeta movetur multis motibus, quorum 2. A planet has

... . ,. ,. . . many

aliquis est velocior, aliquis tardior; et tamen, quam- m0 vements,
cunque lineam vel situm longum describit aliquis eius somc swifter,

T ~ .... some slower,

35 punctus uno illorum motuum, describit et quothbet. and each of its

- T , • , •■• .. «■ points describes

Non enim est dare situm quem descnbit punctus linee, 1 them a u at the
motu orbis superioris, vel motu sui, proprii orbis, vel js 3 ,™^™^ %
epicicli, quin eundem describit quolibet istorum mo- tind any one

. , , , ,-,• . , c line described

tuum; sicud patet attendendo dihgenter ad hguram by a point in

40 situs quem describit planeta. thls case -

ltem, in motibus difformibus quo ad tempus, non 3. Neither does
•11 1 •!-• i- a j _ *„^ Ihe rule hold

tenet llla regula. Ergo est dtminuta. Antecedens patet for mot j ons

18. sunt B. 22. quod modo B. 3^. aliquid li. 35. punctos B.
39. di r B. 42. dimi tR B.

88 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

that are varicd ex hoc quod contingit infinitos esse motus horales,
givenlengthmay quorum quilibet describet lineam a pedalis adequate;

bc traced iii i a et tamen primum esse uniformem ut duo, secundum
given time by . r '

mobiies of eque intensum gradum ut 4, et tercium gradu ut 8; et sic
varying ininfinitum. Ut, posito quod in infinitum intendat aliquod 5
velocities. istorum suum moturn super aliquam partem sue linee,
tardando diucius super reliquam; sicut loquentes com-
muniter in ista materia admittunt, et quibus solet queri
quam velociter moveretur corpus motum primo uni-
formiter gradu ut 4 pro medio instanti inter illos duos 10
motus, et quam velociter descendit grave in confinio
inter aquam et aerem.
4. We can givc Similiter, aliquid contingit movere per tempus con-

a case ot a . ^ n r r

body in wiiich tinue, in quo non est dare punctum eius velocissime

thc swiftest r^ i i-

point does motum. fc.rgo regula non est generalis, cum tamen, 1?

not exist. dicendo sic regula generalis, eo quod motus difformes

quo ad tempus sunt univoce veloces cum motibus uni-

formibus quo ad tempus, sicut sunt univoce motus cum

illis. Ergo dicenda est illis racio eadem. Assumptum

huius argumenti foret evidens illi qui poneret in cor- 20

pore rarefacto per totum ? et cum hoc continue circum-

whirle^roimd ^ ucto P ro quolibet instanti, aquiri novam quantitatem

with oui- per totum ; sed quia illud est impossibile, ideo adducitur

stretched arms, . ...

and a point argumentum de corpore circumducto, m quo continue
cut^offfrom c o rrum pa n tur puncta extrema : ut posito quod Sor, 20
those continue expansis manibus et brachiis, circumducatur

extremities, it . . „. , .......

is impossible et quod continue aufteratur de extremo medn digiti

movement corelative moti, tunc non est dare punctum velocissime

should be thus motum in Sorte: et per consequens vertigo Sortis non

measured. -,, .

The movement mensuratur penes lllud. 3o

would not be g et j hic dicit taliter I opinans quod talis motus velo- B 120"

measured by .

the line just citas attenditur penes lineam quam describeret punctus,

outside the .......... . . ....

body, q ui lndivisibuiter velocius movetur quam aliquis tstorum
adlcrsarvwho omn ' um punctorum motorum in mobili. Sed de isto
replies tlms dicto amiror propter multa: primo, quia iuxta sic opi- 35

does not admit . . ■ . .„ . ...

a dcfinite nantem non est dare omnia puncta m 1II0 moto mobih,
""no^nts ^ s i cut nec est d are infinita, ut dicit. 2°, quia claudit

(2) No poim contradiccionem aliquem punctum indivisibiliter velocius
can move faster • ....

than another moveri quam movetur aliquis tstorum, cum non sit

to an infinitely possibile penes ipsum unum excedere aliud per indi-4°
small extent. . . . ' r "

visibile: quod tamen oporteat, dato tali motu puncti

2. que (or quo) libet describe B; ib. bnc pro lincam H 5. aliud B.

1?. aliud 15. i5, 16. tn ddo 15. 10. ddo 15. k8. corlo"" B.

33. indun' 1 B. 35. p'mo propter 15; ib. multo p'o B. 38. indim 15.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 89

indivisibiliter velocius moti. 3°, quia tale circumductum (3) It is
non movetur velocius quam aliquis eius punctus; quia ^body^coulld 1

tunc moveretur velociori cradu motus; et per consequens move faster

, . • . , , -,, , , 'han any of its

cum gradus lste sit dandus, esset dare lllud quod own points;

Sprimo movetur illo gradu. Sicut ergo non est dare implied, h if S the

precise quam velociter precipue movetur aliquis punctus measure of its

. . , , . v . velocity is a

sic moti, lta nec est dare quantum velocior precipue line outside it.

movetur totum mobile. Et quarto patet, quia ymaginato

quod Sor circumductus derelinquat post se, per totum

10 in quo fuerit aliqua pars eius [caliditatis, ipsam] cali-
ditatem vel aliud accidens quodcunque, et non extra
illum situm, patet quod completa circumduccione est
dare totale accidens derelictum, et per consequens est
dare eius circumferencia, cum solum finite situaliter

i5 extenditur. Quero igitur utrum circumferencia talis
accidentis sit maior quam triangulus descriptus a B
puncto (indivisibiliter velocius moto continue) quam
aliquis punctus in instanti, vel minor, vel equalis ? Non
dubium quod sequitur, pro quolibet instanti intrinseco

20 motus, aliquem punctum Sortis velocius moveri quam
B uniformiter motum. Sed miror quare non erit motus
B tante velocior, quam circulus descriptus ab eo erit
maior? Et cum uniformiter movebitur, sicud et B,
ut suppono, sequitur cum dandis quod in qualibet

25 parte talis temporis, B excederet Sortem per indivisibile.
Ergo non solum indivisibiliter movetur B velocius S.
Et hic videtur quod, circumducta a B linea A, extremo
continue quiescente, causaret per B motum circularem,
sicut describeret situm circularem ; et amoto eius puncto

3o extremali sine pluri, in 2 a eius circumduccione de-
scriberet circulum inmediatum priori: et sic sine fine.
Et sic componeretur circulus ex circumferenciis in-
mediatis. Nec est dubium quin est dare totale situm
per quem Sor fuit pro tempore sue circumduccionis.
B i2q lj Et sic de A et B linea, quocunque parte mundi, | eo
quod est dare maximum situm in mundo, ad cuius

10. caliditatis ipsam deest B. 3o plui B.

8. Et quarto. Of the whole of this paragraph and the fol-
lowing ones, I have been able to understand nothing relevant
to the question discussed. Readers should bear in mind that the
MS. is unique. frightfully illegible, especially in this part, with-
out any corrections from here to the end, and bearing upon a
subject which is itself particularly hard to understand.

QO JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

nullum punctum intrinsecum tunc fuit Sortes, et resi-
duum situs mundi, et maximus situs ad cuius quemlibet
punctum intrinsecum tunc fuit Sortes. Et idem sequitur
de quolibet parcialiter situato, eo quod totalis situs
mundi integratur ex duobus talibus sitibus. Et 5
patet quod motus Sortis erit continue extensus per
dandum situm continuum ; et sic usque ad illius situs
circumferenciam. Si ergo quilibet punctus extremalis
movebitur quando erit extremalis, et solum instans ante
erit extremalis, tunc motus circumferencialis erit com- 10
positus ex motibus instantaneis. Et si quilibet punctus
talis non movebitur quando erit extremalis, tunc con-
tinue ad circumferenciam illius situs erit non gradus
motus ; ex hoc quod continue ad extremum Sor, quod
velocissime moveretur, erit non gradus motus : quod i5
esset mirabile, quia tunc non esset dare quam velociter
mobile aliquod moveretur pro quolibet instanti intrin-
seco; ettamen, dato motu, oportet dare magnitudinem
eius mobilis, sicud et diuturnitatem ; et per consequens
eius extensionem usque ad eundem terminum inclusive, 20
ad quem inclusive terminatur eius primum subiectum.
Et sic videtur quod tam velociter diminuitur motus
quo ad molem, sicud et eius subiectum, cum continue
erit precise par suo subiecto; et eadem diminucione
divisione minuetur utrumque; sed subiectum inclusive 25
a gradu magnitudinis usque ad gradum magnitudinis
quem habebit tunc, et motus coextensus terminabitur
inclusive ad eosdem; quia aliter subiectum deperderet
maiorem magnitudinem, et aquiret maior*em parvitatem
in equali tempore quam faceret suus motus. Et tunc 3o
non esset dare quam velocior diminueretur ille motus
vel quantum diminuetur, vel quantum durabit; sicut
nec est dare quam magnus vel parvus erit ultimate.
Et per idem non esset dare quantum extendetur pro
aliquo instanti; cum tamen totus situs mundi integratur35
ex situ per quem non est iste motus, sequens est
residuum situs esse maximum situm per quem est iste
motus. Et idem argumentatur de futuro.

Et per idem sequitur, posito quod A, lapis albedine
saturandus solum secundum contactum, moveatur usque 40
ad finem illius hore extrinsece, in quo anichiletur,

10. timc crit B. 17. quod prn aliquod B. 22. divisibiliter B.

25. dumet 1 ' B. 26-27. a — quem (siclj 15. 40—11. a I b ° fa 3 ' 15.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 91

servatis eius accidentibus (quod est impossibile, toto
colore servato), est dare situm per quem est anichi-
lacio, et per consequens, ubi A erit ultimate sicut est
B iSo^dare usque ad quem situm | pretenditur color et defertur
5 accidens per A lapidem. In fine ergo erit verum quod
A sit B, et per consequens quod fuit ita quod est hic.
Si ergo A erit ad B, punctum extrinsecum, tunc tanget
ipsum, et erit ita quod est ad illum. Et habet colorem,
si de longinqua extensione temporis habet concedere,

loscilicet, si aliquid aliqualiter se habuit vel habebit,
tunc si se habet. Non enim est color in isto zophis-
mate: ad istum terminum A est et .4 non est ad istum
terminum. Injinitum propinquum est A hinc termino et
A non est infinitum propinquum hinc termino; quia est

i5dare totum situm, per quem adequate nunquam est A,
quem situm motum est esse inmediatum termino dato.
Si usque ad istum terminum A movebitur, et pro illo
instanti pro quo A 'fuerit in termino inclusivo illius
situs, erit A ad illum terminum et super ultimam

20 partem proporcionabilem illius situs.

Nec vereor dare ultimam partem proporcionabilem
alicuius continui; quia a signato A, corpore columpnari
possibili, uniformis grossiciei ut virgulto correspondentali,
dividendo illud in suas partes proporcionabiles geo-

25 metricas minores, versus B extrinsecum. Ut capio duas
lineas girativas, incipientes in extremis dyametri C
relique basis, et circumgirent quamlibet istarum parcium
proporcionabilium versus B extremum continue propius
sibi ipsis, usque ad B basim, et signo corticem inter-

3o ceptam inter illas duas lineas per D: tunc patet quod
deus potest corrumpere omne corpus in ista columpna
preter D vel partem eius. Stat enim quod D sit magnum
corpus ut 4 11 vel 5 a tocius A. Ideo nemo qui ponit
deum posse tot mirabilia facere negabit ipsum posse

35 separare D et ponere per se; quo facto, eciam pono
quod E veniat ex adverso, condensans vel fiectens partes
graciliores D versus extremum suum lacius. Tunc patet
quod est dare instans in quo C tangit D, in quo
oportet quod tanget extremum gracile illius D et per

40 consequens est dare communiter quantumcunque longam
vel brevem partem determinatam ad illud extremum.

(3. li' B. 8. calorem B. 9. longig de B. 23. v'g° B ; ib. cor n,i B.
35. c pro eciam B.

92 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

Data ergo una parte eque longam, sicud gira circum-

dans grossiciem columpne, patet quod illa cinxit ultimam

partem proporcionalem. Nec oportet nos sollicitari de

acucie anguli talis corporis, nec de situ in vasi ad

quem terminatur; quia non est nostrum distincte cog- 3

noscere. Unde si D, pyramis ferrea, tangeret primo

secundum communem punctalem F planum per G postea,

operatam constantem, videtur quod D abstractum,

stante posicione parcium G, haberet in latere applicato

plano unum foramen punctale, quamvis non sufficeremus to

distingwere tale foramen H; sicud nec radium huius

transeuntis per illud foramen; nec punctum sibi ex-

Leaving thesc tremum talis radii incideret. I Tales multas evidencias B i3o"
philosnphical .... ' .

difficulties, and reci alias pro et contra. Sed tamen communicando cum

thioio«y lg ic't°us trie ologis, querendum est si deus potest de potenciat?
ask it God can absoluta facere unum situatum non quantum, post illo

make a thing , . . . . . .. , %. . r

occupy space habito; si potest anichuare multa taha simul et con-

qulntityfor vertere > faciendo unum quo ad apparenciam continue

annihiiate and magnum; et habito quod sic, queratur ut racio, ex-

re-create it so . . . _ x

as to give the penmentum, vel auctontas [doceat| quod non omne 20
a^tfifnThaving contmuum constat ex talibus de facto. Nam omnia
continuous argumenta de racione vel experiencia ducenda in medium

magnitude : , . , , ,. ,

if so, how do e 9 ue moverent ad mprobandum taha posse esse, sicud

we know that a j inprobandum talia esse.
it is not so r

now? Supposito ergo quod sit talis composicio, redeundum 25

Three things est ad regulandum velocitatcs motuum. Redeundo ad

notedT/z>*/ e the P unctum propositum de mensura velocitatis motuum

distinction quo ad signum, necesse est tria supponere; primo

already set ,- • , . , . ..,..,....,

down, as to distinccionem de unitormitate; et sic de alns divisionibus

movcmen™ &c raotuum supradictorum. 2 , supponatur quod solum 3o

2'» 1 , that motus temporalis qui primo tempore mensuratur, sit

velox vel tardus; velocitas enim motus respicit temporis

8. opaca 15. 20. doceat deest B. 25. Suppono B; ib. redden-

dum (0 B.

25. Composicio. We have had no mention of any compo-
sition of any sort. It may be a mistake of the copyist; it niay
be a mistake of my own. Possibly Wyclif refers to the com-
posido continue ex non quantis. But when, for instance, there
are only three letters, op°, so indistinct that 9 may be q, p, f,
and o, a, the only thing to be done is to take the nearest guess
in harmony with the form of the word. To try and guess
what oaglit to have been there would have taken up years of
labour in merely transcribing the MS And, where one out of
two or three words might stand for several others, it was no
longer practical to note down all the abbreviated forms.

^AP. IX. LOGIGA.

sicud magnitudo molis vel parvitas per- temporal

manencium divisionum; ita quod motus subito non alonTcan^bc

esset velox vel tardus, sicut punctus non est parvus switt or slow -

vel magnus. 3 supponatur quod possibile sit motus et 3rd > ,hat
, ... .. c . .. . .. contranes can

5 quotlibet alias rormas contranas eidem simul messe exist at the

secundum partes quantificativas diversas; ut sicud con- d^rent^parts

tingit unam partem columpne descendere et aliam of the same
, ■ , •• ,..,,. subject.

ascendere, sicud contingit unam partem subiecti calefien
et aliam frigifieri; et sic de aliis alteracionibus oppo-

tositis. Et correspondenter contingit simul tempore unam
partem dati corporis condensari vel minui, et aliam
augeri. Ex quo plane sequitur quod stat idem simul
tempore denominari secundum partes formis contrariis:
ut signata A columpna, cuius Bmedietas sit concen-

1 5 trica, tunc concluditur quod subductis inpedimentis, A
simul ascendit et descendit; et sic de aliis denomina-
cionibus a formis contrariis. Quicunque enim concedet
aliquid denominari secundum partem quantitativam
forme habentis contrarium informatam oportet concedere

20 totum eque inter se denominatum cum parte huiusmodi,
sive contrarium insit secundum plus vel minus, sive
racio insit secundum aliquid; ut eque velociter calefit
vel descendit A secundum partem millesimam a toto
residuo moto contrarie, sive similiter quiescente, sicud

23 pars fuit talis, mota per totum; et ita sciendum est de
quibuslibet formis que habent contraria.

Unde patet quod vanus sit calculus de proporcione It is, therefore,
inpedientis forme date secundum eius multitudinem vel U attempt°
paucitatem, respectu forme contrarie. Nam eque velo- calculating in

3o citer calefit A corpus cuius solum millesima pars calefit proportion the

B i3i a per totum gradum alteracionis, ut | toto residuo interim ^'vvn^eV 110

frigefacto gradu ut octo, sicud illa pars millesima; et hindered by a

, . ... . _ . . , . contrary lorm,

sic simul tempore sit cahdum et sit fngidum ; et lta since there is

de quibuscunque denotninacionibus a formis contrariis etc. conttariety

35 quo ad omnes auctores vel raciones in contrarium between

allegandas. Ex hoc patet solucio; quod impossibile est part of a body,

idem subiectum simul et semel secundum idem esse a " < ? s !° W i!l e , s . s

sic contrarie denominatum; et sic specificat Aristoteles

et antiqui philosophi racionem contrariorum. Sicud ji> st as tllc

,, r • . same thinj;

4oenim est univoce album [et equivoce nigrum, uno tem- may be white
pore album] et alio tempore nigrum, et secundum aliud ^ dift°erent

12. permanenter B. 5. quodlibet (!) B. 8. sicud (!) B. iq. ha-
bente B ; ib. sed pro oportet B. 34. ex (!) pro etc. B. 38. Aristotelis" (!) B.
40—41. et — album deest. 41. a'os B.

JOHANNIS WYCF.IF CAP. IX.

senses, or pro uno loco album et pro alio nigrum simul, ut volnnt

times > or parts< admittentes multitudinem corpoream satis admittere:

sic idem in numero est idem secundum unam partem

quantitativam album, et secundum aliam partem nigrum.

Et sic de similibus.

Why tliis is Racio autem difficultatis ad assenciendum iste sen-

accoMtof tencie est rluctuacio in rebus communibus, et [doctrinaj

Nominalistic illorum qui verbis negant communia preter signa. Nam

Unless youfix Sortem moveri aut esse album aut aliter formatum

prSty^to est commune ad quamcunque formam talis speciei que 10

sense, time, Sorti pro aliquo tempore inexistit. Ideo, loquendo de

have'a } °' forma ultime singularitatis, oportet contraccius speci-

mgnt ficare: ut iste motus Sortis est ipsum moveri isto tem-

universal
mover
which

coexist

which may p 0re secundum illam partem acquirendo istam materiam
coexist vvith r .,. * . i-i- i

any other motus ; quia aliter esset iste motus multiphcatus pero

con7rad°cUon. totum, sicud est motus communis. Sicud ergo non

repugnat istum Sor moveri nunc secundum istam partem

acquirendo istam formam et simul cum hoc moveri

nunc secundum aliam partem acquirendo formam con-

trariam moto opposito: sic stat Sqrtem moveri simul 20

et semel motibus oppositis non commixtis, ut per con-

sequens non se inpedientibus a denominacionibus propriis.

Otherwise Aliter enim non esset possibile aliquid moveri secundum

nothinc could , , ., , „ _ n 1 • •

be moved in partem ; quod est contra philosophum i° et 5 pnisi-

P art - corum, et contra communem et venerabilem sentenciam 25

logicorum.
Solution of the Istis tribus premissis, dicitur generaliter quod quilibet
^Every"' motus velox est ita velox sicud aliqua eius pars, et per
movement is as CQn uens cu i us iibet talis motus velocitas attenditur

lilplu HS 1TS T t

swiftest part, penes partem eius velocissimam mensurantem; ut motus .^0
measured hy primi mobilis est eque velox sicut motus punctalis

the swittness of . t j s j n eouinocciali, licet quomodocunque tarde
that part, J~ ' ' l ,

moveatur aliqua pars eutsdem. Et lta generaliter, quan-

tumcunque velociter movetur aliqua pars punctalis per

se mobilis pro quacunque parte temporis, ita velox est 35

totus motus eiusdem, etsi non secundum quamlibet

This eius partem; et patet quod motus localis velocitas

length^oVthe attenditur penes Iongitudinem situs linealis descripti a

line described, punctali per se mobili velocissime moto in compara-

tfme. 10 1 1C cione ad tempus mensurans; et sic tollitur instancia de 4°

Answer to the

first argument

contra.

7. doctrina deest B. 20. 8 pro Sortem (S ?) B. 22. ad pro a B.
32. TeTiocciali B. 3<). mote B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 95

linea supeiius facta. Nam probatum est superius quod No point of thc

11 i • j -v -^ i- j highest sphere

nullus punctus ultime spere descnbit lineam ; quod describesa linc,

conceditur. Verumtamen non moveretur nisi describeret but th V- T h \ ch

is equivaient
situm in mobilem punctalem linearem. Et si capitur to a line.

5 quod multiplicius describit eundem situm in numero,

et per consequens est per quantumlibet tempus magnum

in describendo situm circularem, conceditur conclusio;

B i3i b sed sequencia descripcionis tanti situs equivalet | ac si

continue de possibili describeret novum situm. ldeo

tocausatur pars successiva talis motus, qua velocissime

movetur, describendo partem situs huiusmodi sine

redicione super illam partem spacii. Et ab illa parte

servatur velocitas tocius motus.

Quo ad secundam difficultatem tactam de corpore To the second:

. . . ... .. .. cvery planet,

i.Tsimul moto localiter motibus non componentibus unum by reason of

motum, sicud contingit de astro moto in suo epiciclo, t m e £ e '| n : e ' n l t ,c

dicitur quod maiorem situm circularem describit quod- describes a

liir^cr circlc

libet eius punctale motu epicicli; et alium motum orbis f han ; t
experigencia. Quod patet, quia astrologi sciunt se per- ^o^ 1 ^.
20 cipere instrumento quod planeta pro dando tempore erit and thence it is

. . .. . n ■ ., .,• • possible for the

m situ celi signato, et in nne tempons sensibuis mme- astronomer

diate succedentis, et orientaliter retrogradiendo; quod to $^£Vti>M

non erit motu orbis. Et ista experigencia movet eos ad at a given time,

. • • i • i- i be in a givcn

ponendum epiciclos qui sunt circuh non lacerantes piace.

25 orbem suprapositum, propter eminenciam eorum supra

circumferenciam orbis astri; sed includuntur secundum

eorum punctum altissimum infra orbem. Quod si non If there were

,. ,.iii • • no such

esset tahs retrogradacio, sed delatum moveret vertigine, retI -ogradation,
ut describendo situm girativum (ut contingit de sagitta), l h t ^ ^ C p hiu i et s° f

Sovidetur michi quod omnem partem situs circumscripta would be
, . * , ., . , ., • measurcd by

circumduccione descnbit mobile motu certo; et sic est tne ] en gth of

unus motus habens racionem diversorum motuum, cuius t^rouetfwhich

velocitas attenditur penes longitudinem situs girativi. they revolve.

Ex quo sequitur quod velocius movetur quam si, cum

35 paribus, sine circumduccione attingeret terminum ad

quem adequate in eodem tempore. Sed longe alius est

motus nunc quam esset tunc, ut patet de partibus

motus quo ad molem, capientibus individuacionem

a situ.

5. m\ eas B. 17. /x m B. iq. expigeiica B; ib. qua B; ib, fciut B.

26. includatur (!) B. 3i. tracto (?) B. 37. esse (!) B.

19. Experigencia. Probably for experieticia, and bclonging
to the next sentence: quod patet experiencia. Cf. 1. 23.

9° JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

To the thn-d: Quo ad 3 am difficultatem, ubi non est dare punctale
circular space aliquod per tempus permanens in circumferencia cir-
themovemciT? cumduct, '> oportet primo, notare situm circularem cir-

and note the' cumferencialiter descriptum iuxta declaracionem pre-
total number • ,-. n .... _

of punctal missam. Oportet 2° notare totam multitudinem punc- 3

which^together talium conferencium instanter ad huiusmodi circuli
describe the descripcionem. Et velocitas motus punctalis partis, que

circlc' thc • •

velocity that is est communis ad omnia illa, erit mensura velocitatis
each^ofthe tocius m otus. Tale enim est commune citra speciem,
movements et supra ultimum singulare; ut patet alibi. Nam punc- 10

will be the . , _- , • , ... .... . r

mcasure of the tale extimum huius mobihs, simpliciter mtellectum, est

wholc. commune ad quodlibet illorum. Et patet solucio ad raci-

ones superius tactas, que videntur refugere veritatem.

Ti?c :/ doctdnc Ulterius, videtur quod assenciendo composicioni con-

thatthe tinui ex non quantis, infringitur sentencia de velocitateo
consists of motus localis. Nam, capto equinocciali circulo, et cir-
points de s d cul ° sim " inmeLliato > | sive altrinsecus versus polum, sive B i32 a
against this circulo inmediate supposito, videtur quod omnes hii
velocity ot local <= ,• • .

movement. 3 circuli, sicut et omma sua puncta. continue eque '

Equator! the velociter moventur, quia quolibet uniformiter quo ad 20
circle tempus et subiectum, et angulum motus alicuius; isto-

immediatelv ,• • , . , ,.

above ancf rum aliqua pars quantitativa est eque velox stcud ahqua
immediately P^ rs alterius - Er g° conclusio. io m sic plura sunt puncta

bclow it, with in equinocciali circulo quam in altero circulorum siena-

all thcir points: . . . . ...

thc Equator torum; et pene tot situs punctuales occupat circulus 20
quickesVand e q uinoccialis 5 q uot puncta habet. Ergo plures situs
thc other two punctuales occupat circulus equinoccialis, quam aliter

mtisr stop at a -, • ,• ^^ .... ?

certain moment, Slbl mmediatus. Lt quihbet punctus ahcuius tstorum

moving.^This circulorum describit adequate in die omnes situs punc-

renders it tales sui circuli. Ergo velocius movetur quilibet punctus 3o
impossiblc lor • • • ,• ,. ,. _,,..,

tlum to be in equinocciah, quam ahquis rehquorum. Et hic videtur

withTt^an^so W ^ sit discontinuacio in celo ad quemlibet eius punc-

of all thc other tum ; quia est dare instans in quo punctus in equi-

tothepoles. nocciali describit situm punctalem; et punctus (scilicet

inmediatus) non, sed permanet per tempus in eodem 35

11. extinuu B. i5. sentenciam (!) B. 17. altV B. 21. an-

gulus B. 23. pTa B. 33. in<p pro instans B. 34. f B. 35. no' B.

1. I suspect Wyclif mixes up the answer to the 3 rd and the
4 1 ' 1 argument. At all events, I take it that his rule applies to
bodies which revolve with varying velocitv, as each of the points
in a top, for instance. Note that he does not answer the 4.^ but
passes on to another ohjection. 23. In my copy of the MS.

there is io m (!). If we could change it to probatur, or major
probatur, it would make sense.

CAP. IX. LOGIGA. Q7

situ ; ergo, oportet illos discontinuari. Et cum in qua-

libet circumduccione tante elongabitur, videtur quod

per processum temporis quantumlibet distabunt. Et per

idem sequitur quod ad omnem punctum circumferencie

5 ultime celi erit discontinuacio.

Ad illud dicitur quod impossibile est aliquod indi- To ,llis we
..... . . ^ . , ,. ' . . reply tliat tiie

visibile velocius moveri locahter quam continue in swiftest

quolibet instanti dati temporis describere situm suum movciM,',^' a

punctalem: quod cum facit quilibet punctus in equinoc- puncal
. ,. , n . . ? l , .,., ^ substanco is

tociali (ut supponitur), sequitur quod quuibet eorum one point per

movetur sibi motu velocissimo possibili. Non enim 'ancfas'

velocius potest moveri, nisi pro eodem instanti posset tnis is

esse simul in duobus sitibus, ut dictum est superius; which the

quod est impossibile, quia tunc idem corpus posset ' u' : is cvidem' S '

1 5 dimensionaliter multiplicari per loca. Et ex hoc sequi- ll,at ever .Y other

... , .,., ,. . , circle must

tur, cum veris supra dictis, quod qutlibet ahus circulus raove slower

ab equinocciali movetur difformiter quo ad tempus. po^int^fn^th" 6

Nam totalis multitudo punctorum in quolibet minori 2 4 hours.

circulo equinocciali est minor totali multitudine punc- ^haTthe" 1 ' 1

^otorum in equinocciali; et sic de sitibus. Ex quo sequitur movement Is
, .,., , . ,. . .',. unitorm,

quod quihbet circulus sic mmediatus equinoccian ad for each

minimum per unum situm punctalem plus describit de ° points?^

sitibus, quam alius extra illum ; quod conceditur. Et But we can

, .. , ,., ,? , never know at

ultra conceditur quod quotlibet aba puncta eque velo- what momem

25 citer moventur uniformiter quo ad tempus. Sed vanum pointsSs^at

est nobis solicitari quando talis punctus quiescit: cum ,„, rest -

. . . * . , . . * VVhile each ot

oportet nos hic lgnorare st orbis astri movetur, aut the points of
quiescit, astro moto de possibili, ut iudicamus. Suppo- chang^its"
nimus ergo quod in qualibet revolucione, puncto in . place evei 7

„ . . ,. n . . n n ' ' mstant, one of

^oequinocciali existente tn onente nxo per unum tantum those in the
instans, punctus situ inmediatus in qualibet istarum "remalns^two
linearum sit in situ suo inmediato per duo instancia; insIai " s '" H'e

,. ^. . ,. . . same place;

nec sequitur ex tah dinormttate discontinuacio, quia but this docs
B i'32 b non superius situs [ mundi pertranscendendus. Sed si pro-fromtouchiifg?
^5 quolibet instanti continui pertransiet unum situm cum '/ eacn of the

. ,. . . . circles were to

puncto equinoccialt (et sic de puncto tnmediate versus describe the
polum) tunc describeretur situs mundi teres vel lenticu- "h^Vquator 8
laris et non sphericus, cum eque amplum situm circu- the world

., .,., ?• • • • would not be

larem descnberet quibbet talis punctus sicut ahquis. round, but
40 Ideo oportet ex carencia situs fixi quem describeret c y |indriL ' al -

28. iudi m ' B. 3o. equinoccialis (!) B; ib. cxnte B; ib. pvun B.

32. Irar^ B. 37—38. describeret B ; ib. tercs vel leriti 1 "'^ B. 38. fpiis

= spiritus B.

98 .(OHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

punctus extra equinoccialem, cessare talem situm de-
scribere unum pluries et alium paucius, secundum limi-
tacionem nature ordinantis talem posicionem parcium
situs mundi.

it is easy to ^ ec est difficile intellectum concinere quomodo punc- 5
understand . ... . ,.

why the centre tus centrahs manebit hxum et punctus sibi lnmediatus

fiLd^andlhc suppositus in revolucione diurna acquireret 4 situs
point next to it a d e quate sine discontinuacione eius a centro; quia non

changes place ^ . . .

without est situs qui mtercideret. Et per ldem, A puncto equi-
scparatmg from nocc j al - or ; enta ii pertranseunte duos situs punctales in 10
in the same duobus instantibus: et B, sibi puncto inmediato, per-

way tlic ' r

movement ot transeunte tantum unum m altero lllorum lnstanctum,
two mstants" non foret discontinuacio illorum punctorum, cum

and of only pos i c i circularis situum punctalium requirit quod
one m the r . . r . * . .

same time, do non mtercidat alius situs punctahs. Lt idem contintnt 1 3

scparaUon^as quando unus punctus movetur, et alius sibi inmediatus
they tollow qu i esc it. Si ereo duo puncta sicnata, in equinocciali

trom the ldea " P . r . , •

of a smallcr et circulo sibi mmediato, haberent pene tot situs punc-
whiciTs^upposcs tales materiali tempore distribuendo, et unus pausaret
a smaller per i nsta ns et alius non pausaret, tunc facta continua- 20

distancc to be 1 r .

passed over cione revolucionum distarent, ut mnuitur. bed modo,
'" a tin^ qUal proporcionaliter ut punctus pausabit, habebit pauciores
situs, describet situm punctalem in quo pausabit; non
in primo instanti pausacionis, quia per idem in casu
aliquid describeret situm punctalem super quem prope 20
quiesceret; nec in 2° instanti, quia tunc esset dare
primum instans motus pro quo mobilc esset in termino
aliquo.

Ista autem est difficultas logica, postquam homo
moverit scienciam veritatis inveniuntur, ideo menciuntur 3o
multi verbaliter concedentes. Michi autem videtur quod
omnis descripcio situs punctalis est pro illo instanti
pro quo mobile punctale est in illo situ, et in proximo
instanti subsequenti est in alio, et per consequens in

12. tm B. 18. pe B. 19. meli B.

29. Logica. This sentencc. I have not the slightest doubt,
is thc cxact reading of the MS.; but it has no sense whatever,
so far as I can sec ; probably an important omission. No onc
who studies this pages can doubt that the copyist was as neg-
ligcnt as his writing is illegible. Dr. Rudolph Beer thinks it
was a studenfs copy, for his own use.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 99

casu posito, in 2° instanti, et non in primo, describitur
datus situs. Et sic queritur ut sequens: sequitur ex
posicione continui ex non quantis quod est dare primum
instans cuiuslibet talis motus; quia, si non, in tali
5 instanti in quo punctale est in situ punctali, sed in-
B i33 a cipit | derelinquere ipsum, describit illum : tunc oportet Difficulty about
quod instanti primo, cum pertransiret illum. Et sic from^onefpolnt
describet punctus motus in casu puncta constituencia t0 thc nt:xt -
lineam successivam, solum pro mensuris quibus non

ioessent, posito quod successive generabuntur puncta,
subiecta puncto subito fluenti, et continue corrumpen-
tur; ita quod continue sit unus eorum in actu a puncto
supposito, et sic in fine, quando mobile foret in ter-
mino ad quem foret ultima distribucio divisibilis

oproximi: quod est irracionale. Secessus igitur indivisi- Wyclif

.... , . ,. . ..... . .......... distinguish.es

bilis ab mdivisibih est mutan, et successivus mdivisibih between

proximo est mutatum esse. Verumtamen pro illo instanti ha^ne^cEineed

non foret mutari, nisi inmediate succederit mutatum piaccs.

esse. Et ita in casu notato: pro illo instanti quo indi- At the instant
. ., ., . ,. . . . ........ . one point

2ovisibile circuh proximi equinocciah mcidit ln situm leaves its place,

indivisibilem orientis, est mutatum esse respectu indi- '[he^fnstant jt

visibilis proximi precedentis ; et pro illo instanti pausant comes to the

,. r .,, , . r . next, it has

mstanter, cum non mmediate post lllud mstans erit changed.

situs descriptus post illud instans; sed inmediate post

2? illud describitur. Nec est ista pausacio instantanea quies

proprie, sicud nec mutari est motus aut quies. Et ita Tllis 1S true of

potest dici in omni mutacione subita, quod res pro instantaneous

illo instanti pro quo subita sic non est facta, sed incipit as the^fcts of

esse facta; ut contingit de linea, et anima, ac similibus *e mind ;

3o que fiunt in instanti. Et sic non est, quandocunque

creatura est facta vel est creata. Nec oportet, si res

nunc non est facta, et fiet, quod nunc sit illa vel

aliquid eius fiendum; sed bene sequitur quod ipsum

est fiendum in tempore suo. Et ita homo moritur pro also of death.

35 ultimo instanti esse sui, quando patitur mortem, que

est mori, et inmediate post est mortuus, et mors est

lapsa sua ; et sic de similibus.

Notandum tamen quod hoc nomen, mors, equivoce Digression

• . ,,• ■ , u .... . . concerning

lntelhgitur apud multas: ut quedam dicitur mors spiri- death; its

40 tualis, et quidam mors corporalis. Sed de primo membro .S / 1151 ,)

et eius subdivisionibus foret hic inpertinens nobis sermo. corporal

(which we may

omit) ;

ii — i2. corrumpantur (quite vlain) B. i5. Lacessus B. 26. quietesB.
41. hinc B.

IOO JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

absolute or Mors autem corporalis vel dicitur simpliciter, vel secun-
absofute^when dum quid. Simpliciter, quando unum simpliciter desinit

the being is univoce 2 m partem eius corpoream. Sed mors secun-
no more, . J . ... .» .

relative, when dum quid est cuiuscunque partis viventis mortihcacio;

l bod'v dies- ut a tempore status [sanitatis] animalis usque ad eius 5
in this there mortem simpliciter, moritur animal quasi continue quo

are degrees ; , , . ... . ,.

first tlie ad partes, dum calor naturahs, pnmo claudicans, non
onW^parUv pl ene assimilat, sed in parte digerit adnatam pingwedi-
assimilates; nem. 2° plus depauperatus, nec assimilare sufficit, nec

second, it . .. r r r , n

altogether faiis assimilatum servare; et tunc denuunt partes continue, 10
t0 or aS to in keep C ' quousque vita simpliciter extingwatur. Et illud idem

together thc ultimum mutari est mors, indivisibilis quo ad tempus,
parts; . . . .... ,

absolute death cum sit motus subitus quo aliquid unum denominatur

instantancous. m ° ri simpliciter.

Death and life Et cuffl mors et vita sunt opposita privative, sicut 1 .->
Yo the P °ame' re P u g nat idem simul secundum eandem partem vivere
body or part et mori, eciam morte 2 m quid, que est divisibilis suc-
thc sume sense cessive; sic repugnat quod idem simul, secundum eandem
elther absofutef' rac ionem, vivat simpliciter et simpliciter | moriatur. B 1 3 3 *'
or rciatively. Moritur autem corpus simpliciter, quando secundum 20

quamlibet eius partem quantitativam [que] vivit in illo est
Life is lirst in mortuum. Et primo in animali vivit cor, vel aliquid
the heart, and cor jj propior; et sequentur alie partes ordinate, secun-

Ieavcs lt last. . . . . .

dum earum dignitatem. Et breviter, pars cui primo

vita adiungitur, ab eadem ultimo separatur; ideo, cor23

vel minimum eius naturale expectat ultimum mutari

The change quod est mors. Et simpliciter vivit secundum racionem

death is like positivam quod habet esse viventis; et simpliciter moritur

dissolution, one secundum racionem qua mutatur ab esse viventis ad
from livitif: . n . . . .

being to non- omnino esse huiusmodi mutacionem, ab esse vivi ad 3o

the term ad non esse ^ 1 - Sic enim generacio et corrupcio specih-
quem is the can tur ab Aristotele penes suos terminos contradictorios

non-entity, thc . r . .

term a quo utrobique; ut terminus a quo generacionis est non esse,

is the entitv. • ' , ^ 1

J et terminus ad quem est esse. Econtra autem est de

corrupcione. 35

it is argued Nec oportet logicum timere instancias sophisticas,

mmncnt of quibus aliqui arguunt quod tunc sunt simul esse et

death, the livmg )Wtl esse eiusdem. Nam constat extendentibus verba, et

and the non- . .....

living entitics intelligentibus negaciones participiahter m suo tempore,
are together.

5. sanitatis deest B. 9-10. nisi assimilatum pro nec assimilatum.

10. f,raj'e B. 11. in ta fm r B. i5. sic (I; B. 17. z'j»ro eciam B.

20. vuntjpro moritur B. 21. quc decst B. 21—22. illa . . . mortua |H">or B.

24. bevit'(?)E. 27. fr B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. IOI

quod non obest idem generatum quod eternaliter est But this is not

,....., . , , . • • iiiconvenient

secundum esse lntelhgibile, habere pro dato mstanti for one who
esse actuale et pro proximo instanti. Vita enim non knows how the
dicit formaliter mutacionem, cum analogice inest deo. extended to the

_ _ , , • ,• ,• • i part ; life mav

? Sed mors, ut huiusmodi, dicit precedens non esse h De eternally

actuale; quia infinite intelligendo, est aliquod non esse, .^^^^

et secundum totum huiusmodi, generari. Et si idem one moment;

, • , , | ' if the next

in mstanti proximo subsequenti habet non esse actuale, moment actua]

tunc simul cum hoc, ut sic, corrumpitur vel moritur, n ] ore ex tn s e ts ° he

iout [nonl sit vivum. preceding one

»t j • . ir • • was that of

Notandum tamen quod vita potest mtelligi equtvoce deatn-
pro forma substanciali permanente qua vivitur, vel actu Ll may°mean r '
eius successive individuato a tempore. Et de illa que either the vitai
consistit in successione, racione temporis adiacentis, princ 'a Ct ' °'
i5quod est plurimum individuans eam longam vel brevem, jpdividuated by

i r .... ume; we mean

est nunc nobis specialiter sermo. Sicud lgitur eidem the latter here.

, . . . .... • Ljfe and deatli

simul msunt mcepcio et desinicio pnvative opposita, are Mke

nrimum 2 m neeacionem de preterito, et ultimum secun- beginning and

1 ° r . . ceasing, both

diim negacionem de futuro; sic vita et mors, cum non of which may
2osint pure privative opposita (ut visus et cecitas, et of thl same,

privaciones formarum substancialium et accidentalium, but the former
1 . . is a demal

que non simul compaciuntur mter se secundum ahquem of the past and

gradum), sed pocius sicud generacio et corrupcio, magni- denia f of tne

tudo et parvitas, intensio et remissio et forte lux et future.

23tenebre. Et patet quod si aliquid moritur, vel mors jf anything dies
sibi inest altero dictorum modorum, tunc vivit pro eadem ;" nves at^die
mensura temporis, licet dispari racione. Illi autem qui same instant,
negant composicionem continui ex non quantis dicunt contrary sense.
quod mors vel est mntatum esse subiectum in termino T de ° n S y ou h r °

"^ovite exclusive, vel 2° est simpliciter et primarie privacio doctrine of the

'. l ... composition ot

vite in corpore quondam unito. Pnma est lta m primo the continuous,

instanti non esse viventis; et 2 a est quantumlibet longa ; S s y tl | e ,a ch a n a g e 1

BiVnec est in I ista variacione, dum tamen sciatur fundare <;f a subject
^ I ' . after the end

quod corpus moritur vel mortem patitur quando non f life, or the

35 est, vel quod anima separatur pro mstanti quando non ;. ou) from the

est anima, aut quod mors non potest esse possibilis, bodv -

1 .... 1 preter tne

terribilis, vel timenda. Prior autem responsio est michi ii, s t answer.
plus placida, et consequens ad predicta.

Si autem queratur quando datus punctus movetur Return to the

M n . ..... ,. rr main sub|ect.

Aotardius quam punctus m equinocciah vel dinormiter The question

as to when one
point moves

5. precedente B. io. non deest B; ib. vum B. i3. individuate (!) B. s owei an

22. imf B. 2 . aliud (in full) B. 26. b ! '' or ""=(!) B. 31. quod^B.;

ib. beneath ita B. 36. quo B. 38. adp ta B.

102 JOHANNIS WYCLIF . CAP. IX.

another in the quo ad tempus, dicitur quod in quolibet tempore cuius

i hnvp • • • * •

mentioned mstans pausacionis est lntnnsecum, et solum m tah;

circles, is e t cum nulla pars quo ad tempus, vanum est verificari
absolutely . . , r '

useless. pro quo mstanti vel per quod tempus foret motus

huiusmodi. Multe enim sunt iste, et in nulla eius 2 m 5

completam et propriam existenciam. Nullus ergo motus

est temporaliter difformis in instanti; et per consequens

nec per tempus; sed in tempore quo primo cst, et

quomodolibet alio cuius ipsum est pars. Si autem

talis difformitas habet esse incompletum in causis 10

The movement suis continue vel non, est huic inpertinens. Ex quo

the Imbiect) if P atet quod non oportet, si talis motus sit secundum se

it benotasswift totum difformis, vel velocissimo remissior, si utraque

as possible; .... . . *

it matters medietas dicti motus et quehbet alie eius partes ahquo
is^not^aried hi tem P ore non sunt difformes. Quod exinde totus non 1 3
uself. sit difformis. Patet eciam quod contingit eundem motum
nunc esse velociorem ct nunc tardiorem, non descen-
dendo ad instans, sed ad parvum tempus; et semper,
dato tempore, est dare quam velox est, dare motus
pro illo tempore et gradus velocitatis. Est velocitas 20
danda que non mensuratur instanti, sicut nec velocitas
vel motus cuius est passio.
remark that Sed ulterius est diligenter notandum quod sunt aliqua

many words aggregata ex motu et relacione; ut ascensus et descen-

represent botli "^ a .....

movement and sus, ortus et occasus, ct similia. Et in talibus decipiun- 2 5

relation at once, . 1 ■ • „. • i- «.••■■ »

as ascetit &c. ■ tur plunmi propter lgnoranctam distincctonis mter
and the words citoitatem et velocitatem, seroitatem et tarditatem. Con-

earlmcss and . ....

rapidity are tmgit emm scx stgnis aliquibus oriri subito, vel occidere,

taken to mean . ri . . i • 1 1 ■•, ■

the same, quantumhbet tarde mota; quia celentas vel subitacio
whereas the talis non recipit velocitatem motus, sed quam cito ?o

tormer mdicate . l . •

oniy a relation erit sub onzonte vel supra orizontem. Nam quantum-
mtoe. 11 ^ cunque festinans vel citus erit quantumlibet tardus

What is early m otus; et quantumlibet sero crit quamlibct velox motus.
may be very ... . . *

slow; a thing Nam citissime vcl celerissime est quitquid cst in primo

la^te may^be instanti temporis; et plus scro ut ab eo distancius etc. 35

extremely Contingit idem, quamlibet celerius ascendendo, tardius

moveri, et econtra.

3. veri B. i5. afler tempore X B- '7 — iS. descedo B. 18. fp B.

23. di r B. 32. situs(l) B. 36. afte'do B.

i3. Difformh. Note above the definition of movement varied
in its subject; a distinction of no value in modern Mechanics.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. IO3

Sed contra dicta de posicione situum indivisibilium Objections:

, . . , . , ,. 1. lt the first

primo celesti videtur sequi quod non sit realiter cir- mo bilc couid
culare, eo quod non est racio quare unum situm cir- "^ 6 ^^
cumferret et duos situs inmediatos in ultima circum- part and in

, . , . . • • , another onlv

5 ferencia mundi ex uno latere, quin per ldem esset sic onej De ing
ad quemlibet punctum eiusdem circumferencie, cum s p^Jfe r^cal V i t

sit uniformissime curvitatis. Et tunc continue pertran- ought to'do
. . . . . ,. . • 1 , so everywhere,

B i34 b siret punctus maioris circuh duos situs, | dum punctus an d we must

minoris circuli describeret unum solum ; et sic in eadem sphericfty^or 8

iosuperficie circumferrent eidem puncto 6 puncta, et per admit that at an

consequens infinita mundi circumferrent eidem puncto points an

quotlibct puncta ex omni latere. Que duo sunt mathe- 'points^ i° f

matice impossibilia composicioni continui ex non moving round

1 each.

quantis.

i5 Item, proporcionaliter ut circulus est minor, est cur- . s 2 ' S mliie r CI i C, fs
vior; sed ad omnem punctum circumferencie mundi est more curved;
infinitum magna parvitas, et est uniformis tota curvitas
pcr totum composita ex non quantis: ergo, illa tota
superficies est summe curva; quod est summe inpossi-

aobile. Maior argumenti patet, ex hoc quod si circulus

maior mundi diminueretur ad non quantum, stante

continue circularitate, ille foret proporcionaliter curvior

sicud minor: ereo, etc. Aliter enim quelibet porcio now the pole
,. , & . ' • j • • , ' of the worid is

equabs foret precise eque curva sicud lpsa circulata; a point equal

25 quod est inpossibile, cum tunc tantam curvitatem con- ^jj^efi 13

tineret, quanta est curvitas tocius equinoccialis circuli. curved; and

1 ... , • ... each noint ot

Minor argumenti facti est patula cuicunque qui videt tnc W orld's
quod circuli paralelli equinocciali vcrsus polum, ut sibi ^'The^pole^of
propiores, sunt minores. Cum ergo quilibet punctus a circle; this

, . . „ . . , ,• • • circumterencc

3o dicte circumferencie sit polus respectu alicurus maions t hen, though
circuli, sequitur quod periret iudicium de parvitate possibie^drcle,

circuli ad quemlibet eius punctum. ought to be

• , • • ,- •* lntinitely

Item, circulus eqmnocciahs est unitormiter curvus, cur ved every

ut sepc captum est, si sub aliquo gradu sit curvus ; 3 . T h e h Equator
"^sed aliqua eius quantitativa pars curvabilis non est must have the

1 * . , »/r • » same curvature

curva; ergo, totus circulus non est curvus. Maior patet everywhere;
ex hoc quod quelibet 4' 1 , vel alia pars, eque distat a J^ somewhere

centro secundum quemlibet eius punctum: quod non so it is curved

1 nowhere.

2. p'mo cc" B. 3, 4. c'cufta B. 4. Tm u V>. 7. vmfor me B.
10. circufta et circuftae» B. 12 -i3. mat p B. i3. gponi B. 17. tta B.
23. r^te' B. 28. palelli B. 28. (' pro sibi B. 33. eT B.

104 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

esset, nisi servaret equalem curvedinem; ut patebit
igitur maior. Sed minor, sic assumpta, sic probatur :
pars quantitativa tenet tripunctalis huius circuli; non
est omnia; et per idem nulla pars finitorum punctorum
This is proved quo ad nos oportet quod curvitas sexti punctalis partis, 5

hv the fact that . , ...... ... , ,

' the line is si detur, esset mole divisibihs, et per consequens habet
succes^ion^o^ mUltas medietates partes, et per consequens (cum

groups of six a d omnem punctum circuli sunt tres ternarii punc-
points, which . . , , -

can be resoived torum) sequitur quod ad omnem punctum torent tres

'ofVhlch^no' g ratms curvitatum. Et sic curvitas foret linearis extensa 10

part is curvcd. per arcum ad quemcunque eius punctum, secundum

Taking l , • ,. - .,., „ • . . ,.

moreover two unum gradum lndivisibilem. Nam si multiphcetur per

apl of S tl?e f se" e lr * a P uncta > tunc m arcu sextipunctalis essent /\. nr cur-

triangles in line vitates habentes posicionem; et per consequens con-

with the . .. r . c- i c •

circumference, stituerent hnearem curvitatem. Sic est de tormis super- i?

ot tiie w^orid' ^JJi^is, quod si detur aliquam proporcionem dicti arcus

the three points esse rectam, tunc signata illa per A B, et signato centro
would torm a ,. _, . , . . . „ _ , ,

triangle with mundi per L, sequitur quod tnangulus A H C nabeat

^ngVel. duos angulos rectos, contra $2 am primi.

General p ro i s t oportet I supponere, sicud supra, quod situs Bi35 a

answer. ' '. . . ,

God alone mundi cum componitur ex non quantis, habeat eorum

composition composicionem, soli deo notam quam nos intelligendo

.° J f . t ! 1 ??? convincimus insureere ex puncto centrali duobus altrin-
mdivisible . ° , . . .

things of which secus copulatis, constttuendo triangulum mmimum pos-

consists- sibilem, et post quadratum A ; ac 3 pentagonum qui 25
but we supposc primo habeat racionem circuli, cum omnes semidvametri

that there is f. . r . '

tirst the centrai bipunctales ducte a centro ad circumterenciam sunt
P °two others' th ec l uales Eptagonus autem primo habet complecius

constitutes the racionem spere: et sic de omnibus aliis numeris circu-
smallest . '..'.. ,. . . ..

possible laribus ex hns dictis. Nec lndivtduatur parciahs situs -">o

anotfier' ex lsto ve ^ lsto parciali corpore situato, sed totus situs

makes fhe mundi individuatur ab hoc in mundo et eius principiis.
square ; then the . ... . ,. .

pentagon, that Parciales autem situs mdividuantur simphciter a parte
' approacii ° mu ndi sic magna vel sic posita. Et ita situs parciales

circulanty; inmobiles a nullo sin^ulari suo subiecto dependent, sed ^
afterwards . V r

the heptagon, ex materiali substancia et rigura secundum respectum

sphere; and a ^ inmobiles differencias huius mundi. Et tales situs
so on. immobiles possunt ingredi quecunque partes mundi

1. pteb' B. 3. t3 B. 4. oia B. 5. cssc pro oportet B.

i3. Dta B. 19. f, ul B. ; ib. 93 2 Rm p'nn B. 23. giuti 9 B. 24. coplat-c B.

29. deo uubus B. 29 -3o. t'tub9 B. 32. mndo B. 3;. after

mundi B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. I05

proporcionales aliis egredientibus a communi agregato,
acquirendo et deperdendo ex illis sitibus sua ubi.

Ad primum dicitur quod quilibet circulus maior 1. Every great

• • •• • circlchnstlic

mundi est uniformiter minime curvitatis, et quemhbet smallest
5 eius punctum circumstant in eodem circulo duo puncta; „ P°f!fi!? Ie „„,,

* L ClllVUilllc, ciIlG

et per consequens in alio circulo maiori intersecante each of its

... , , . , points has only

recte sperahter ad punctum datum tangunt lpsum ad two others, one
duo puncta; et punctus semidyametri mundi proxime j„ n t h||t h circle'
sibi directe suppositus in quinto ordine tangit ipsum; This point is

• • m a • . i- touched by

10 et sic quinanus qm 2 m Aristotehcos est pnmus numerus tw0 otne rs,

circularis sic est principium posicionis punctalium, sic th/g^eat^circle

et rinis. Alia autem puncta que lateraliter ipsum re- that intersects

...,,. ...... the tormer

spiciunt, sive puncto medio lllius ordinis mcidente, c i rc | e at right

non sunt sic inmediata vel ipsum tangencia, nisi forte a °$ th ' wll 1 cn y

i5equivoce, ut supra dicitur. Et correspondenter de com- is the end of

. . ,. ... ... ,. , ^, , ,. tlie radius ot

posicione lndivisibuium situum est dicendum. Concludi- tlie sphere; the

tur igitur quod quemlibet punctum circuli inmediate q be na ^ y t | n e m n j l

equinocciali supposite superstant tria puncta, unum as it is the
,7 . , , ...... beginning ot

directe terminando dyametrum, et alia duo laterahter, pos jtion in

20 que non tangunt nisi indirecte vel equivoce supra. Et T nr | 0a p O j nts

tamen totus circulus equinoccialis non excedit datum oniy are

, . . . , , • immediately

circulum suppositum, nisi solummodo uno puncto; quia above every
nec oportet nos sollicitari quis sit ille dispar punctus p J ir n | e t h| t ve j s y
terminans dyametrum solo puncto ab alio differente, tangent to the

, ,,..,, • • i- • 1- Equator;

2.ivel credere quod m llla porcione circuh tnpunctali sit yet the whoie
maior curvitas vel declinacio a rectitudine. bu^one^pofnt

Et patet quod nec sequitur quod quemlibet punctum more.

1 M . „ ? , M M . ' .. Thus there is

circumstent puncta lnnnita, sed et omnia puncta munui, no t an infinity

sicud et tota est universitas materialiter finita. Ymmo ^o, ^,^ 11 ,!^!,

3o ex composicione continui ex non quantis videtur pa- point.
, , . „ ... Here our

tulum quod omnium ysopenmetrorum hgura circulans system gives

sit capacissima; quia da B quadratum, et A circulum th * P™°f x ^ he

punctorum parium, et cum hoc, quod precise tot puncta most capacious
, . ,, . . , , , ligure of all,

B i3r' contineant prime superhcies mtercluse; | et patet quod n account of

35 linea quadrata proximi proxima intra B habet in 4 01 ' lhe h an | t |^ ei ot

angulis 4 01 ' puncta, communicata 4 suis lateribus; et figures, which

. ~ , , , . . „ necessarilv

sic usque ad quadratum centrale minimum. h.t per nave p ints

consequens, cum quelibet linea quadrata proxima inferior ^ ,™"^ 1 ^,,!! 16

continet per 4 01 ' puncta paucius quam sua exterior; sides, from the
, ^ r r , , outside to the

4° in circulo autem est excessus solummodo uno puncto; centre

2. fua vbi B. 8. fcuu*' B. q. quito B. 10. Ar-f°"" B. 21. cum
pro tamen B. 3^. pe B. 37. qrtu B.

106 JOHANNIS WYCLIF - CAP. IX.

patet quod est crementum multitudinis punctalium in

figura A circulari, racione uniformitatis linee et ampli-

tudinis angulorum supra illud quod est infra B, racione

uniformitatis linee et strictitudinis angulorum. Et ita

creditur esse radicalis causa demonstracionis in hac 5

parte.

2. it does not Nec sequitur ex istis quod trianeulus magis, et multi-
tollow, that tlic . . \ , '. c ,

more angles a angulus minus contineat, sed pocius oppositum. Sed

ligure has, tlie ^ene videtur dicendum contra quod par porcio minoris

less space lt . . .

contains; quite circuli minorem curvitatem continet porcione maioris 10
the contrary. , • • , , • • -,. ,

Nor that a circuh supenus ; sed omnes complctt ctrcuh equalem

circle can be contincnt curvitatem. Nec cst verum quod in curvitate
inhnitely curvcd . _ . . , .

or small. vel parvitate circuli desccnditur iniinite, cum status
Nor that thc , . . , a , .

least curved utrobiquc ponitur ad nnitum. Ncc ohest ad omnem

circle has less p imctum L | at j c irculi m inimc curvitatis esse eradum i5
curvature than r . . . . . . . .

that which is curvitatis maximum, qui non sit gradus minime curvi-
most so ; • „ .,., ....

all the points tatis. Lum enim quihbet punctus equinocciahs cque

are in hoth jj s t a t a ccntro, nullus est supra alium, sicut nec puncta

cases equally ... . ' '

distant from circuli cuiuscunque concentrici. Unde, sicut nec rec-

the centre. • , . . . ,.

Thus the titudo, sic nec curvitas est lormahter ln continuo 20

compound of bipunctali: sed primo ad minimum in tripunctali cau-

two pomts is i_ ? 1 _ r

properly saliter, que est in qualibet eius parte. Ideo non oportet

neither straight ...... . . .

nor curved; sollicitan circa partem punctalem rectitudims aut cur-
they begm 111 v itatis, sed intelliiri oportet quod nulla sensibilis porcio

the compound ' ..... . .

of three points, cuiuscunque minoris circuli minus curvari poterit quam 25

which is the ... . . .

cause of botli. P ar porcio circuh magni mundi, cum gradus sit proxi-

mus non gradui curvitatis. Et credo quod non sit

dare infra mundum situm conformissime curvum cum

situ porcionis circuli magni mundi. Nec est rectitudo

pcr aliquam partem dati circuli, licet nobis videtur 3o

superficies proporcionaliter curva ct constanti colorc

visibilis summe recta, ut patct de superficie spere

aque.

We necd not Nec oportet sollicitari circa quantitatcm aneuli con-

trouble about . ,. . „ ,

the angle of tingencic tante ex contactu recte hnee extra mundum;3o
tangency quia, ut alias dictum est, differendum cst a solueione

outside ot thc » m '

world, untii it talis argucie quousque positum sit probatum. Nec
be proved tbat • , . , ,. . . ■ ,.

space is ymaginan est de curvitate, vcl cahditate, vel quahtatc

P A S1 wt of C a C sm1 ''' uniformi quod quelibet pars quantitativa sit equc

quality cannot intensa cum suo integro, cum curvitas eiusdcm circuli 4°
be so intensc
as its whole;

1—2. infra A (?) B. n. s'_g 9 I?. i5. omncm pro esse B.

3i calorc )!. 32. fu e B. 3c). que pro quod.

GAP. IX. LOGICA. IO7

maior mole sit minori intensior, et curvitas cuius-
Bi36 a cunque | completi circuli summe intensa possibilis.

Unde ista consideracio de extensione curvitatis vide- thus the

• i_- j-.tr ji-u .. ■i"* curvature of

tur michi dinerenter contra quodlibet mihtare, cum a i ar ger circle

5 quocunque curvo signato, ad omnem eius punctum ,s fufi^Qf tnan

intrinsecum est non gradus curvitatis, et proporcionaliter smalier one.
,• ., • 1^3 This question

ut pars circuh est minor, sibi correspondet gradus j s a difficulty

rcmissior curvitatis. Et sic habent adversarii dicere tor m y.

opponents too.

quod totum circulum et quodlibet curvatum est non At every point
, . . . r ... ... . of evcry circle

rogradus curvitatis et lnhnitum remissius m quahbet sui possibfe there

narte. Et hic vellem quod dilisienter considerarent 1S "° c V rvatl "" c ''

. . . . . anc * as a

metaphisicam de puidditate et passionibus curvitatis et proportional

anguli. Tunc enim non mirarentur quomodo curvitas j S sma n er) it s
extensa est maior, nedum movetur mole, sed intencione, curvature is

lcss.

i5qualibet sui parte. Nec dubium quin tota curvitas Let them

examine with

quantitative componitur cx parcium curvitate, cum care wnat a
quelibet pars habet situaliter propriam curvitatem, que curve and ' an

t r _ i 1 ' t angle is; they

causat intrinsece propriam curvitatcm. will then

o j ,, • ,. ... . ,. understand how

Sed 2° si dicatur quambbet partem circub eque a i arger curve
20 curvatam qualibet et cum toto, eo quod curvitas atten- . . ls " 10re .

~ ' " . liitcnscly great

ditur penes curvitatem anguli ad punctum extrinsecum than a smaller
curvitatis (ut circulus maximus est minime curvus; cir- if t hey say that

culus autem in quantum minor fuerit est plus curvus) : eachpartofa

" . . . ' circle is as

contra illud videtur, primo, quod quelibet curvitas con- curved as the

, r. ... c . wliole, and that

25 sequens angulum acutum hgure rectilinee roret maior t ] le curV ature

quam curvitas cuiuscunque circuli, licet in inhnitum . is measured
' . \ . . hy the angle of

magna sit alia. Nam sicud angulus contingencie est tangency of
inhnitum minor quam angulus rectilineus alius acutus, j t WO uld follow
ut apparet, sic aneulus intrinsecus sibi oppositus est ,hat anv curve

. rr ' . ° . . tangent to an

3o maior quam alius angulus rectilineus. Sic videtur quod acute angle

. • , .,. . • r. . ■ would be

triangulus rectilmeus stt intinitum curvior quam cir- grea ter than
culus, et cst comparacio curvitatis ad curvitatem, sicut that ot a

'. ' ' circle,

anguli ad angulum, quam geometer admittit. Et tunc and that a
esset querendum utrum curvitas trianguli sit mole triangle would
35 macna. Sed videtur quod stat A lineam triangularum be mfinitely

- D . t . D more curved.

ad omnem eius punctum acquirere curvitatem, et nullam
deperdere; et tamen non esse curviorem in hne quam
in principio, posito quod ysocheles curvetur secundum
partem circuli usque ad F ad angulum exclusive. Et

12. q, t0 B. 18. propriam curvitatem (sic) B. 20. curvatum B.

25. minor B. 28. a's B. 3o. a's B. 3^. ee B. ; ib. quend, B.

108 JOHANNIS VVYCLIF CAP. IX.

patet conclusio, cum omnis linea sic eque curva sit
aliqua eiusdem pars, et quilibet angulus acutus rectili-
neus sit acucior angulo supra arcum. Casus videtur
possibilis, cum linea non potest secundum partem
curvari, nisi usque ad punctum terminans exclusive. 5

vfeufcfircularity ^° ^' c q ueuDet circularitas est per se curvitas, sed
and curvity nulla circularitas est maior circularitas quam que-

would be ... . _ . ^

identical, and libet; ergo, nec mator curvitas. Et sic sunt omnes
^are^uailv 5 circui i e q ue curvi. Ex quo plane sequitur quod circulus
circular, ali sit curvior qualibet sui parte, et pars eius, ut maior, ro

curves would . . ,, . ...,..„

be equai, sit curvior; et nulla curvitas porcioms circuh parinca-
an woufd°be Cle DU1S circu l° alteri, sed quod sit proporcio irracionabilis

more curved curvitatis circuli ad curvitatem cuiuslibet porcionis,
than any one ... .. ..... , . .

of its arcs, sicud trianguh rectihnei ad angulum continencie et
commeVsm-ablv an 8 ulLim S1D1 oppositum ; sed, quibuscunque circulis | Bi36 b
so; annotatis, tantam curvitatem continent semicirculi, et

but the semi- . . ....

rcle would be omnes sunt correlative proporcionales, licet partes pares

the circle

circulorum inequalium dispariter sint curvate; ut puta

porcio minoris circuli, magis curva. Sed recuperacio
est de maioritate proporcionalis porcionis maioris mi- 20
noris circuli. Nunquam tamen venitur ad paritatem
curvitatis porcionis circuli et curvitatem cuiuscunque
circuli, cum sint disparis racionis.

no^auantftathfe ^" x ^ uo vlcietur q uo <l curvitas circuli non habet par-
part of the tem quantitativam omogeneam, sicud nec fi^uracio eius;25

same nature: , . . ,.. .

bnt it is made se d habet quothbet partes quantitattvas, que sunt cur-
U| d'fferent ny vac ' ones - Et est dare certam multitudinem punctualium

curvenesses. ])eo cognitam in quibus ad minimum est minima cur-
ln each noint • , • • ... ^ >,, .,,

composing a vitas subiective, et m quohbet lllorum punctorum; et nla

curye there curvitas taliter erit multitudinc. Et sic ad omnem punctum 3o
is the least # '

possible circuli communicant in suis principiis parciales cur-
subjective . . ,. ,,..__..

curveness, vitates, ut supenus dictum est de tormis. Et hic est

which partial j are maximum circulum possibilem, et minimum,
pnnciples of . ; .

the curve are gradusquc minorum punctalium Deo cognitorum, in
everywhere •, • ^ , • , • - • , •

united in the quibus consistunt, dato circulo mintmi gradus curvita- 3o

circle.

tum. Nec est putandum quod in quolibet tripunctali
circumfercncie mundi sit curvitas subiective, que tunc
foret per totum summe aspera atque curva. Sed satis

1. c B. 17. fut B. 18, 10. utp porco B. 10. r'cu£a° B.

tq— 21. magis — circuli twice;ib. rcuga B. 20, 21. d 1 '^ b'"*> B. 26. quod-
libet, and so on very often B. 27. c'ca B. 28. de' B; ib, cog-

nita B. 3o. ca tBr B. ; ib. et B. 3y. fbmeq? B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. IOQ

est quod quelibet pars [sit eque] curva cum qualibet sibi

pari; penes hoc attenditur uniformitas curvitatis circuli.

Et si dicatur quod quandocunque due linee recte

applicantur ad idem, indirecte causantes angulum, ille n is true that

5 angulus est rectilineus, verum est si non sint partes ( |^° 5 mlefinc

circuli causantes ad omnem punctum sui intrinsecum, in one point,
. , . , ... . .... forra a

elementaliter sed non rormahter, angulum circuli qui rectilinear

correspondenter est multiplicatus intrinsecus sicud cur- jff n \Ve b _re°no
vitas. parts of a circle

. , n , .... . , . at that point.

10 Ad 3 U1 patet ex dictis solummodo quod prima con-

sequencia non valet; quia satis est quod quelibet 3. As for the
pars curva sit eque curva cum qualibet sibi pari th t ' h ^ Brst^art'
quod est sperale. Et ulterius de rectitudine angu- proves nothing ;

, , . .. ... . ... cvery part ot

lorum duorum tnanguh rectihnet, eo quod quehbet thc Equator is
1 5 semidyameter circuli causat ad eius circumferenciam curvod, and

J equally so.

angulum parem cum qualibet, et per consequens, una As for the

, ii- 1 argument of

dyametro stanle orthogonahter super arcum, tangendo two rightangles
angulum rectum, causabit et quelibet: quotlibet sunt m t i, a e ^radi 8 - 6 '

peticiones, descripciones, et conclusiones geometrice falling at right
• , c • ■ . e . angles 011 two

20 que videntur refrtngere tstam sentenctam; sed omnes, points touching

ut dictum est, intelliguntur de illis angulis et figuris thereare^man-v

ymaginacioni subditis; nos autem loquimur de illis que other dicta of
1 • ^ 11 i- • 1 a • gcometry sccm-

a solo tntellectuali nosci possunt, ut docet Augusttnus i„giy against

in De Qiiantitate Anime. Quod si quis dicat quod eque kut^thev* 611 .'

2 b verificantur omnes conclusiones geometrice de pure concern such
• . ||- •, •,-, • , . ., , figures as can

lntelligibtlibus, sicut de ymagtntbus, leve verbum est et be imagined,

B j3 7 .»sine probacionis efricacia eructatum; I et ideo non cre- not *° se _^w ,cl1

ditur sibi, nisi efficaciter approbetur. Quod si dicitur conceivable by

i_ i- r- i- i- -ii 1 tnt; mind,

capactsstmum et multos ahos expositores Euchdis lllud ;l nd there is

3 asserere; revera multi subtiliores, ut Pitagoras, De- n f ° f °" "g* 1 -^"
mocritus, Plato, Epicurus, et inter moderniores Lincol- that these latter
niensis cum aliis, sequentes tramitem veritatis, con- geomctrical
stanter asserunt oppositum. Ille tales topice raciones Jn t h a a * e ' S p ect
in materia doctrinali, deficiente demonstracione, adducte, authority is in

35 indicant defectum garulum argumentorum. Sic dico and to bring
quod nulla est conclusio demonstrabilis in continuis, fo a 7 c a ,m 0n L t s
quin sit demonstrabilis in lineis [et] numeris; sed forte proves a want
non econtra, propter ampliacionem subiecti prioris.

1. sit eque deest B. 2. pes pro benes B. 4. illius B. 7. ele ter B.

11. quelibet pro qualibet B. 17. candoB. 20. refu'g'e B. 23. mte" B.

2?. verificatur B. 27. erugatum B. 29. capa™ B. 3o. pita-
go'ess B. 32. tnntatiTB. 37. qu B; ib. et deest.

IIO JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

Wc hayc Et patet quod conclusiones geometrice non demon-

alre out tiiat strant cum precisione, sed cum exclusione erroris sensibi-

gcometry gocs \\ s . s icud dictum est de divisione cuiuscunque continui date
no farther tlian . ' . . . .

to insure linee, vel dati anguli 111 duo equalia. Sed modicus m prm-

SC absokitJ 10t cipio error maiorem efficit in processum in fine. Patet quod 5
exactitude. nullibi demonstratur cum precisione medietas propor-

No one can ..... ,

cver give the cionalis duple, cum petitur quod quanta sit proporcio
cxact value oi cumscun q Ue dyametri quadrati ad suam costam sicud
(relalion of the alicuius quadrati dyametri ad suam costam, quod arcus
diagonal to the s [i <j e numeris et per consequens de continuis claudicare. 10

square) Ymmo, capto quocunque quadrato, cum sit quothbet
commensurabi- dyametri 2 m capcionem punctalium variate, incertum

lity of one es t cuilibet eeometrico de quantitate et proporcione
arc with ......... f . . n , r . , •

another, intelligibihs dyametn; sicut, secundum Lincolmensem,

n Tela"ion tllC incognitus est sibi numerus punctalium sibi compo-i5
bctween the nencium ; et de dyametro sensibili habet coniecturam

diameter and , , ' , . .

the probabdem vel veram, vel ventate m propinqua, a

Al| C we f can nC d C o sensu incorrigibilem. In numeris ergo cognitis absolutis

is to get at consistit certitudo sciencie; et in sensibilibus langwet

such probabihty , , .

as is either erroneus et confusus. Quamvis, secundum Augustinum, 20
tr corre°c r tion y b" d scimus quod corpus omogeneum, eo quo numerosius
the senses." es t mellius aut maeis esset; sed cum ignoramus

All scientihc ° \

certitude lies numerum adequatum, et per consequens bonitatem
things^Te^sibie atque magnitudinem numerati, non possumus vere dici
are liable to cum tot lanewidis ienoranciis hic beati. Ideo vere dici- 25

contusion and , , - , • • , • • • 1

error, and tur quod beatitudo non consistit obiective ln athomis

therefore we p n : riir ;

are not happy c-picuri.

here below. £ t si dicatur quod sicut variatur medietas maior

It may be said . ...... .,. . ... ...

that we can get continui, que mdivisibiliter plus excedit, sic potest dici
exactitudeUius;*! 110 ^ totum habet se in proporcione dupla ad utrumque; 3o
'!' A i, s , divided q U amvis zophista concederet conclusionem, dicens quod

into 15 and C, ^ r . , . . ,

B exceeding C tam proporcio 5 ad 3 a quam quinque ad duo potest

th^n we P ha"e erronee dici dupla, non tamen exinde sequitur quod

A _ii , £ sit dupla: videtur tamen michi quod nemo potest dicere

Some wifl proporcionem huius esse duplam, sicut nemo potest 35

answer: It may dicere vel intellieere quod non potest esse; ut hic
be called the . . . ^ . „ r .

doubie, but it supponitur ex ahbi declaratis. Cum ergo pnma racio

doubfeof mensurandi reperiatur in numeris, excludens cum pre-
either. cisione quantitatem ad quantitatem proporcionis, attinet

But vou cannot n . n , 1 j • 1

calfanything errorem quemhbet secundum superhabundanciam vel 40
that which is
impossible,

0. ar c9 B. 16 fl" B. 21. uuofius B. 34. eo quod B.

35. ee' B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. III

defectum; sic quod si A est duplum ad B, non est if A is the
plus vel minus quam eius medietas; et sic de aliis B° cannot be

B 1S7'' proporcionibus est senciendum. I more or less

1 X ,. ' , . than its half.

Consequenter restat dicere penes quid velocitas aug- Of velocity in

5 mentacionis attendi debeat; primo tamen supponitur au^mentation
quod motus augmentacionis sit motus secundum quem '• II is tne

, . . „ , .. . . movcment bv

substancia maioratur. Ex quo patet quod distingwitur which a
a diminucione et motu locali, cum nichil diminucione bccomesTa^ccr.
formaliter maioratur, licet diminucio unius faciat ipsum ,. . Tllis

.... .... . distinguishcs

lovei aiiud maiorari et habet tam termmum ad qitem it trom
quam materialem quantitatem. Et multo evidencius, nec local^novement
motus localis nec aucmentacio est alteracio. Licet enim and , botl1 if and

. .. ' . , . . . the latter trom

motus locahs sit ad quantitatem contmuam, quia ad alteration;
locum illum, non tamen acquirit sibi [qualitatem] for- drfereni ° f
i5maliter sive intrinsece, sed ubicacionem, que est sep- qualities, they

. , ,. , ., , • , 01l| V imply a

timum genus entis. Ideo dicunt philosophi quod tantum new site

in 2 bus predicamentis, scilicet in quantitate, et qualitate, a cquire t .

et ubi, est motus, ut per se materiis motuum pro-

priorum.

20 2 supponitur quod, augmentacione large accepta 2. There arc

convertibiliter pro maioracione substancie, est aliqua aVgumeinadon ;

augmentacio communiter dicta et aliqua proprie dicta in a ) Vid , c sensc

. ... % . f . it tncludes

augmentacio communiter dicta est maioracio manimate expansion evcn

substancie. Augmentacio vero proprie dicta est in mai- ot ""body"? 1111110

25oracione substancie animate per corporeum nutrimentum hut ' lt strictiy
.... ... „ . r r . . . means only

quod sibi assimilat. Frima autem maioracio nomine the increasc

rarefaccionis, et 2 a nomine augmentacionis appropriate bynutrition.

exprimitur. Et differunt, ut patet ex dictis. Nam iuxta Aristotle says

• , • ,• / • r-. ^ ■ that m tllls

sentenciam Aristotehs (primo De Generacione), ad aug- movement the

3o mentacionem proprie dictam requiruntur 3 11 per ordinem: bai m ust'be CCt
primo, quod moveat idem subiectum a principio usque increased,
ad finem motus inclusive; sed hoc commune est cuilibet
motui successivo, cum motus capit unitatem a subiecto.
2° oportet quod quelibet pars quantitativa sensibilis that the sensibie

33 primo aucti secundum formam eandem sit aucta; et '"bia^^each

consimile oportet contingere in quolibet motu suc- partofit;

cessive. Et 3 oportet quod fiat per alimentum cor- and that it

should be

11. materiam B. 14. qualitatcm deest B. 16. est (!) cutis B.
20. augmtativc B.

9. Dimimtcio faciat ipsttm . . . maiorari. As, c. g. the

pruning of a tree causcs it to grow more vigourously

112 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

caused by tbe poreum adveniens similanti; quod speciale est augmen-
aSSII food°" "' tacioni. Sed iste due posteriores condiciones habent

Wc mnst difficultatem aput irretitos in singulis principiis. Ideo
remember tliat , . ._. . ,

every notandum, ut alhbi diffuse exponitur, quod omne sup-

individurteV by positum speciei capit individuacionem ab omni illo quo 5
what causes it, cap h causacionem: et sic est dare eradus individualibus

and tliat Ihe . r , . ! , . ,

form which singulanum secundum ydemptitatem numeralem unius

a substalfce ve ^ ph.irium causarum a quibus individuacionem huius-

is indivisible. m odi sorciuntur. Sed notandum quod quelibet forma

substancialis mixti et specialiter anima quecunque, 10
subiectum suum inmediatum actuans, est indivisibilis
quo ad molem. Sed et illud declaratur alibi diffusius.
3. So long as p x n U ibus 2, potest convinci quod, manente eodem

an animal . ,. , r i i- i

exists, its form animah, manet eadem rorma, a qua caput vel aliud
sanTe^buwfs organum habet propriam quantitatem. Et per consequens, i5

matter may }j cet nova materia adveniat vel antiqua defiuat, tamen
vary, , . ,

manet eadem pars quantitativa tn numero secunuum

formam, cum manet eadem forma in numero licet

materia varietur. Nec exinde sequitur migracio formc

and must do vel eius incorruptibilitas alium inlinitans. Quamlibet 20

therefore a at"a er g° partem quantitativam | primo aucti sensibilem ma- Bi38

certain timc. ne ntem eandem in numero secundum formam, oportet

, Digestion m a liq ua na rte temporis augmentari.

bcj;ms in tlic * l \ , . , . ,

mouth and Nec obest quotlibet elementorum tn humtdorum

it conttaues in inimicicias generari, cum sita prima digestione in ore 20

the liyer and et stomacho, et senarato in puro terrestri ac per in-
thc midnrt (?) . .' l . x ,,.,..

whencc a part testtna demisso, oportet m epate celebran digestionem

lS the P bladder n - t0 secundam subtili, a quo in epato mitricori expulso a

and it venibus ad vesicam; et x° in corde alimento decocto,
tcrminates m . . ,.."....... -

the heari. vel subttlius pnmo virtus regittva distnbuit per artertes .0

in the capillary et venas spiritus triplices cum sanguine membris augen-

^an^actfon dis, quantum exigunt de natura. Et adhuc in venis

going on which ca pillaribus secundum rorem causabilium et glutinum

is thc last * .,. . .,, . ,

compiiment of est quantum sensibihs destillacto, et membrorum attrac-
augmentation. c j Q ^ a j motus augmentacionis ultimum complementum. 35
Et sic semper manet membrum spermaticum aparentibus

3. unt'tos B. ; ib. finlis B. 24. hunoi-* 5 B. 27. tolebrari B.

28. sub"" B; ib. ago B; ib. mit'co'i B. 33. ca 1 » cambium (?) B.

28. Mitricori and below, mit' il '. I have rcndered this as the
'mulriff, but only on account of the peculiar resemblance of
sound with the word, for I have not succeeded in finding it
anywherc. The whole passagc is very corrupt.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 113

contractum, humido cibali comixtum; sic quod nun- Thc scmen,
quam est pars huiusmodi secundum formam ex pure e ' V pareiits he

cibali humido integra, sed ex humido seminali quod always rcmains
, . °,. • , • , ■ '" the bodv,

est subiectum lnmediatum ct essenciale vite vel anime. combined with
5 Forme quidem complexionalcs inducuntur in cambium, produced^bv

quod continuatum cum mcmbro augmentato, nec augetur, alimentation;

n . . . . , l , , ° ' and this

nec membn materia; scd membrum manens ldem, non compound

secundum materiam, sed sccundum formam multiplica- huthour^is the

tam per totam materiam antiquam et novam, est per immediate
.... . . n ,. l . subject of lifc.

10 assimilacionem tactum maius; et quamdiu manet vis Thc mattcr of

assimilativa mitriti ut membrum secundum terre dya- [ tS eif ^ncreased-
metrum fiat maius, tamdiu manet augmentacionis no- but t,,c toi ' m

, . ' . . . ■ e • 1 (or soul ) takes

tencia. Unde, sicut vis vini per aque lnrusionem adeo new matter to

ebetatur quod non sufhciat ulterius aquam commutare; ' membeMs Ch
i?sic vis augmentativa, per infusionem cibalis huiusmodi, increased bv

. . . . r . . , ' assimilation, so

paulative remittitur; ut m puens quidem propter lon^ as the

membrum molle, commixtioni obediens, sic quod propter power of^thc

virtutis fortitudinem est aucmentacio satis velox. Et ad midriff remains

. , ,. , ... entire.

terminum status augmentati, claudtcante calore, assimila- But this

20 cionem complctant, in adipem vel arvinam animam; et de- forced?m?nishes

mum in seminio, mortificatis cornoralis snermaticis, detkiit ;IS mo ! c mattcr
...,.,' , • , ,• , • 1S assimilated.

cibale humidum cum humido naturali, quo usque subiec-

tum anime sit consumptum ad imum naturale.

Et patet quod augmentacio differt a nutricione, a Augmentation

2? mixtione, et a corporis inanimati assimilacione. A from^mitrition

nutricionc, cum sit maioracio, et sic nutricio; a mix- as ir implies it

tione, cum auctum non ut sic confunditur, sed quan- combination,

tificatur; ct ab inanimati assimilacione, quia nutrimen- whlch is'

tum digerit, preparat, distribuit, et ad sui complementum increased
• tt 1 • 1 • • • < • merely gains

• i o convcrtit. unde, si lapis aut vinum haberet vim attra- quantity; and

hendi humidum cibale, et convertendi ad sui conser- erowth of

vacionem, ut habent vivencia, proprie augerentur. Nunc inanimate
c ' ,• , • ll » n gs on

autem ht totum novum, et naturabter decst virtus et account of the

organum, cum natura in fin] animatis non intendit v p r oduces. S "
B t38 h talem finem I .

Ex tstis tamcn potest caven error in quo quondam I( lsa mistak

... , , • . •, , ■ • • . •, • to think tnat

uesipui, quod humuium cibale sit m aucto tnbibi- the alimentary

tum, usque ad coextensionem alimente cum aucto; ""noT ' S

et sic humidum cibale foret eiusdem complexionis vel distinguished

r trom the being

which it

nourishes :

5. canibm B. 11. mit'" B; ib. terram B. 17. ct pro sic B.

19. calore est B. 20. armna B. 21. fe nin B; ib. morti 1 ' 8 B. 23. <)fup in
adim m B. 29. di'git = dirigit ? B. 34. animatis B. 36. in quod, B.

Il 4 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

temperancia cum humido naturali quod natura ex pro-

for then man pria materia et virtute informativa in matrice dirigit. Et

immortal l by s i c r osset homo pro statu lapsus naturaliter perpetuari,

nature, thc cum an j ma foret indifferens habere humidum naturale
subject ot htc . . .....

being vel humidum cibale pro subiecto: quod est lmpossibue. ?

TiumouTgiven Oportet ergo quod sit unum essenciale subiectum
by nature and v j te ve j anime, cui cibale humidum sit continens, et

that supplied .,,,,. ,..,..

by food. lllud subiectum oportet debuitan continue, cum com-
contrary^^this mixtio sit tam tenera quod necessitatur dissolvi et ab
first subject extrinseco dissolvente et ab intrinseco; sic quod, posita 10

of vitality must . . .

be continuaily optima conservacione possibih nature sic tenere, dum
the^ixmre of medium continens celum cum suis qualitatibus sic ipsam
fresh ciements, respiciant, est inevitabile quin vel ocius vel in fine sue

until the time r , . , . -

of dissoluticn peryodi corrumpatur. Sed sicud segetes mrra annum
just^aTwe see naturaliter maturescunt, et, quantumcumque bene servate, i5
thatcorn ripens a( j u ltimum dissolvuntur; sic senciendum est de homine

in the spacc . ,. .

of a year, but et de quocunque animah. In quohbel enim anno solan,
made^to livc deditus optimo regimini, inevitabiliter veterascit. Tunc

longer. vero foret accio tardissima inter calorem naturalem et
And there . . ...

is besides an humidum 2 m moctonem ceh per medtum continuitatis 20

aCt celestial et nutrimentum appositum instrumentaliter transmu-
sphcres on the tatis, et istam mutacionem celi limitantis periodes, ex

human body, 7 . . r .

limiting its 2° De generacione. [Hoc] pretermittunt pueri, putantes
to whichTomc ex proporcionis equalitate, vel eius diminucione, accionem
pay no j n m ixto posse cessare similiter, vel remitti, vel tardari 23

attcntion, . r . -. . '

thinking it eciam ad omnino [nonj gradum. Sed mduDie oportet

indefinitely tunc prohibere celum diftorme, ne sic, secundum di-

weakencd. V ersos angulos radiorum variatorum in fortitudine,

currat sibi opposito in circuitu, et percuciat sic varie

partes mixti; et quod partes hominis uniformis mix- 3n

tionis haberent continue alimentum eis adequatum :

quod est impossibile propter necessitatem et omogenia-

rum parcium, et propter inpossibilitatem motuum qui-

bus paulative partes alimentum attrahunt, conglutinant,

extendunt. 35

Thc alimentary Sicud ergo humidum unctuosum, superfusum liquori,
humours . . . ,. . . . . .

hinder this non tmpedit simphciter eius consumpcionum, sed miti-
aC spiieres. 1C g at j SIC huiusmodi cibale non impedit simpliciter
If the heavens consumpcionem huiusmodi radicalis. Quod si celum

2. mat'ce B. 11. te"' e B. i3. vtia notia? B. 20. ijti» B.

23. Hoc dee.it B. 26. adomio; tb. 11011 deest B. 29. i n fhioto B;

ib. pcrtuciai 15. 36. Ach lno B. 38. sed yro sic B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 115

staret, et elementa in homine essent ad tantam vyere

equalitatem propcrcionaliter sublimata quod non and*"" 5

dissolveretur per accionem ab intrinseco, nec elements in

. . perfect

egerent influencia celi ad regulandum modum sue equilibrium

5peryodi, nec extrinseco alimento, tunc, inquam, thenmarfcould

compatitur secum, ymmo consequitur mortalis cor- not on, y,
r 7 J . * . escape death,

poris ad anime unionem, non solum lnmortahtas, but death
que est dispositio cum qua corpus hominis stat non impossible.
mori; sed disposicio cui repugnat mortem succedere H °w far such

' r . . .... conditions are

10 vel coesse. De istis autem disposicionibus, quomodo possibie, is a
sunt philosophice possibiles, est teologorum discutere. ^tteoiogy?
Ouo potest caveri error quo creditur auctum, a We must not

. ... . . , . suppose that

B 1 3<i b principio | augmentationis usque ad nnem, continue this movement
augeri. Tunc enim foret omne auctum per tempus CO ntinual from
i5sensibile summe magnum; quia si in quolibet eius in- tirst t0 ,ast '

D . . . . for then the

stanti intrinseco per continuacionem cibalis humidi, body wouid
eciam secundum minimum naturale, foret tanta quan- thaii the^whole
titas novi corporis aquisita, oporteret ut agregatum in world;

r " ' * ° ° it must takc

fine servatum excederet totum mundum. Oportet ergo place at
20 quod in certis instantibus, finitis eciam nobis, licet jnstants, by no

incoenitis, fiant continuaciones minutarum parcium ali- m . eans infinite

& . ' r . 111 number,

menti. Et per consequens oportet quod finite mu- and thus it is

. . ^ • • composed,

taciones mstantanee pnncipient motum augmentacionis, according to

quem commentator ponit componi ex multis motibus Averrhoes, ot
" . . many

25 et multis quietibus. Unde superfluum est credere quod movements and

,., . ... rests.

augmentacio pro quohbet mstanti a suo prmcipio us- There are

que ad finem maneat continue, cum multis morulis different acts
" » .. which prepare

intercisis. Sunt motus augmentacionem preparatorii, it, none of

ut alteratio, motus localis, rarefaccio, condensacio, com- augmentation,

3o mixtio, nutricio, et conversio alimenti: ex quibus (ut bllt a

> . ' . . necessary

principiis) augmentacio resultat. Nullus enim illorum accompani-
y • , ^. . ment thereof.

motuum est augmentacio vel eius pars quantitativa,

sed requisite ad augmentacionem concomitans.

Et quantum ad continuacionem augmentacionis tem- During the

35 poralem, dicitur ut supra, quod ipsa est adequate per ^if^^cfoes

tempus compositum ex instantibus intercisis, et pro not take plape,
... ..... . , it merelv

mensuns medns non existit; in quibus tamen haoet remains in

disposicionem vel potenciam propinquam ad existenciam ab< ^s" c ^ so

actualem. Et correspondenter dicitur de servacione, conservation.

5. tt iuq^ B. 6. mortalitas B. 10. coec B. 18. oportet; ut

deest B. 21. in concretis B. 23. augonis B. 28. p£ato'y B.

3o. nut'co B.

Il6 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

That que ex magna augmentacione elicitur. Nec movet

angmcntatioii q UO( j augmentacio vel ens post sui corrupciohem

rccommcncc reincipit; quia talia successiva, tempore discontinua,

disappearing, 2 m partes frequenter desiniunt et incipiunt sicut con-

noihine; tinua, licet non possint, postquam totaliter deticerent, 5

for wc know reincinere eadem in numero. Nec illud negabitur cir-

lliat undulatorv ' ,. . ,.

movcmcnt, ' cumspecte ab aliquo qui concedit tremorem, sonum,
JuRin^ Ar saltum vel motum aliquem ex reflexis motibus agre-

W ■ I I n I I J y^ • v\. ^ * •*

are not catum. Sicud ereo procressus vel saltus per stadium

continual ° . . , ° .' ,, . .

motions. requint multas quietes tnterpollatas requtsitas pri- i<>
marie ad partes posteras, et ex omnibus illis fit una
progressio agregata seu cumulata; sic proporcionaliter
lt is a coiicctivc j e auementacione est ponendum. Unde, qui negat

cntity, like & \ , » 1 o

sotind, talem motum, negare debet omnem sonum, omnem
or a peopie, or j u t acervum Evidencias autem que videntur i5

a heap ot r i '

things. Jn oppositum militare, facillimum est deceptis solvere.

Objections. Primo quidem creditur, sed nimis erronee, quod

movemcnt, motus in instanti preterito vel futuro eo non est quod

past or tuture • n instanti deest. 2° false creditur quod motus
is non-existent. n

2. Evcry talis non est nisi secundum quamlibet eius partem sic 20

movement . 011 •.. »-i

must eithcr bc vere continuus. Sed hoc non saptt vere ponenttbus

continuous 01- com p OS i c i on em continui ex non quantis, et ponentibus
not be at all. 1 _ -.'.,,

Our system omne totum ex partibus esse collectim, omnes tllas

solves thcsc r „ ,

very easily. quantumcunque fuennt separate. 3 probatur erronee
3 ' If . a j quod, si motus pro dato instanti non fuerit, pro hoc 20

movcment does M > t ....,'.

not exist at a tunc est quies sibi opposita; tunc non simihter vel si est,
S its contrary' sicud et quies; et, quia motus et quies sunt contraria,
existsthcn; tunc e idem subiecto duo opposita I simul insunt:Bt

two contranes . r r_ 1 _

in the ignorando quod duo opposita, sicut suts temponbus,
same subjcct. . . , . , . , _

But two stcut et suis locts, utrobique sunt sic stmul. .->o

contraries can Quarto, caveri debet de subiecto motus augmen-

exist m their . . . .

time and place. tacionis, ne credatur ipsum esse mole continuum aut

4. We must /-. 1 • • • . • i

guard against quantum. Condam entm putavi tstam ractonem ue-

thinkins that naonstrative nrocederc per omnem partem antiquam
the subject ot ' r . . . .

the aucti est quies augmentacionts continuencta, et per 35

aucmentalivc . ., . ,. . .

force is a omnem partem assimilacione altmentt noviter generatam.

continuous jr sl ec j am continue aucmentacionis privacio, quo ad
quantitv. B . * ' ^ .

Jt is said that omnem punctum augendt, est conttnue augmentacionis
it were so, no privacio, et per consequens non est possibile aliquid
increase wouid au g er i; cum hoc oporteat, si aliud debet augeri, oportet 40

2. mlens pro vel ens B. 16. ddecept? (?) B. 26. t^ B. 3i. c'co
pro quarto B. h. aut non B. 37— 3<j. Est - ct (!) 15.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 117

quod per totum sit continue nori gradus talis motus. But the

»t ii- j i- u' r .. • smillest

Nec valet dicere quod aliqms motus multiphcetur; quia possible

per idem quilibet; et sic per idem nullus foret difformis subject of this

r w *" n ' r torce lmplies

quo ad subiectum ; sed habens motum non movetur, that one

- m-l u- t^» u- .. » indi visible

5 cum motus qmhbet sit ubique. Et hic oportet notare degree of

minimum subiectum augmentabile, et per ipsum oportet augmentation

intelligere gradum augmentacionis mole indivisibilem multiplied, like

. . c ,. . l ,. , !•- c ■ ,• all other torms

multiplicari, ut dictum est de alns lormis, que indi- individuated
viduacionem suscipiunt a subiecto, et quotquot sunt by their

r . . subjects.

iopartes huiusmodi primo aucte, tot sunt augmentaciones Certain parts

mole indivisibiles que constituunt totum motum. compouncf

Unde, ad coenoscendum fundamentum huius materie, 0, 'S ans > a|ld

, , . otners are

oportet scire quod parcium hominis sunt quedam sim- elementary

plices, et alie ex eis composite. Simplices autem To the first

iSspermatice sunt os, cartilago, et ligamentum, nervus, belong bones,

arteria, et vena; et quandoque non spermatice, ut tendons,

, , • -ii 1-.. -^ • nerves, arteries

caro, pingwedo, adeps, auxongia, villus. h.t lta scien- an d veins;

dum de medulla, pilis, et unewibus, que ab aliquibus also flesh, fat,

' r ^ 7 ' l J . anuvilli;

vocantur membra, et ab aliis partes superflue. Cuius- each

2olibet enim talium quelibet pars quantitativa per se nature with 6

sensibilis [esfj eiusdem racionis cum toto. Ideo di- ""-' w,1ole -
cuntur simplices quo ad alias quantitates. Unde vene,
corda, panniculus, et cuncta que sunt mere spermatica,
musculus et lacertus, que sunt partim spermatica di-
2? cuntur consimilia; quia multum accedunt ad omo-
geneitatem membrorum simplicium.

Membra autem composita sunt, que ex istis quanti- To the second

tative specialiter componuntur, et ex illis integrantur : composed of

membra officialia, intrinseca et extrinseca ; ut cor, ce- t,,e . ", rs ,!'. t

3orebrum, epar, testiculi, caput, brachium, tibie, cum sibi the liver, the

similibus. Post 3 S quidem digestiones, generatis 4 or head, the'arm,

humoribus et 3 b " s spiritibus, augentur tres manieres xhe^latter are

membrorum constancium. Sed membra simplicia et augmented by

, ... , . • digestion,

membra consimilia, membra composita communiter; b„ t tlie f or mer

3? et cum quodlibet istorum membrorum habent quotlibet h , ^a i-*t s "i h aV

cannot be

augmented.

(). quodquod B. 10. aucta B. 16. vere or non (?) B. 17. auxugi B.
21. est deal B. 23. paniclus B ; ib. canctis B. 3|. gut' B. 35. habetB.

1 b. It is not easv to understand what Wyclif means by
spermaticus. Possibly the word signiries those tissues, that
(as he supposes) have been formed directly from the semen;
and then we must understand in the same sense the expressions
'membrum spermaticum', and 'humidum seminale' which he
says is the rirst (or directr) subject of the augmentative force.

Il8 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

partes quantitativas (quia elementa) que non potuerunt

augeri; sicud ubique est non gradus motus nature in-

Everywhere mobilis, et tamen ubique est motus mundi. Sic ergo

placeTy means ubique per subiectum primo auctum est augmentacio,

ofthefirst cum uniformiter quelibet pars quanta primo aucti pro 5

subject of ^ . . r l .

augmentation, tempore augmentacionis augetur proprie; et per con-
bemg^necessary sequens habet in se augmentacionem | huiusmodi B 140"
that the rest successive; vel aliter est principium intrinsecum ita

should mcrease . r . r . ..

m itself. aucti, et tunc habet augmentacionem multiphcatam per
Yet the rest se totum. Et patet auod assumptum argumenti peccat 10

mcrcti scsin .

one sense, in materia, cum multa membra antiqua augentur,

thou fo t '- n does et per consequens partes quantitative inaugmentabiles

another; as non subiciantur quieti ab augmentacione, cum eius

God has . ? ° . _

essentiai oppositum non sit nattim formahter messe. Lonce-
pr soul C of in he he ditur tamen quod tam per partem novam quam peri3
sinner, whiie p ar tem antiquam est au^mentacio modo suo, et simul

He is absent J ? c .

from it by His cum hoc eius pnvacio, stcud Deus qui natus est m-
grace " esse menti per graciam, deest menti peccatrici ob eius
culpam, licet assit secundum eius essencialem conser-
vanciam. Sic augmentacio deest elemento secundum 20
formalem et denominativam inherenciam, licet insit
secundum naturalem causanciam.
The rapidity of Et quo ad velocitatem motus augmentacionis, di-
measured by Cltur q uod attenditur penes quantitatem aquisitam
the size primo aucto, in comparacione ad tempus. Non enim 25

acqiured, and r * . . .

the time taken ; est continue nova quantitas per totum, ut sompniavi

quando negavi composicionem continui ex non quantis.

so too for £r t proporcionaliter dicendum est de rarefaccione. Illud

exnansion. . * r , , , .

enim rarefit velocius quod per equale tempus vel mmus
Timc is occupat cum corpore inbibito plus. Et tantum de situ 30
thefirst^anci corporeo. Et de tempore notandum est primum in-
last instant; s tans et ultimum; et in mediis instantibus dicendum

dunng the ' . .

interval est motum esse ? vel 2 m existenciam mutari, aut mu-

«oiii" C oii'Ui tatum esse, vel secundum disposicionem aut potenciam

not complete. propinquam in suis causis proporcionaliter, sicud motus 35

dicitur inesse corporibus.

Of AUeration: p_ t j e istis incidit tractandum de velocitate motus
iis velocity. ,.._,. . _• ■

Properly alteracionis. Sed primo, supposita commum noticia
speaking, this

3. S c B. 26. nowa B. 33. exua^ B.

37. Alteratlon afccn sounds badly here, hardly agreeing with the
usiial English sense of tbe word; but the other expressions -
change, mutation, modification, &c. — do not render tbe precise
meaning any better. It is a material, but not substantial change.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. I IQ

de alteracione, quod est et quid est, notandum quod being a

solum substancia sensibilis est proprie alterabilis, cum movement

totum genus motus successivi sensibile commune sit. ,. only

D . . . matter can be

Substancie autem sensibiles, ut forme et matene; et altered;

5 intclligencie sunt alterabiles alteracione communiter u beingl 6 "

dicta, acquirendo bonitates, sciencias, et alias quali- „ «ndergo

' . ? . • • alteration m a

tates spirituales non habentes contraria, sed privative wide sense.

opposita. Sed fundamentaliter cognoscendo substanciam

alterabilem, oportet cognoscere materiam vel formam

ioet earum composicionem, cum substancia sit prior

accidente, cognicione et definicione et tempore. Quo There is one

... , . • • matcrial

ad noticiam, ymaginandum est lgitur unam essenciam essence,

corpoream, in principio productam, esse cx indivisi- ^ 1 ^ 1 ^,,'/ 1 J lle

bilibus composita, et occupare omnem locum possibilem composed of

, . ,. • , •, noints, lilling

i.i nec esse secundum eius partem aliquam corruptihilem, a ll space, and

nisi forte per divisionem vel separacionem unius par • mcorruptible,

* ' * except ln so

tis a reliqua. Sed cum oportet illam totam essen- far as one of

, , . , ,.- i- its parts may

ciam habere quamcunque partcm talem aitqualiter ^e separated

continuatam, patet quod illa essencia simpliciter est trom an °ther.

' i n i We conceive

20 incorruptibilis; et illa essencia primo fuisse concipitur that this

. . ,. . ... essence was

sub racione qua ens simphciter, et nec ut tgnis vel fn-stiy mere

aer, vel cuiuscunque alterius generis vel speciei; j lls b t e a " g {i 1c

quomodo gramatici dicunt pronomen singulare meram singular

i • r> i , -i i • i • -j » personal

substanciam. Sed philosophi, ultenus considerantes, pronoun

B 140'' quamlibet | talem essencialem essenciam esse unum ^g"^*,™^ 16

absolutum cui per se competit substare accidentibus, Philosophers

tribuunt sibi substancialitatem. Et post modo, con- substance or

siderata eius extensione, attribuunt sibi corporeitatem body^because

quam Linconiensis vocat lucem. Et 3° formam generis extension.

.... .. , . .. , .. , , • Matter, torm,

io proximi, ut ammahtatem, lapiditatem vel aliud nuius- an j C ompound,

modi. Et quarto, considerata racione sufficienti, at- are S o 1 ! t g f nt

tribuunt sibi forma specialissimam ; ideo dicunt philo- substance, but

, . , . : .. . ,. c this corporal

sophi quod substanciarum aha matena, alia rorma, substance is oi

alia compositum ex hiis. Unde substancia corporea, ngtn^/^the

35 que est genus, non univocatur, nisi et composicione compound.

ex materia et forma. Sed quando loquimur de ma-

terie et forma tantum, vocamus ipsas ipostases, vel

naturas, vel supposita.

Considerando ergo specialiter partem sublunarem Restricting our

,. . . , . , / , speculations
40 mundi esse m potencia ad esse lgnem vel aerem (vel

sic de aliis sensibilibus corporum), posuerunt potenciam

25. quamlibet twice B. 29. luce" B. 35. composicionem R.

120 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

to the esse talem materiam; et igneitatem, aeritatem vel la-
sublunary • , • . / _ • , ... . c „

world we see pideitatem (et sic de alns), esse formam. Et compo-

,h of it mar P be X Sllum qualitative ex hiis, quod est composicio, vocant
tire, air, &c. : ignem, lapidem, vel aliquod tale. Et istam potenciam

this possibilitv ,, • ........

is matter — ■ eternam, que nullam speciem corpons sibi determinat, 5
a irn!.« De Ar ;. vocant materiam primam, fundamentum nature, vel,
form; and the secundum grecos, ylen; et formam dicunt subsistenciam

resulting whole , • ...

is fire, air, &c. ve i usiasim; compositum vero ex hns vocant super-
different and all stans> Quarum quelibet differt a reliqua, et omnes

three are the ille sunt eadem singularis essencia; ut materia prima, 10
essence. vel potencia dicens relacionem ad formam vel actum,

^first^out of e est primum horum trium. ex quo procedit actus. cum

which claudit contradiccionem quod talis materialis potencia
necessarilv ■ c i • , , ,•

proceeds form ; sit sine rorma vel actu. sicud econtra claudit contra-

"be without" 1 «Jicci 01161 " 1 " 1 aliquam formam corpoream fore sine ma- i5
matter; nor teria; et claudit contradiccionem illa duo reponi, nisi

can the two be , .. ... l

withom the sequatur ex hns composicio vel compositum, quorum
compound. trium quodlibet est eadem essencia singularis vel

essencia corporea.
hfve^once Unde, inter alias occupaciones varias quas habui, 20

fancied that doleo de solicitudine mea superflua, vmaeinando for-

matter and . , , L 7 j a

torm were mam et matertam esse absolutas res quarum utramque
separabfe posicionem existere per se, et ex illis coextensis resul-

realities, tare unum ad aliqualem motum quo duo liquida yma-
torming a , . .,./

compound by ginantur ad mvicem commiscen. Et lllis superad-2?

twoMiquids* d ' L ^ accidencia, tanquam res abstractas que possunt
with per se cxistere; sed procul a me ista posicio! Quelibet

snnperadded ,.. . . , .

accidents: ergo talis substancia, vel corporea essencia ; est trina,
tnis e opfnfon. et l ier conse quens non ultimum singulare, cum sit

Every bodily multorum singulorum, scilicet materia et forma et 3o
substance is .... ,

not one, but earum connexio ad lnvicem, que vocatur complementum,

three. composicio, vel quietacio aut finis intrinsecus.

almifting that' Sec ^ diversimode locuti sunt philosophi in illa ma-

the same teria; ut Plato voluit I concedere eandem materiam vel B141
matter (or . ,, • , , , ,

essence) is now essenciam quam appellavit hylen, tenebram, vel caos, 3?

hre '&c W 31r ' nunc ^ ore ignern, nunc aerem, et sic de ceteris ele-
mentis ac mixtis; quia in nulla accione nature super-
additur negativa essencia absoluta 2 111 totum, eo quod
generacio esset tunc creacio, et corrupcio esset an-

is tolerable, nichilacio. Et est sentencia huius viri satis bona 40
sicut et sentencia philosophorum ponencium latenciam

7. ypostasim i>i full pro ylen B. 21. ydo B. 23. poit om B.

24. motu B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 12 1

formarum, negancium generacionem esse in corporibus,
sed solum alteracionem.

Sed sermo Aristotelis est michi placencior, quia ma- but I prefer
teria est eterna cum illa essencia, sed forma et com- ^tinK^that
5 positum simul inceperunt. Et sic salvatur generacio matter is

, . ... . . ., c eternal, but

substancie, et tolhtur annichuacio cum creacione rorme tnat f orm an j

e\tense compound

e.Mcubc. ... . began

Sed contra illud tripliciter argumentatur: pnmo simultaneously.
per hoc quod cuiuslibet corporis materia et forma ar guments
iosunt partes integrantes, et per consequens non ista T Matter^and
tria sunt eadem essencia singularis, cum totum sit per- form are parts;

- . ,. . . c,- ... thev cannot

feccius quam ahquod elementorum suorum. Simihter, expo- t hefefore be

sitorie sequitur quod quelibet talis substancia generata fuit ii^o^oJ?;

eterna a parte ante, creata in principio instanti tem- hand

i.iporis, eo quod tam essencia quam materia, que est i s efernalf

idem corpus, sic se habent; et ex alio latere sequitur lf m ^j er t '? s s0 -

quod tam essencia illa quam materia sunt naturaliter identical with

generabiles et corruptibiles; quia tam forma quam r on^the

compositum est corruptibile, et utrumque illorum est other, on
* . . ... . account ot tms

20 essencia illa: ergo, illa essencia est corruptibihs. Si- identity, matter

... . .,, , - , i-i . is corruptible.

mihter, mxta lllud sequitur quod generabile est m- m And we

generabile, corruptibile incorruptibile, sive sensibile in- nave al J. sorts

sensibile, calidum non calidum; et sic de quotlibet contradictions

oppositis predicatis. Nam illa essencia est ingenera- "same^essence

2?bilis, incorruptibilis est, et generabile, et corruptibile; is matter, form
' r . . and compound.

quia illud compositum quod mcepit esse per quantum-

libet; quia tempus post illam essenciam; et alias cor-

rumpetur, illa essencia manente. Et conformiter patet

(cum ignis sit calidus, et materia prima eius non calida),

3o si essencia eadem sit utrumque, tunc calidum est non

calidum: et sic de aliis oppositis.

Quantum ad primum dicitur quod prima conse- An&wers I.

quencia non valet, sed bene sequitur quod illa tria torm^merely

differunt ab invicem; quod verum est. Sicut igitur differ among

7 n ° . themselves, and

35 pars quantitative differt a suo toto, tam quo ad sin- from the wnoie
gularem essenciam quam quo ad suppositum (sed pars p| r t whicl^is
quantitativa est simultanea); sic pars qualitativa ,he same

" i essence as

mediat in hoc, sed differet a suo toto, sed est eadem tne whole.
essencia.

40 Differt autem iste modus trinitatis a trinitate anime This is a sort

et a trinitate que Deus est, specialiter in hiis tribus. ^butlhe'

distinction

4. \\ B. 14. app u B; pu" B. 33. unde pro sed bene B.

3/. fifnt" m B.

122 JOHANNIS WYCLIF ■ CAP. IX.

between it and Primo, in hoc quod claudit contradiccionem aliquod

that of our • •,,- ... ■ •

soul or of God suppositum lllius trinitatis esse non coevum cum quo-
is threefold. lit>et eorum. Sed hic primum est eternum, et utrumque

i. Matter is ... .

eternal; form 2 olum coevum et corruptibile. 2° rn hoc quod pnmum

and compound . , • „ m . ■ ,,

exist in time; suppositum per se est, producit continue 2 m ; et ula o
whereas in the amD o tercium ad intra, sine aliquo cum producente

other Tnnities . ' t '

all three must alio in Deo, et sine aliquo preter Deum a producente

coexist. . . , . ■»■•..•■•«.

2. ln God m anima. Sed primum suppositum tn tnnitate corporea
nothing, in the est potencia susceptiva, non potens actuari sine ex-

hut'God, has trinseco efficiente; sed illis positis, sequitur ] 2 m forma- B 141

an exlernal ... . _ . ,. , ,•

inftuence on hter de natura rei. Qui autem dicunt quod rorma
the emanation p 0tes t exu ; a materia per se, siccud cssencia a cornore,

ot one from the r 1 ...

other; while dicunt quod composicio est accidens utrique composi-

for bodily r ■ 1 •*

things it is torum, cum rorma prius creatur quam producitur a

othervvise. na tura 2 :l . Sed eaudeant illi de invencionibus suis, i5
As tor tnose o

who say that quia puto me scire quod nunquam probabunt ma-

matter and . . c , • • ■

form, essence tenam vel formam esse res distinctas ab essencia que

'b L d se°arated n est illa 3*' 3° in lloc d ^ ert illa trinitas ab aliis supra-
and that dictis, quod in ista 2 a res est perfeccior, quam l a et
combination is . „ . „ r •

a mere eius hnis; et 3' 1 est perleccior quam priores, curn sit 20
a t h Clde eniov nnls eorum et sic reciproce causant se in diversis ge-

their discovery. rteribus causandi. In trinitatibus vero prioribus tollitur

3. Forrn is . . , ,. . , ,• , • ,,
more perfect omnis accidentabtas untus ad aliud, omnrs excellencta

than matter, j n p er feccione vel bonitate vel accione ad extra, omnis

compound than reciproca causacio, et inequalitas in aliquo attrrbuto. 25
either; whereas . , _ , • ,• ,

in ihe other Ad 2 m argumentum negatur conclusto et abud

'Vhree^re" argumentum factum ad probandum illam ; sicud

equaiiy perfect. n on sequitur: hoc esse fuit eternum, et hoc esse est

II. We deny . ^ . . , . c •

the conclusion; ignem esse : rgrtur, hoc esse rgnem fuit eternum.

logical Igneitas autem (et per consequens ignis) inceperunt 3o
sequence ist> . v . D ..£,

wanting, there esse quando incepit esse quod hoc est /»;;/.s\ Et per

terml toUie idem non sequitur quod materia illa vel natura genc-
syllogism. ratur au t corrumpitur, quamvis illud compositum sic

Nor does it . ...

either follow se habet ; et sic de syllogismo expositorto. Et st que-
generable 0" ratur cuius speciei est illa essencia, dicitur quod nunc 35
corruptible. est individuum unius speciei et nunc alterius; et tunc

Ot what * . ' . .

species then is individuum non potest sic mutart; ab essencra enim

tiiis cssciicc r • t • 1 •

Sometimes of procedit tndividuum, cum stt esse substanciale essencie,
one, and ut essenc i a u t huiusmodi est in aliqua specie. Ideo

sometimes ol . * A

another; dicunt autores quod tpsa ct materta non possunt de- 40
monstrari, nec sunt quid, nec quantum, nec quale, ncc

3. h' p'm 13. 4. quid(I) B. 26. ad pro aliud B. 3|. et B.

3g. before essencia nec pro ut (?) B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 123

aliquid aliorum encium. Plato tamen demonstravit as Plato says.

... i-ii • _!•' -j • • • But this does

tllam, quod llla nunc est mdividuum unius speciei, et not provc tnat

nunc alterius, quod est verum. Nec sequitur ex hoc oneeiement
'. n . * will be anotner.

quod ignis erit aqua: et sic de cetens.

5 Et istis est quodammodo simile illud quod antiqui , The .

" . . n . . n Incarnation is

sanientes theologi dicunt de incarnacione Cristi, po- a case in point
, , 1 Clirist is two

nentes quod due nature sunt unum suppositum, sicud natureSj an j

una- natura est 3' 1 supposita; et illarum naturarum one person;

una est eterna (ut divinitas) et alia temporalis (ut

10 humanitas). Nec sequitur verum incepisse esse, desiisse, The Word did

1 c 1 c • +. • -ii 1 1 not begin, nor

vel factum defuisse, etsi llla natura que est verbum e nd;yetthe
sic se habet. Conceditur tamen quod ille homo qui ^"^"^the
est verbum, est tempore creatura factus, minor patre; Word did.

... . .,,- , • Tlie Man who

et sic de quibuscumque que conveniunt llh numani- ; s tne vVord is

1 3 tati. Et cum verbum sit illa humanitas, ipsum est a . C1 ' e ,?, t , ure ,'

' r . . anu tnus tlie

unum factum, una creatura; et sic de ceteris predi- Word is in this

. . . , , . ■ 1 sense a

B 142" catis per se substantivatis, et non de predicatis | tem- crcature too .
poralibus substantivatis signo proprio verbi. Et sic Rf u ^J% m n a " t '
deitas est homo, sed non humanitas ; sic verbum as- humanity. for

. , . , . ■ the Word did

2osumpsit hommem, quia humanitatem, sed non personam. not ta | {c lipon

Cristus tamen, qui est persona, est vere assumptus. kimself ' m e n

sicud allibi diffuse declaravi. Non ergo sequitur: illa

essencia est generabile et corruptibile naturaliter: ergo,

sic generabilis et corruptibilis. Nam essencia significat

25 absolute, ante eius genus, rem integram, sed natura

significat concrete materiam vel formam, vel 3 , in-

tegram essenciam esse hic vel illud in speciali.

Ad 3 m , patet ex supradictis quomodo unum opposi- III. We have

.. , ,. , ... alreadv pointed

torum predicatur de rehquo, et quomodo non. INota out f, ow

3otamen quod materia prima nec est calida nec est fri- be^Dredfcated"

gida; et sic de aliis denominacionibus accidentalibus, of the same.
. . , ,. ,. But primordial

quamvis sit subiectum remotum huiusmodi qualitatum. ma tter is

Omnis namque qualitas est forma qua subiectum est ^J^^i', 1 ,^ or

formaliter accidentaliter quale; et sic est subiectum coid, &c. ;

qualities are
accidents

18. videtur (?) pro verbi B. 20. j^am B. 21. _pa B. 24. non

lamcn (?) pro nam B. 25. ems B. 26, 27. in tege B.

3. Nec sequitur. WycliPs position will perhaps be clearer,
if we state it in modern terms. The same essence that is now
a mere mixture of oxygen and hydrogen, will be water; but it
does not follow that water is a mere mixture of oxygen and
hydrogen. Admit (as some chemists do) that there is only one
primordial element, and Wyclifs assertion can extend to every-
thing.

124 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

belonging to esse quale, et non res que potest per se es? e Nam

S fo rm - so universaliter infirmitas, vicium et talia ponuntur quali-

matter is not tates; que si per se essent, haberent deum malum

directly their ' n ' . '

subject. causam eorum. Ideo omnis quahtas, quantumcunque
exist^by ° realis, ponit subiectum esse quale accidentaliter, sinc 5
themsehes ; tor pi ur j p re ter illa que consecuntur ad hoc : ut lumen

there are bad r r ^

qualities, potest esse subiectum capax esse dispositum ad videndum

\ould be" visibile per aspectum luminosi; et illa disposicio vocatur

created by a bad i umen s j ve su ffi c iat ostendere se ipsum distincte (ut

Pnnciple. ...... . r -

Light is the disposicio in mixto termtnato, que vocatur lumen re- 10
seelng subject flexum); sive sufficiat confuse ostendere se et suum
. £an s , e . e a , subiectum ; ut disposicio in medio dvaphano ad osten-

visible thing by ..... l . • r

means ot " dendum visibile extra medium, sicud que dicuntur
^umfnous species lucis, que lumen dicitur, vel species illud que
and is either similando coloris appellatur. Lux autem est forma sub- i5

rellected . . rr

or transmitted. stanciahs in per se lucido, vel accidens mseparabile,

inseparable cum m ams s ^ accidens, et lucere est eius actus, et

from the fervor est terminus in quo quietatur. Unde videtur

luminous thing; . t n _ ^

and I was once michi quod ula que quondam credidi de migracione
when^l^beHeved baminis et de eius realitate sunt inpossibilia. Stat ta- 20

that light could men luminosum applicari medio et non illuminare illud,
pass trom one . . . . .. ...

subject to vel per mdisposicionem luminosi vel medn suscipientis

another - vel medii intercepti.

Heat js the Et sic caliditas est subiectum esse calidum. Hoc

heing hot ot . . .

a subject; but tamen lntelitgendum est equivoce; ut lgnis est calidus 25

differem 2m naturalem proprietatem, cum ex iuxtaposicione et

meanings. s Jtu atthomorum vel incoenitam habet efficaciam immu-

natural tandi tactum, calefaciendo et disgregando. Et ex tali-

^"eateHl/" Dus niodis miscendi atthoma habent Iapides terre, na-

feeling ot heat sccncia et alia mixta specificas sufficiencias, virtutes, 3o
and disagregate . r '

bodies: as lire. vel potencias occultas, que quahtates dicuntur. Sed

2 property only S sec undo dicitur aliquid participative calidum, de quanto

imparted and est mutativum tactus, ut mixtum icneum, quod non
not natural; as . ^ .

a body in ojiortet ad omnem punctum habere ignem, sed sufncit

^muchfire. 18 q uo ^ spissius habeat quam sensus sufficit discernere : 35
ut est aer eque calidus ut ignis; nec ignis natus est
plus calefacere | aerem naturalem, cum deficit sibi B 142''
The two capacitas. Omnia igitur que sic sunt calida, dicuntur

P formaliy bot. torma liter calida a caliditate in actu. Alia autem sunt

11 a body efficienter aut virtualiter calida que habent efficaciam 40
not liot ltself, , r . ,. . ^

produces heat caletaciendi a remotis, et tamen non lmmutarent
from a distance
(as the sun)

10, 11. rerluxLim B. 27. fi ta B; ib. ?9gtaB. 32. aliud B. 35. lT,ous B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 125

tactum calefaciendo; etsi tangaritur: ut sol et alia this is not
astra. Sed potencia, virtus et sufficiencia a qua cale- luperioi- 3

faciunt, non vocantur caliditas, sed una qualitas super- , , qiiality.

. ii- ,• • •' Having thc

eminenctor. 3 modo dicuntur ahqua calida quo ad power to

5 cfficaciam quam habent calefaciendo corpus animalis. ^he^nimal '"
Et hoc dupliciter: vel ut sunt immutativa eustus, ut body; eithcr in

r ' . & . ' . the tastc (as

ptper, galanga, et ahe species: que certe calefactive pepper and
immutant gustum et non tactum ; vel ut sunt mutativa ^therotcrnaT

complexionis 2 m humores ceneratos ex illis; ut unum humours, as
... , ,. .. , . . . certain

lodicitur apud medtcos calidum et siccum, quamvis tactui mcdicincs.

sit frigidum et humidum. Et conformes sunt divisiones

de frigido, et humido, et sicco. Ex quibus patet quod Col £> w , et and

. , . ... . n Dry have

stat equivocando in denomtnacionibus caltdum esse similar

frigidum, humidum et siccum ; et unum reliquo calidius meanil, gs.

1 3 tot modis potest dici, quot modis dicitur calidum.

Notetur ert;o denominacio univoca subiecti, et Wc mus , 1 in

' . researchcs
yideatur quante distant laterahter gradus denomi- keep to the

nacionis a non gradu; et penes hoc mensuretur intensio wherf aTtcration'
qualitatis; et penes intensionem qualitatis mensuretur occurs, and st-c

. . ...... . . bv how much

20 mtensio corpons simphcis, ipsum pnmo subiectantis. one degrec of a
Et in mixto habente qualitates contrarias, oportet another^oPthc

notare excessum dictum unius qualitatis supra alia, ut _ same - ,

. /• r Some sav tliat

quidam asserunt ; et penes lllum excessum m com- in compounds

paracione ad subiectum primum, attcnditur mixti intensio. ^the^excess^of 8

25 Et quo ad velocitatem notant latitudinem qualitatis one quality
... J over anothcr.

acqutstte vel deperdtte 2 m se totum subiecto suo toto As for vdocity,

primo; et penes illam in comparacione ad tempus timeand^the

attenditur velocitas alteracionis. Et illi dicunt quod, extentofthe

, qualitv gatned

sicud non omne corpus est eque longum vel latum, _ or lost.
3o sicud aliqua eius pars; sic nec qualitas quo ad eius quaifties^differ
extensionem. Et sicud pars qualitatis est disnosicioni m cx , tent . so

. .. . ! . that thc more

ad operandum proporctonahter ad etus magnitudtnem extended the

quam totum in comparacione ad eius magnitudinem, area^ter the

sic pars qualitatis est suo toto intensior. In aliquibus quaiiiy. m

. . . ^ proportion to

35 tamen formts difformibus non oportet partem excedere its intensity in

suum totum; quia tanta est accucies lancee, quanta wfjV certain

est acucies sui cuspidis; et sic est de motu et aliis que exccptions.

non habent formas positivas vel privativas inpedientes,

accidentes denominare suum subiectum remotum eque

40 intense sicut suum subiectum primum.

1. tangalur B. 12. Pudo B. 17. Iati ter B. 18. intencio and so
Dii B. 2i. habentcs B. 38. p'uatinas B.

126 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

But I think Sed michi videtur probabile quod generaliter omne

quality of the difformiter qualificatum, vel intensum quo ad subiectum,

whole always est tantum intensum sicut aliqua eius pars quantitativa
depends on . . .

that of eacii tisque ad minimam partem cui gradus secundum mo-

pait ' lem indivisibilis correspondet. Et sic | mixta dicuntur B 143*

calida, frigida, vel humida, vel sicca, equivoce quo-

dammodo respectu simplicium; cum qualitates ille

remisse resultant ex mixtione simplicium ex quibus

so that each resultant. Et minimum naturale habet unam quali-

posshbl/part tatem 2 am mole indivisibilem ; quia per subiectum 10

has a multiplicatam. Et nulla pars eius est adequatum sub-

certain degree . r . ... . . . . . .

of quality, iectum huius quahtatis. Et sic videtur cahditas lgnis,

inextended °i ue est m g enere suo intensior caliditate aeris que est

belonging disparis speciei ; sicut siccitas terre in eenere suo est

entirely to the r . r . . . °. . .

whole and mtensior frigiditate terre. Manet autem tn transicione i5

each^part? subiectorum illud genus propinquum qualitatum huius-

modi, et idem secundum subiectum essencie extra genus,

non autem secundum idem individuum substancie. Et

sic, racione raritatis aut densitatis, est unum elementum

disposicius converti in sibi proximum quam in aliquid 20

plus remotum.

Qnalities may Nota eciam quod qualitates, tam prime quam se-

^manner o? r cunde, suscipiunt multas denominaciones 2 m manieres

action, so that accionum: ut calor in ferro est in aliquo activior calore
tor some . . . .......

purposes heat tgnis purt. Jn alns autem calor humidi tgnei; et stc 23

'active than i»> de ams qualitatibus, vocatis wulgariter primis, sicud

fire, &c mixta imperfecta vocantur communiter elementa. Nec

Aristotle s p e ccat suasio Aristotelis quod sunt quatuor elementa

position, that secundum combinaciones 4 qualitatum. Sufficit enim

the four . l

elcments result quod iste 4° r contungactones non aut contrane, sed 3o
combinations of omnes aue coningaciones qualitatum primarum faciunt
the four contrarie. Ideo solummodo insunt in mixtis; nec at-

quahties, is . .

quite right, tendttur proporcionahtate absolute penes mtensionem
contradlct!on° ve ^ multiplicacionem huiusmodi qualitatum respectu

among these p ass j quam proporcionem motus alteracionis consequitur, 35
quahties, tlius r " n ' r . . . . ^ .

combined. sed penes sufncienciam hutusmodi quahtatum ex dis-

posicione subiecti, ex influencia et aspectu celi, cum

14. frigiditati B. i5. tru one fiblor^ B.

28. It ought to be rather: 6 qualitatum; or, if we do tiot
admit the negative qualities, 3 qualitatum. Thus: Earth: heavy,
dry, and cold. Water: heavy, moist, and cold. Air: light, dry,
and cold. Fire: light, dry, and hot. Perhaps 4 should be read
as grammatically belonging to combinaciones.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 127

similibus actuantibus accionem propter proporcionem

voco ydoneitatem ad agendum. Et sic potest eadem
qualitas dici intensiva quo ad denominaciones et ac-
ciones multiplices.
5 Nec obest idem inanimatum alterari per tempus, An inanimate
cum essencia manet continue in quotcunque minucias continue thc
sic divisa, et mixtum (quod est illa essencia alterata) same, yct

. ....... . altcred to a

licet quodlibet eius lndivisibiha corrumpuntur: quia ccrtain extent,

pars illius mixti que remanet secundum disparem mix- c eS sence b

iotionem recipit quotlibet qualitates 2 as : et illud mixtum „ remains.

r * "■ . Sometimes thc

alteratur 2 m partem. Et quandoque manet essencia essence of each

• • ■ 1 c • element

composicione [ut mj lumo, lgne, aqua, terra, et aere; remains

quandoque non manet, illa divisa. Et sic simplicia in combination,
~ . "■ .... sometimes

mixta possunt variare mixtionis gradus, stante eadem separate

- c •■ 1 , . • . • and there mav

i^forma, quia ahter non haberet mtxtum permanenciam be various "
acendo vel paciendo. degrees ot

r ... . composition.

Unde, pro leviori locucione m tlla materia, notandum, -yye maV) m '
secundum modum loquendi Platonis et scripture, tn ' s matte !''

n . . tollow Plato

quod essencie possunt accipere denominaciones 2 m and Scripture,
,• t-.^ • j" 1 • and say that

20 species diversas. Et sic concedi potest quod tgnts est m . e ; s water,

H 1 43 h aqua, terra, et sic de quotlibet speciebus. Vel ] si earth, &c.

peripateticus ob favorem Aristotelis hoc negaverit, tunc contradict

• . n j Aristotle, notc

potest primo supponi totum esse suas partes. 2 quod triat tne ' w hole
omnia, preterita vel futura, sunt. Et t.°, quod qui- 'f ' ts P ar . ts - ;

' t ' j > t - t | lat w hat ts

25 cunque numerus corporum sit corpus. Quibus sup- past or future,

, • • j is ; and that

posttis, potest dici quod corpus successivum, ex parti- a co iiection of
bus viccisim generatis compositum, alteratur et recipit to u ie f is a
quantumlibet dispares denominaciones 2 m partes huius- If so, a body

,. i- • •■ , TT ^ composed of

modi, licet non sit ahqua earumdcm. Ut, ponente different

3o quod agregatum, ex corporibus quantumlibet disparium successive

specierum successive generatum, apponatur combustioni, can rcceive

tunc illud corpus successivum durat in calefaccione qualities, and

aut combustione in casu per quotlibet annos. Sic enim rerr.ain the

1 ^ . same; thus a

dicit Aristoteles ignem crescere per apposicionem com- succession of

„- , -i •!• ■ /» •' r- • 1 li-..- combustibles

3o bustibihum mhnite. Et lta secundum polliticos manet burned is one
idem collectivum, et eadem aqua mediterranea; et 2 m body that can

' ^ ... continue

Aristotelem idem manere eternum, que diversimode in burning for

years, the
Mediterranean
changes and
12. ut in deest; ignis fumus ; ib. aer B. 14. mixtio nia B. remains the

same sea,

2. Ad agendum. Some words arc evidently wanting here.
5. Inanimatum. This paragraph deals with the difficulty of
reconciling identity with change in non living things. The iden-
tity of the soul, or form, as Wyclif has above pointed out,
obviatcs this difficulty for living things.

128 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

and things thai suis partibus alterantur. Non tamcn video quod idem
"thefrparts 1 corpus stet simul quantumlibet parvum et magnum

remain one diversifieri, sicud est simul 2 m partes dispariter quali-
eternal bcing. . . , . . .. .

Yet I do not ficatum ; quia quantthcacto respicit totahtatem sicud

can ajfply to parvificacionem uniformitas; et sic de aliis multis, de 5
M ie . quibus non sequitur: hoc est nniformale masnum vel

denommations ^ ^ . . . ., " .. .

ot'sma//and parvum (et sic de cetens denominacionibus condicio-

We can say natis) 2 m partem: ergo hoc est similiter huiusmodi. Sed

tlia.t a man 1S de qualitatum denominacionibus, concedimus hominem

white, but not n . .

that he is big, esse album, quia secundum partem, ut faciem. Sed to

faceYs^so? tamen negamus hominem esse sic parvum vel magnum

ut facies; quarum denominacionum distinctionem re-

linquo posteris.

Neither Redeundo ieitur ad pronosicionem dicitur quod nec

matter nor p . ...

torm is hot matcna prima nec forma est cahda, sed tam essencia 10
thatboth the quam compositum ex materia et forma est calidum,

primitive sicud compositum per se generatur et corrumpitur;
essence and the . ,. r , , .

ultimate quia taltter eadem oportet habere, tam matenam se-

that P wit?ch h cundum quam subiectat calorem, quam formam quam
hot (calidum). consequitur calor, a qua est subiectum calefactum. Et 20

11 it werc n ' ^ . . ...

possible tor si dicatur quod calor per se existens xoret cahdus et

hCa itself e as S a calefactivus ; ergo, non oportet calidum dicere tam

form it wonld ma teriam quam formam tamquam eius principium: hic
mdeed be hot ; n . 7 . .. ,.

but this is dtcttur quod claudit contradtccionem cahditatem esse
A^difficulty: sme subiecto : ideo, si sic esset, tunc calefaceret et non =5
how, if tirc- calefaceret; et econtra, quidquid volueris habere. Sed

ncss can be , ,. ,. ... .

either present concedttur calorem vel caliditatem esse cabdum, sicud

°a r givcn" bodj" 1 quantitas quantum. Sed tunc supponit terminus con-

can it be a C retus similiter, ut patet allibi.

substantial . ' . l , . . . , «

form? Ultenus quentur quomodo tgnettas (et sic de qua- ^o

substantial . bbet forma substanciali extensa) non sit accidens, cum

foi-m is denominat illam essenciam accidentaliter formatam, eo
accidcntal . .

as concerns quod tahs forma potest stbi advemre et abesse preter
ma?te™ but U is e i us corrupcionem. Huic dicitur quod omnis forma
itselfa substancialis est accidens materie prime et illi essencie, 33

substance.

Thc substantial sicud et humanitas est accidens verbo; utrumque tamen
'srm is wh '
primarily

est in se substancia, licet diversimode, et per con-

sequens nulli inherens. Sed nulla esscncia, sub racione
qua esscncia, dicit vel genus vel speciem substancie,
cum oporteat I hoc fieri per substancialem substancie B i44 a

2. sit B. 3. dimV B. |. tolitate B. 5._puifi" B. 6. unifore B
7, s. toli^ B. H) av m (!) B. 14. Kcddcndo B. 26. frigefaceret B.

CAP. UC. LOGICA.

129

qualitatcm, ut igneitatem, vel Iapideitatem. Unde, per ciassifics a

hoc quod cst ignis, est species substancie; quia non being '" lts

i . . 7 t piopcr species:

est dare aliquam substanciam, speciem, vel qualitatem f or we can

, • • . •,,• . . . , conceive

substancie pnus mexistentem ilh essencie cui accideret nothing

5 igneitas. Sed illa est prior quam caliditas, levitas, sic- S nu S aHtat ?l ° r

citas, vel aliud accidens in communi. Ideo est sub- P r i° r to

c 1 • ,-, i- fireness in a

stancia faciens subiectum ahud, et non aliquantum, body; and it is

vel aliqualem, vel alicuiusmodi formaliter. Ideo, que- ltse]f p . r , lor t0

*■ . . . ' " cverything

cumque forma prius naturaliter inexistit illi essencie, efse.

ioest substancialis forma; et alie naturaliter consequentes

sunt accidencia. Omne ergo formale quod nulli sub- Every form

iecto accidit, nisi materie prime, est substanciale; ct that determines

. ' on iy

composito ex tali et materia accidunt accidencia tan- primordial

1 i- ■ • • 1 t 1 ™ matter, is

quam substancie ahcuius certe speciei. Unde 2 m gra- substantial;

i^rnaticos, esse vel essencia dicit substanciam meram, a H others are

modo quo pronomina et verba substantiva substanciam Being denotcs

• n o i T, • • the substance:

meram signihcant. Sed quilibet terminus rn genere generic terms

per se supperaddit qualitatem propriam vel conve- add 1 uallties -

nientem.

20 Sed adhuc obicitur de induccione forme elemen- T ^. rc , .

Difficulties

tans, quomodo qualitates pnme mducuntur, et tam about the

dispariter consecuntur formas elementares, nec non qu^alitks^tliat

et fquomodol elementa sunt tam dispariter activa. Sed P r " ceed tron '

. . . r . the same

pro lsto dicitur quod elementa, sicut et omnia corpora, elementary

2D habent certas regulas agendi et quomodolibet aliter se We answer

habendi, limitatas sibi a natura: ut ismis, sicud est , tnat eacn .

~ ' . element has ns

punssimum et perfectissimum elementum, sic est ma- own natural

xime activum, et minime violenter susceptivum pere- 'xhi" is^see/

srine impressionis; ut non putrescit. non fk humidus best [ n nre .

o . . . r ; . the

-^ aut fngidus, sicud cetera elementa extranee disponuntur; purest ofall;

, • , r ^ , n it neither rots

ut terra numescit et caleht; aqua caleht et siccatur, nor is moist

vel saltim induratur per coneelacionem; aer fricescit norcold,

1 d •'_ & which is

et putrescit, sicut duo elementa inferiora. Omnia contrary to its

tamen illa sunt per improprias mixtiones corporum ear th may

^ 3 extraneorum, dum oportet vel quo ad sensum totum Lie m01st and

' ! " warm, &c.

esse elementum. oniy becausc

c j i u-^ -^ c ■ • 1 1 1 • • it ls not purc

Sed dubitatur an aer sit ingidus, vel exalacio in- And so ot" the

mixta; aqua, calida, vel igneum inmixtum; terra hu- other^elements.

mida, vel aqueum imbibitum; et sic de mixtis, habentibus extremely

,n 1 i- a , , ,,-, , probablc that it

4 U elementa taha. Admodum probabue autem est quod W ater is hot, it
terrea mixta inperfecta agregata sunt talia, et non

10. cciam pro cst B. z3. <\VLomo<iodeest\i. 40. admo B. 41. tcrra B.

130 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

owes ii to fiery pura elementa. Non enim est possibile quod contraria

particlcs , , , ....

present; &c. sint extensa, sed dum unum elemcntum agit rn reli-
How could quum, subito generantur ct corrumpuntur atthoma 2 m

contrarv ^ ° }

qualities totas quantitates et formas substanciales; et cum idem
cold^and lieat quod dat formale dat tamen hoc correspondenter 5

inwater)? quantum debitum est de loco, nisi inpediatur; hinc
Thus heat ln n . . ,

earth or water apparet sensui errantt terreum vel aquum per tantum

state- ™dwe esse calidum, cum violentum est activius in agendo
have quam foret, ipso non violento; sicud patet per multa

proofs that * ' r . ' J . \

such a state expenmenta, quibus scitur violentum vigorosius redu- 10

'^acnvity, cere se aci dispositionem | naturalem, quam sufficit B 144*

because of the n0 n violentatum agere. Agit tamen in virtute supe-

tendency to . . . ° . a . . }

return to the rioris regulantis. Et tdeo non mirum si dispanter

YetThe same a S at cum disparibus circumstanciis. Apparent ergo

element, in nobis qualitates esse per totum, cum tamen non sit t5
dilierent . tt j ■ ■ j ,

circumstances, ita. Unde lgnis, agendo m terreum vel aqueum, non

in "leTsame i nme diate producit ignem, sed resolvit materiam in

way; vapores vel fumos, et sic subtiliat ad aerem ; et de-

fire acting on . , . .

wa ter mum mducit rormam tgnis. Non quidem est possibile
not r °fire Ce but ^l 110 ^ forma substancialis sit reliqua remissior 2 m partes 20
vapour, and eius intensivas, cum substancia non suscipit maius aut

then takes lts . , •«•,• • , • , , •

proper form. minus; sed partibniter mducitur quo ad subiectum.

Et subito consecuntur qualitates nove in toto formas

novas, cum impossibile sit qualitatem ultimam singu-

larem in utroque elementorum manere symbolorum 25

Thus the parcialem; ergo commixtione contrariorum dicuntur
cle ™ a ^d ts to are elementa remissa, dum talia sunt mixta inperfecta, et

have less non elementa. Et sic per rarefaccionem disponitur

of their . , . .

cssential matena ut sit sub rorma aerts vel tgnis; et econtra per

ni^reamy Thev" condensacionem, ut sit sub forma aque vel terre, et 3°

are not hoc frigus, constipans aerem, cenerat ex co aquam ;

clcments but . , ° ' ,t, r ■ , ■ r

combinations sicud econtra calidum rareraciens aut resolvens m fu-

wit J 1 a£} 1 :* r , ary nios aut vapores, generat aerem aut ignem. Non

tamen scio quod ex aliquo tali elemento inmediate

generatur terra, sed ex commixto, quod est terrcum 35

admodum.

Thc arguments Et argumenta que arguunt in ista materia quod unum
which assert . ,. ,,.,...

that in this elementum consumeret rehquum, quod cahdum mducit
case one p er totum frigidum, caliditate remissa (et sic de aliis)

|. ide m B. 5. formi very illegible B; ib. \'<\ B. 7. ta m 15.

14. Oportet B. :>3. noif(!) B. 26. fymblor^ ptal"" 1 ' B. 3j. im te B.
36 admd B.

CAP. IX. LOGICA. 131

omnia supponunt elementa agere sine regula limitante, elcmcnt would
et continue unum durancius tollerc de suo subtriplo, another^ionore

et reliquum se habere, ut oportet, [adl sensum; racio ll , lc tact that a "
1 ... ,./ r . .; L J . elemcnts tollow

tamen contradicit tahbus ymagintbus. Probabtle tamen certain laws.

? est quod elementa possunt taliter misceri in mixto, E p C Thaps be' V

quod nunquam unum a^et in reliquum; ymmo quod so mixed that

.« . . ^ J n . nonc ot thcm

anima suthciat elevare corpus suum quantumhbet should act on

celeriter; et omnia corpora mundi fiunt incorporalia, thaTthe^soul
propter novum modum componendi illa ex atthomis, could act at

• ,• V^ • , wlH on lts

10 et cessacionem motus ceh. Quis ; queso, philosophus unresisting

scit virtutes corporum quas possunt habere ex diversis bodles become

mixtionibus et diversis formis, que adhuc latent in auasi

., . l mcorporeal.

viscenbus nature incognite: >

Consimiliter ymaginandum est quod elementa, unita Wc mav

, , , . , . r J suppose that

todebito modo, constituunt tumos ac vapores; et 1II1 the elements
grossati, tanquam mixta imperfecta, constituunt mixta forni vapours-

grossiora, ut sulfur et argentum vivum, que principiant which,
. . ,, , ,. ^ , , . ,. condenscd

iapides et metalla secundum dispares gradus humidi, produce
exalacionem terrestrem, et vaporem aqueum. Quod si q^Fcksnve"?

20 aer et ignis habundancius participant in mixtis inuer- principles of
c • ... .,. c ., .,. * stoncs and

fectis, prmcipiant vegetabtha et sensibiha, secundum metais.
quotlibet gradus. Unde, inter sensibilia animata et pred^ominatef

B 145" inanimata, sunt quedam de quibus I dubitatur utrum plants a'nd

. n , n I . . . ammated

nutnuntur vel non ; ut iungus terre inter vegetabtha. beings are

2 5 Et sensibilia sunt quedam de quibus dubitatur, utrum many^degrees
habent motum dilacionis vel constriccionis a sensu ; ut °f perfection ;

. ... . ' so that \ve

spongia manna. Et sic mediant mter racionaha et may sometimes
irracionalia illis minus perfecta. In omnibus ergo t he° case^of tne
procedit natura ordinate, tam quo ad modum miscendi f un S us terrae
n ex elementis et mixtis, ut resultet forma superaddita sponge)
cum suis qualitatibus 2 is , quam quo ad modum du- Yivfor "fedf
randi et recipiendi influenciam a celo; et breviter an< ? t] } er . e mav

1 ,- , , be bcings

quomodocumque naturaliter se habendi. between man

Et conformiter ymaginandum est de generibus for- *of "all beings
35 marum substancialium: ut iniima est forma elementaris, the lowest is

c ..... tlie element ;

et proxima iorma manimati mixtt, post quam iorma then come

vegetabilis, 4 forma bruti, et 5 anima hominis. Et compoSs,

in quotlibet istorum sunt multi gradus, 2' 11 quod plus P ,ant s. brutes,
, . ° 1 x and men.

vei minus recedunt ab extensione. Nam anima hominis
4 o creatur a deo, et est multiplicata per totum hominem

3. ad.deest B. 8. sunt B. 16. o°*ffati B. 20. pti tes B.

24. untr'ut r B.

24. Fungus terre. May not this be the truffle?

132 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. IX.

incorporalis, cum cius propria opcracio non dependet

Man's soni is a cornore. Forme vero brutorum perfectorum sunt
immatenal :.,..'.,., , . ,. .

that of the mdivisibiles, multiplicate per totum, sed requirunt cor-

h ' "]' ntli vVs i b i e ' S ' P u s organicum ad suum esse, sicud non habent opera-
but dependent cionem independentem ab organo corporali Verumtamen 3

upon matter. . .',.,. . . . , .

omnis anima multiphcata est cognitiva communis multi-

plicati ut transcendentis et communium accidencium. Sed

non est possibile animam distincte cognoscere sub-

stanciam racionalem sub racione substancie, nec animam

multiplicatam et separabilem substancialiter a corpore io

Each superior sibi accidente. Et semper forma superior continet in-

thoTeTnferlor feriorem; ut anima presupponit formas elementorum

t0 jt - , et formas superadditas in partibus sui subiecti. Im-

Astortnc

forms of the possibile tamen est quod forme diversarum specierum
are"aTa'bove y actuent primo eandem materiam, vel sint proximo per i5
mentioned, eandem materiam adequate. Forme vero anulosorum

extended m a l ,.

ccrtain sense, sunt quodammodo extense, modo quo dictum est su-
infinhesimally perius, sed solum finite in uno animali, cum una forma
so;theparts req uirit certam multitudinem materie, recte dispositam

cut must liave n /

a certain size. ad cuiusquemhbet punctum esse lllam. Lt sic com- 20

toelther as\he municant in actuando, sicut anime hominum habencium
souls of men ^ u0 corda et ceteras partes geminatas supra diafragma,

of whom the ... , . .. .

body is doubic et sub diafragmate solum membra quaha convenirent

above the ■ 1 • •

waist. unl hommi.

1 leave a Sed de omnibus istis relinquens subtihbus logicis et 25

examfnation naturalibus profundum scrutinium, rogo perlegentes
of ihis to the [\\ uc \ capitulum non condempnare vel deridere hec dicta

learned, but r . '. . .

beg thosc who tanquam [in]probabihter opimata. Scio enim quod mul-
to condemnmc tts autoribus discreparant, et argumenta calculancium

because 1 do interimunt multas opiniones et multas vmaginaciones 3o
not agree with , * . . . .

mo.dern modernorum. In omni namque ventatis examine prc-

but :strive't« cellit racio, cum auctores trahendi sunt ad concor-

reconcile the d an ciam racionis iuvamine, non e contra. Nam non
dicta 01 the . . .

ancicnts with dubium quin racio docuit Anstotelem, Platonem, Par-

menidem et Democritum, vel quemcunque alium ho- 35

minem, quidquid invenerit veritatis.

1. lcor 1 B. 6. guus B. 7. tn'-P 1'»: ib. cniu" B. i5. p'o B.

?o. ee ce (?) B. 28. in deest M. 3o. ifiuut B. 33. libace pro iu-

vamine B.

CAPITULUM DECIMUM.

Sequitur iam ultimo de proposicionibus temporalibus Of temporal

j /~> • , ■ .1 i i •• propositions.

tractandum. Cuiusmodi sunt yppothetice adverbiis f| ie y are sucn

temporis conulate, cum correspondenti actu anime I ; 2 S are i° ined
1 r 7 r , I ' by an adverb

R 145 1 ' ut sunt tales: Sors est qnando Plato est } priusquam " of time
Plato est; postquam ipse est, fuit etc. Istarum autem ^Jjmfia" 'act
propositionum veritates, quantitates et qualitates, co- „ ot . the , mind:

11 ' * ^ A is ivhen B is.

gnoscende sunt sicud proprietates localium. Idem enim They arc

est dicere Sor est quando Plato est et dicere quod Sors sim cal l °

10 est in tempore vel in instanti in quo Plato est. propositions.

Unde sophiste concedunt quo omne quod fuit, est ; According to

et sic de fore; quia in magno tempore eterno. Et sic AH^that^vas

sciunt dicere quandocunque talia fuerunt, sed nulla and that wijl
■* . ... . be, is; 1. e. m

pro precisa mensura, sicut tamen hmitatur m com- eternity;

^muni modo loquendi. Nec sequitur: Ego scio ubi vel ^ei^an ythtag

quando adequate hoc est : ergo sum ibi vel tunc ; sicud is, but not

• r^ •; 1 -ji • cxactly,

non sequttur: Ego video vel non video locum in quo according to

Sor est : ergo, sum ibi. Scio quod chymera non est : ssn leof S when.

ergo, scio chymeram que non est. In omnibus enim To know when
?■. J ■ ,- „ , • r, • a tlnng takes

2() talibus tenetur terminus subiectus 2° verbo lnnmte, piace is not to

ita quod actus prioris verbi denotetur cadere super fn^Jc^ases'
conclusionem, ut sit ille sensus exemplorum: Scio <fe the meaning of

,. , , , , , .... the vcrbs

aliquo loco vel quando quod hoc est ibi, vel tunc Sors knotv, &c.
est; video de aliquo loco quod in illo estSors; scio de whofe °of the
->~ aliqua chymera quod illa non est. Et sic de similibus. dependent

~ . . J l . . ■ proposition.

Non enim oportet omne scitum vel cognitum esse ubi- Nor is it true
cunque quodlibet sciens ipsum vel cognoscens, sicud ^^UmviHs'

nec oportet quodlibet signatum esse ubicunque suum wherever the

., . . ..... - T knower is,

signum est, sed sutncit quod sit ubihbet. Nam, for then
Soiuxta sic opinantes, quidlibet esset ubique commulti- ^ouldbf
plicatum cum Deo, qui ubique scit de quolibet quod everywhere

1 1 1 -1 1 w 1 1 1 1 God,

I. Cap. deesl; blank spacc for initial S. 9. qs pro quando B.

18. ego B. 20. vocatur B. 22. exore B.

134 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. X.

ipsum est, et infinitas alias veritates; et per consequens

aii distinction nullus locus esset, cum confuse quelibet pars loci esset

Jisappear, 1 " ubicunque alia esset, sed omne subiectum vel accidens

subject and esset inmobile, quia esset ubique: cum tamen ex alio
accident would . . . . .

be motionless latere sequitur quod omne accidens acquisitum alicm 5

sit acquisitum cuilibet subiecto, et sic quodlibet agens

sufficit quantumlibet distanter agere, movendo omnem

substanciam, mota substancia una, eo quod omnem

motum vel materiam motus quam haberet aliqua sub-

This opinion stancia, haberet et quelibet. Ideo sic opinantes haberent 10
is therefore . , AT , , ,• .

inadmissible. pessimum mundum. iNon ergo est color ln hoc dtcto.

Thrce Sed argumentatur tripliciter quod omnis veritas sit

arguments m UD i que primo per hoc quod negaciones et affirmaciones

lts tavour: " ' r f i o

i. All truth, de posse preterito et futuro, sunt ubique per hoc quod
""""wh" is° C ' sunt in Deo qui est ubique. Ergo multo magis affir- i5
evervwhere, maciones positive que sunt in Deo principalius, sunt

must also be . . r . ^ . . ,

everywhere; ubique, sicud accidencia eukaristie conceduntur a theo-

negations and logis concomitanter multiplicari cum Cristo. Et multo
assertions ot rnaeis humanitas Cristi esset ubique, et per idem

what does not ° .... , . ..

now exist, omnis substancia, cum vere rn lllo sit, commultiplicatur 20

Thus Chrisfs cum l ^° ubique. Et sic conversaretur in celo, ymmo
humanity and a nu n_ Ji staret .
all substance

would really be Similiter, te esse non est extensum, sicud nec te mo-
2. eV f/ifl7 aman veri; et est alicubi, ex hoc quod est. Ergo est mul-

is or moves, tiplicatum vel punctale ; et cum non sit racio quare 2?

has 110 \ . r ' . . a

extension in ahcubi multiplicatur^, quin per tdem ubique; ergo ubi-

yet Kus? be 4 ue - Et per idem omnis veritas est ubique. Assumptum
somewhere, pa t et ex hoc quod te esse per tempus abscisionis

theretore lt is ' ^ . l . r .

everywhere. brachn | tui ent adequate ubi est residuum corpons B 140

tui, et non movebitur ad illum locum: ergo nunc est ibi; 3o

conformiter mota parte tui, et residuo quiescente ad

omnem punctum tui, foret tam motus quam quies

contraria, quia ibi foret ita : et hoc movetur et quiescit.

3. Wherevcr it Similiter ubicunque est ita quod homo est, ibi

is true tliat ^ n

a man is, there homo est ; sed ubique est lta quod homo est: ergo, .■>.->

theVrsHs tnie ubique homo est. Minor, ex hoc quod si hic non est
everywhcre; ; ta quo j homo est, hic falsum est esse ita quod homo

theretore the ^ • j 1

second too. est, et per consequens falsum est esse lta quod homo
est, ct sic non est verum quod homo est. Si ergo hic
For c.od non est ita quod homo est, hic falsum est esse ita. Si 40

knows all

n. moduni B. 16. nc pro sunt 15. 20. sit (!) B. 28. ptg

abfcifio B. 3(3. h' B. 3;. h' B. 3g. h' B. 40. h' B.

CAP. X. LOGICA. 135

ergo Deus ubique cognoscit omnem veritatem. tunc truth

. . . ... evorvwhere,

ubique cognoscitur et est cognita omnis veritas, et cum anc f so all

esse cognitum sit res cognita, sequitur quod ubique sit truth is

c y . . evervwnere.

omnis veritas res cognita. Si ergo negative veritates

5 sunt in omni loco, cum quelibet affirmacio habeat

suam racionem essendi in quocunque tali loco, sequitur

quamlibet afrirmacionem esse ubique, sicud ubique

causat relaciones et quotlibet alias veritates; et per

consequens est ibi secundum efficaciam et conser-

10 vacionem.

Ad istud dicitur quod tripliciter dicitur esse alicubi : these^note

primo, potencialiter, sicud rex dicitur ubique esse in that to be

, . . . iii- i- somewhere

regno, ubi est eius potencia, vel habitus agendi et means either

disponendi. Secundo presencialiter; sicud rex ubique t0 ^J^. 6 by

i5dicitur esse in aula sua presens, dum habet actualem (as a king

. . ..... , throughout his

noticiam ex sua presencia que lbi sint, et ad omnem kingdom)

punctum iilius cognoscitur esse presens. 3° modo es- °, r a by kj n l en n e

sencialiter quo ad locum in quo est adequate. Et his hall),

..... , , ,. . ,•- .. 1 • or by essence,

michi videtur quod duo modi primt essendi alicubi fiiiing a certain

20 sunt figurativi et negandi a loyco, si desit ibi modus ^he^first^two'

essendi i° modo, quia tunc quidlibet esset ubique. Unde are

,. . ,. . ,. , ■ • metaphvsical,

Deus potenciahter et presencialiter est ubique, quia not feal, and

essencialiter est ubique: quod cognoscitur ex hoc quod tWrd^Godis

conservancia et causancia sua sint ubique, et diffbrmes everywhere in

25 in diversis, sicud difformiter causat diversa: quod tan- senS cs, because

tum sonat sicut hoc: conservancia vel causancia Dei est hls actlon in

everywnere,

difformis: quod nullo modo potest esse, nisi causancia and not the

_ . , . , . . , , . ^, same

Dei esset alicubi et per idem ubique. Cum ergo se- everywhere.

quitur hic causat Deus: ergo, hic est causans Deus; et

3o per consequens vel existens hic per essenciam, vel eius God is

instrumentum medium causandi; patet, cum Deus in- *" imrne diate

mediate causat ad omnem punctum mundi, est ad causeofall;

omnem punctum mundi. Sol autem causat distanter „ th J:„ s " n ; .,

* CaliSlIIgalJ

ab illo per lumen vel aliam infiuenciam instrumentalem ; distance, acts

„ . . , ,. . . ,. , . potentially

3? ldeo dicitur esse potenciahter ubi causat, et non essen- h on]y
cialiter. Sed est ordo secundum quem prius causat
lumen sibi propius quam lumen sibi distancius: sed
est longe aliter de causacione Dei.

Ad primum argumentum audivi 4 responsiones, qua- To thc i st

,. • , , • ^ ||-| • t 1 there are tour

40 rum prima dicit quod tales ventates nulhbt sunt ; sed replies.

in Deo causaliter. 2 a dicit quod sunt in Deo et in '• T ; ;at such

12. pof B. i3. h^ = habet B. 17—18. =f=n r B. 21. quod pro

quia B. 27. n B.

136 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. X.

God only as in mundo, sed in nulla parte mundi. y { dicit quod tales

2. That they pretericiones et futuriciones solum sunt ibi ubi fuerunt
'tn^ \" o?id d blt ve ^ erunt illa quorum sunt pretericiones vel futuriciones.

in no part of 4.' 1 via dicit quod tales veritates sunt ubique, quia

3. That these ubique inmediate causant quotlibet alias veritates; et 5
t aS th an ar fUt nlvP er consec iUens, cum non habent instrumenta per que

where they causant, sed inmediate per se ipsas, sequitur quod
were or will be , • 1 o- • , ■ • 1 • ^ /-,

tme . sunt ubi causant. | bt enim ahquis esset locus m quo B 140''

4. That they a non causaret, tunc totus ille locus distaret ab A, et

are ' '

everywhere; per consequens ad omnem punctum illius loci causatur 10

distancia inter ipsum et A; et cum utrumque extremum

cuiuslibet relacionis causat 2 am relacionem, sequitur

quod per illum locum causat A quotlibet relaciones;

et sic est potencialiter A per illum locum; et cum non

habet esse absolutum, vel instrumentum potenciale, aut 1 5

alium modum essendi secundum quem foret alicubi,

which I think sequitur quod sit ubique: et hoc videtur michi pro-
probable. , , -,
1 babile.

For if we do f£|- s ; c conceditur affirmaciones positivas prius esse
not distmguish ' r

. between the ubique, sed non omnes, cum afhrmacio habens effectum 20

me< J"/n| S ° replendi locum, vel informandi, solum est ubi informat.
anywhere, and gj enmi equivoce accipiatur esse in loco, secundum

take lt to ^ ••■,•• , r

signify any quamcunque causacionem (dimittendo tamen famosiorem
causation then m °dum essendi 2 m replecionem loci vel informacionem)

everything is non video quin ad illum sensum posset concedi quod- 25
evervwhere. x . x ^

But we must libet esse ubique; et sic esset corpus m loco a quo
SP many^and 6 ^i sta ret et versus quem movetur. Sed quia loquendum
think with the e st ut plures, et sapiendum ut pauci, conceditur quod

tew; sowe r r J ' . n

shail admit ihat nabens alium modum essendi quam per causacionem
a >n ccrnun%aTe m aliquo loco, solum est ubi illo alio modo est; ut 3o
is being in that replecione loci, actuacione in loco, vel alio tali affinio.

spacc.

So Chrisfs Unde negatur quod humanitas Cristi sit ubique,

lumi not y 1S quamvis verbum, quod est illa humanitas, sit ubique;

everywhere, negatur eciam quod quantitas vel qualitas corporea
though that ^ . . \ . . ? ^ T l .

which is correspondens Cnsti sit m Eukanstia. Nec sequitur 3o

(the WordTis cx hoc °i uoci ihud corpus sit ibi non quantum nec
^. so. quale, sed bene sequitur quod est illud quod non est

Nor is thc * ai" ,• ^. • •

quantity, &c. of quantum lbi. Alu tamen dicunt quod corpus Cristi est

Chr inthe° quantum, et quale, et quomodocunque accidentatum in

Eucharist; yet Eukaristia quo ad accidencia absoluta independencia 340
the body is not *

withoul si/c.
Somc
admit that

r\. ubiquc B; ?l\ Si cnim aliquid esset | si cnim aliquis cssct B.

3i. aii'11" ; (iiih B. 3.,. correspondentis B. 35. sequitur nec sequitur B.

CAP. X. LOGICA. 137

loco, sicud est in celo ubi extenditur; et sic omnis Christ's Body
quantitas est tigura, vel numerus parcium, et omnis Eucharist^all

continuacio parcium vel posicio (que est differencia the accidents

r ... . tnat are

quantitatis) cum ceteris qualitatibus, est concomitanter independent of

5 in Eukaristia; sed non est sic de accidentibus respectivis. p ace

Et ex hoc subtiliantur quotlibet conclusiones.

Probabile vero videtur quod omnes partes correspon- But I think
j r*. • • r-. 1 • • ■ ■ n that the

dentes Cristi sunt 111 Eukanstia sine posicione, ngura, different parts

vel quantitate harum continua, sicud humanitas Cristi of Chrisfs

" . ..... . . Body are m

I0 non concomitatur ubique existenciam Verbi quamvis sit the Host

eadem persona; et quo ad permanenciam correspon- p sition,°iigure

dentis transsubstanciati soleo dicere quod non anichi- or .IH 3 " 11 ? 7 ;

\ . and that the

iatur vel corrumpitur ex vi conversionis, sed manet bread is not

, • • 1 • 1 annihilated, but

unum corpus subiectans accidencia panis, quod voco remains a body
i^corpus mathematicum in abstractum. Sicud enim sub- which is the

' ■ f ... subject ot lts

stancia prius non est ens quam est quid, sic panis accidents, and

1 • which I call a

pnus natura est corpus quam est panis vel cuius- ma thematical

cunque alterius speciei specialissime. Et sic idem esse, bod .v-

quod prius est panis, manet corpus sub illo gradu

20 quidditatis generalis; sed non manet pure corpus Cristi

nec panis pure. sed panis convertitur in corpus Cristi;

quia panis manet corpus Christi sacramentaliter, existens

sub illis accidentibus sub quibus formaliter panis fuit.

Unde, quia panis non est corpus Cristi primarie The bread is

' " * r . r . not Chnst s

B 147" existens per illum situm, sed subordinatur ut sit Body, but is

sacramentale signum corpori inibi principalius existenti ; sacram e enta i

ideo non manet post conversionem panis; sicud quidam sign ot that
r r l which exists

dicunt propter talem causam elementa non manere m principally in

mixtis in actu, sed tantum in potencia. Quia vero ista ca ; nn oYbe Mid
^o materia isti loco est inpertinens, ideo non tracto eam to remain atter

1 transub-

ulterius, sed exspecto determinacionem tractare de stantiation.
speciali quidditate illius sacramenti sensibilis remanentis. B Vrreleva h nt 118

Accidens autem est sicud quelibet creatura est sub- matter, I prefer

.,,. n . , dealmg with lt

stancia, quia per se tlhs accidentibus que vtdemus separately.

35 subiectata; quia aliter foret nimia sensus illusio.

2. figa B. 3. que^B. 7—8. corr^ B. 25. per illum | per

illum B. 21"). ibc? B.

i5. Corpus mathematicum. See, as to the successive stages
of Wyclifs opinions on the subject, De Benedicta Incarnatione,
by Dr. Poole. Int. IX. 3i. Tractare. Wyclif kept his promise
in De Eucharistia, but at a time when his ideas were much
more developed than here.

138 JOHANNIS WYCLIF CAP. X.

\\"e ihus admit Redeundo ergo, concedendum est res esse valde

ihat things arc • • 1 • ' -i_ 1

said to be in equivoce in locis et temponbus, ut patet tam de

different timcs corporalibus quam de spiritualibus. Res vero que simul

most sunt corporalia et spiritualia dicuntur locari equivoce,

equivocallv ; , , • . . . . -

as iwe see for secundum disparem racionem verborum ; ut heroyci 3
spirit, matter, sensibili modo dicuntur esse in celo, cum non solum

compounds of causant in celo relaciones, sed supereminenter afficiuntur
The soul is et laborant in terris circa celestia. Unde, secundum

more where lts Lincolniensem, anima est verius cum illo cui atficitur

ULM L C lo 1 I I ■ ' • I

where its quam ubi informat; et illo modo dicunt philosophi 10

bodv is; ■ . . ■• , . ,- . ,. ,.

the power of virtutem visivam (et ahasj subito egredi et esse cum
it^obect^and sentltls: q u °d s ane intellectum non habet calumpniam.
may be said to Et sic aliqui vocantes species sensibiles in medio dicunt
towards it. quod ipsum multiplicat se intensius per totum medium;
lt -{?i spose - s the quia aliter non esset res principaliter naturalis, ubi- i5
space to cunque videtur. Et sentencia illorum est unica cum

become visible, •, - - , , • • ,•

ponentibus species; quia nemo dubitat quin medium

and this is the habet disposicionem ad causandum visionem ; et mediinn

lmage that \ve , , r , . '

see confusedly. sic disponi est species illa quam homo sic confuse videt

When we c , • , • , . ,- . ,. • - ..

look in a ^ etl in speculo videt distincte disposicionem specuh 20

glass, we see q Uam vocat ymago. Et sic videt speculum confuse quo
ihe mirror s * J ° r "

shape, size, &c. ad eius colorem vel figuram, sed distincte quo ad

confuscdly and • 1 -n j • , i- • ,

its place situm. hed lllud cuius est ymago videt distincte quo ad
distinctly; i sta et erranter quo ad situm. Tali ereo sensibili modo

but conversely . 7 . . . °

for what wc est corpus Cristi in Eukaristia, et non extensive. Et 2 3

see in it; • , • .......

and Chrisrs llJeo non oportet ipsum moveri, sed multiplican, ut

Body in the s i t Jbi.

Host ls thus.

Nor does it Nec sequitur aliquod reliquum equiparari deo in

follow that 1 /.. • • j • 1 -i -j

anything is essendo ubique, quia lpse secundum nichu sui deest
everywhere as a ]j a iiq UO p Un cto mundi; sed omne creatum ibi existens 3o

Ood is, tor He . .

is essencially causat inmediate et essencialiter ultimate; et taliter
in everv point , ,• ,. ...,,., . ,

f ,he clauuit contradiccionem ahquid ahud esse ubique. Ideo,

umverse; j e q Uan to sic causat omne causatum in aliquo loco,

other things dicitur replere orbem terrarum, dum alia que sunt

in imagination secundum solum fantasticam relacionis causacionem 35

alicubi non dicuntur nec fantastice esse ibi; ideo nec

active replent omnem locum ut deus, nec causant

illud quod subiective replet locum. Ideo dicuntur ab

5. hcroijci B. i^. inteusio r )!. 21. ygo H.

5. Heroyci, i. e. the Saints. The first condition of canoni-
zation is 'heroic virtue'.

C AP. X. LOGICA.

139

aliquibus nusquam esse. Mundus autem cum sua and the world
quantitate, licet sit ubique, hoc est ad omnem situm 'everywherf 11

B 147" cum multis eius sitibus, desunt quotlibet I eius partes has not a " its
. _, ,. , ' . , . temporal and

temporales. ht hcet secundum se totum sit ubique ; local parts

5 tamen pro quolibet instanti eius desunt quotlibet eius ^^fTimef '"

partes. Sed secus est de deo.

Ad 2 111 dico quod omne corporeum est extensum, To the _ ud we

sicud et omne moveri corporeum. Nec sequitur; A ^w bodHyls^

adequate est sic in illo loco, et iain non est adequate in extended and is

•,, , , , . , .,, . ihe movement

10 iiio loco; ergOj movetur vel movebitur ad illum; quia of a body.

antecedens potest verificari per ablacionem parcium A, Ibsent^rom

cum hoc quod residuum illius A fuerit continue in isto a P |ace once

1 tt j , i- 1 . occupied does

loco. Unde non oportet ex antecedente tali quod A not necessariiy

aquirat aliquem locum ; sed solum sit ibi secundum se chamre of

tDtotum, ubi continue fuit eius pars per reliquam partis P |ace -

ablacionem; ymmo stat animam multiplicari per ali-

mentum advenie